Tender No. HLL/PCD/ESIC-03/08-09 dt. 05.03.09 for

Transcription

TEDER EQUIRY DOCUMET
FOR PURCHASE OF
MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
FOR AD O BEHALF OF
EMPLOYEE STATE ISURACE CORPORATIO
UDER THE ADMIISTRATIVE COTROL OF
MIISTRY OF LABOUR AD EMPLOYMET
GOVT. OF IDIA
HLL/PCD/ESIC-03/08 – 09
BY
HLL Lifecare Limited
(A GOVT. OF IDIA ETERPRISE & Formerly HIDUSTA LATEX LTD.)
Procurement & Consultancy Services Division
B-12, Sector-59,
oida-201 301
PHOE: 0120-4324572
FAX: 0120-4324573
URL: www.lifecarehll.com
Email: [email protected]
IDEX
Section
Topic
Page o.
Section I
– Notice inviting Tender (NIT) ------------------------------------------------------------ 03
Section II
– General Instructions to Tenderers (GIT) ----------------------------------------------- 05
Section III
– Special Instructions to Tenderers (SIT) ------------------------------------------------ 23
Section IV
– General Conditions of Contract (GCC) ------------------------------------------------ 24
Section V
– Special Conditions of Contract (SCC) ------------------------------------------------- 38
Section VI
– List of Requirements --------------------------------------------------------------------- 39
Section VII – Technical Specifications ----------------------------------------------------------------- 40
Section VIII – Quality Control Requirements ---------------------------------------------------------- 64
Section IX
– Qualification Criteria -------------------------------------------------------------------- 65
Section X
– Tender Form ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 67
Section XI
– Price Schedules ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 68
Section XII – Questionnaire ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 72
Section XIII – Bank Guarantee Form for EMD -------------------------------------------------------- 73
Section XIV – Manufacturer’s Authorisation Form --------------------------------------------------- 74
Section XV – Bank Guarantee Form for Performance Security /AMC Security ----------------- 75
Section XVI – Contract Form (A & B) ------------------------------------------------------------------ 76
Section XVII – Proforma of Consignee Receipt Certificate ------------------------------------------- 80
Section XVIII– Proforma of Final Acceptance Certificate by the Consignee ---------------------- 81
Section XIX – Details of Shipping arrangement for Liner Cargoes in respect of C&F/CIF/
TurnkeyF.O.R. Contracts for Import--------------------------------------------------- 83
Section XX – Check List for the Tenderers ----------------------------------------------------------- 84
Section XXI – Consignee---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 87
SECTIO I
OTICE IVITIG TEDERS (IT)
(Formerly Hindustan Latex Limited)
(A GOVERMET OF IDIA ETERPRISE)
Procurement & Consultancy Services Division
B-12, Sector-59, oida-201 301
URL: www.lifecarehll.com
Email: [email protected]
PHOE: 0120-4324572
Tender Enquiry o.: HLL/PCD/ESIC-03/08-09
1.
Dated: 05.03.2009
Procurement & Consultancy Services Division of HLL Lifecare Limited (Formerly Hindustan Latex
Limited), for and on behalf of Director General of Employee State Insurance Corporation (ESIC),
invites sealed tenders, from eligible and qualified tenderers for supply of following medical
equipment and hospital furniture for Gurgaon (Haryana) & other ESI Hospitals:
Sl. No.
1
Paging System Console
Name of items
Total Qty.
1
EMD (Rs.)
4,000
2
Nurse call system
12
19,200
3
Glucometer
82
8,200
4
Calorimeter
5
2,500
5
Semi-automated Clinical Chemistry Analyser
2
16,000
6
Fully automatic random access biochemistry analyzer (medium
throughput)
1
30,000
7
Blood Gas Analyser
3
42,000
8
Bilirubinometer
3
6,000
9
Electrolyte Analyser
3
36,000
10
Binocular Microscope
11
8,800
11
Microscope Binocular with illumination & photography
1
5,000
12
Microscope Binocular with illumination
4
16,000
13
Water Bath(22L)
2
2,800
14
Water Bath (30L)
2
4,000
15
Centrifuge (24-36 tube)
7
11,200
16
Centrifuge Refrigerated
1
4,000
17
Centrifuge Cyto / Cyto span
1
3,000
18
Vortex mixer
4
8,000
19
Laboratory glassware washer
1
4,000
20
Incubator
3
12,000
21
Water Deionizer (4 LpH)
1
4,000
22
Heamoglbinometer
2
2,400
HLL/PCD/ESIC-03/08-09
Page 3
Dated 05.03.2009
23
Automatic blood cell counter
2
60,000
24
Neubauer Chamber
8
3,200
25
ESR Analyser
1
4,000
26
Coagulation analyzer
1
10,000
27
Haemocytometer
2
4,000
28
Biosafety Hood
1
6,000
29
Blood bank refrigeratgor (2-6º C),
1
6,000
30
Refrigerator 2000 Lts for kits
2
6,000
31
Refrigerator with freezer 2000 Ltr
7
35,000
32
Refrigerator - 1600 Ltr
15
30,000
33
Refrigerator - 1200 Ltr
3
4,800
34
Refrigerator Under couch - 300 Ltr
10
10,000
35
Refrigerator - Deep freezer (-40º C) 200 Ltr
2
8,000
36
Complete Dental Unit
1
13,000
37
DentalL X-Ray
1
4,000
38
Dental x-ray Film Developer
1
3,000
39
intra oral, digital radiography/imaging
1
6,000
40
Panoramic x-ray
1
20,000
41
Dental instrument set
1
8,000
42
Computerised Aneasthesia Dose Delivery System for Dental
2
4,000
43
Wall mounted exam light 10000 lux
2
8,000
44
Examination lamp wall mounted - 5000 lux
48
9,600
45
Examination lamp mobile - 50000 lux
4
4,000
46
Sphygmomanometer
82
8,200
47
Electronic BP apparatus
24
4,800
48
Stethescope
78
4,680
49
Hi speed steam Flash sterilizer
3
9,000
50
Steam Sterilizer 450 Ltr, horizontal, two door, with gravity drying, with
all accessories like loading/unloading trolleys, loading baskets(built in
steam generator)
4
40,000
51
Weighing scale - neonatal
6
3,600
52
X-Ray systems – 300 mA & 500 mA
1
120,000
53
CR Reader & monitor
1
40,000
54
Dry film printer (laser printer)
2
40,000
55
X-ray processor - Automatic, Dark room Light shields, exhaust
1
6,000
56
C-arm with DSA system
1
80,000
57
Portable x-ray unit 30 kW
2
20,000
58
Portable ultrasound B & W
1
6,000
59
General purpose Ultrasound Diagnostic system
1
50,000
60
Portable ultrasound with colour doppler
2
60,000
61
Air warmer – (Patient warmer)
6
12,000
Page 4
Dated 05.03.2009
62
Baby warmer
4
2,400
63
Baby bassinet
8
2,400
64
Infant resuscitator
5
30,000
65
Patient monitor - with neonatal accesories
6
18,000
66
Ventillator - Critical care
11
176,000
67
ENT Microdrilling System
1
6,000
68
ENT Operating Microscope
3
150,000
69
ENT Micro Debrider for FESS (Imported)
1
9,000
70
Audiometer
1
4,000
71
Tympanometer
1
6,000
72
OAE Tester – Hearing screener
1
4,000
73
ENT Examination unit complete including cabinets, with treatment
couch etc (with compressed air & vac)
1
6,000
74
Schiotz -Applanation Tonometer-1
1
6,800
75
Refractometer / Keratometer on stand
1
6,000
76
Ophthalmic Ultrasound (A and B)
1
12,000
77
Slit lamp with application tonometer and stand
3
12,000
78
Operating microscope - ophthalmology
2
100,000
79
Ophthalmoscope – Direct
5
4,000
80
Tonometer
1
6,800
81
Streak Retinoscope
4
16,000
82
Non contact tonometer on stand
1
4,000
83
Digital Retinal Camera
1
6,000
84
Yag Laser for Ophthalmology
1
19,000
85
Green Laser for Ophthalmology
1
26,000
86
Phako machine
1
50,000
87
Surgical Instruments for Opthalmology (set)
2
8,000
88
Pneumatic Drill complete
2
68,000
89
Arthoscope set complete
2
80,000
90
Instrument Set for Orthopaedic Surgery
2
44,000
91
Drill & Saw system - Battery cum electric Operated
2
80,000
92
Tourniquet - Automatic electronic with hose & cuffs
2
4,000
93
Technical Specifications for Ultrasonic Aspirator
1
6,000
94
Ultrasonic Nebulizer
23
4,600
95
Ventilator portable
4
24,000
96
ECG Single channel - portable
6
6,000
97
ECG 12 channel - Page printer with cart.
3
7,200
98
Patient Monitor
20
60,000
99
Multiparameter Monitor
18
72,000
100
Central Monitoring Station for multi para monitor
3
30,000
Page 5
Dated 05.03.2009
101
Pulse Oximeter
15
13,500
102
Defibrillator with monitor
12
84,000
103
Fetal monitor
3
4,500
104
Deleted
--
105
Fetal Doppler - handheld
5
15,000
106
Fetal Doppler – twin
1
5,000
107
Diode laser
1
14,000
108
Laparoscopy System with Instruments – General Surgery
1
32,000
109
Suction machine - electric
33
5,280
110
Anaesthesia Workstation
7
210,000
111
Ambulatory Blood Pressure Monitor
1
4,000
112
Surgical diathermy (electro cautery)
11
66,000
113
Fibre Optic Laryngoscope
2
8,000
114
Fibre Optic Bronchoscope Adult with light source
1
10,000
115
Fibre Optic Bronchoscope Paed
1
6,000
116
Infusion pump
49
63,700
117
Ventilator BIPAP
2
12,000
118
Videocolposcope
1
8,000
119
Entenox delivery unit
2
8,000
120
Cysto-urethro-resectoscope (set)
1
22,000
121
Cystoscope
1
11,000
122
Electrical stimulator (interferential Theraphy)
1
4,000
123
Shortwave diathermy unit -250 W Therapy
1
10,000
124
Microwave therapy unit
1
4,000
125
EtO Steriliser
1
30,000
126
Transport incubator
1
16,000
127
Water Treatment System for producing Disinfectant Solution
1
10,000
128
Infant Ventillator
2
40,000
129
Laparoscopy System with Instruments – Gyneac Surgery
1
40,000
130
Hysteroscopy System
2
18,000
131
Steriliser Dental - Cassette Autoclave
1
5,000
132
Sterilizer Dental - Electric
1
5,000
133
Plaster saw with suction machine
3
5,000
134
Personal Protection System
2
5,000
135
Patient trolley for General Procedure & emergency and recovery trolley
8
8,000
136
Medicine trolley/ crash cart
10
7,000
137
Dressing trolley
30
9,000
138
Monitor trolley
5
5,000
139
Transport trolley S.Steel 45x45 Cm x 80 Cm H one shelf, open, SS top
13
6,500
Page 6
--
Dated 05.03.2009
140
Wheel chair
10
4,000
141
Mayo table
3
2,100
142
Double Step Foot stool - OPD
40
4,000
143
Dangerous drug cabinet
11
8,800
144
IV stand/ Saline Stand
36
2,160
145
Change Locker - 6unit
37
11,100
146
Patient Bed Fowler position bed
110
330,000
147
Bedside Locker
122
24,400
148
Adjustable Over bed Table
122
24,400
149
Fracture Table(Procedure Table) with all traction accessories&ortho
sets.
2
4,000
150
Operating table-Electrohydraulic
5
25,000
151
Patient Couch for ultrasound examination and patient examination
rooms
24
24,000
152
Patient bed - Four Section Bed for ICU/ Recovery Room
12
48,000
153
Baby crib
7
2,100
154
Labour cum birthing bed
2
10,000
155
Closed SS Trolley (to transport sterile items to OT)
2
2,400
156
Closed SS Trolley (to transport unsterile items from OT to CSSD)
2
2,400
157
SS Food Trolley
2
2,400
158
All purpose steel stool
150
3,000
159
Pediatric ICU Bed
2
8,000
160
Patient Transfer Chair
2
5,000
2. Tender o.: HLL/PCD/ESIC-03/08 – 09
Sl No.
i.
Description
Schedule
Dates of sale of tender enquiry documents
07.03.2009 to 08.04.2009, 1600 Hrs. IST
ii.
Place of sale of Tender Enquiry Documents
iii.
Cost of the Tender Enquiry Document
(Formerly Hindustan Latex Limited)
Procurement & Consultancy Services Divn.
B-12, Sector-59, Noida -201 301
Rs. 3000.00/ USD 75.00
iv
Pre Tender Meeting Date & Time
18.03.2009, 1100 Hrs. IST
v
Pre Tender Meeting Venue
Same as given in 2 (ii)
vi.
Closing date & time for receipt of Tender
09.04.2009, 1200 Hrs. IST
vii.
Time and date of opening of Techno-Commercial
tenders
09.04.2009, 1230 Hrs. IST
viii
Venue of Opening of Techno Commercial Tender Same as given in 2 (ii)
Page 7
Dated 05.03.2009
3. Interested tenderers may obtain further information about this requirement from the above office
selling the documents. Tender Enquiry Documents may be purchased on payment of non-refundable
fee of Rs. 3,000.00/ USD 75.00 per set in the form of account payee Demand Draft/Pay
Order/Cashier’s Cheque/Banker’s Cheque, drawn on a scheduled bank in India, in favour of “HLL
Lifecare Limited” payable at New Delhi.
4. If requested, the Tender Enquiry Documents will be mailed by Registered Post/Speed Post to the
domestic tenderers and by international airmail to the foreign tenderers, for which extra expenditure
per set will be Rs 100.00 for domestic post and USD 50.00 for international airmail. The tenderer is to
add the applicable postage cost in the non-refundable fee mentioned in Para 3 above.
5. Tenderer may also download the tender enquiry documents from the web site www.esic.nic.in or
www.lifecarehll.com and submit its tender by utilizing the downloaded document, along with the
required non-refundable fee as mentioned in Para 3 above.
6. All prospective tenderers may attend the Pre Tender meeting. The venue, date and time indicated in the
Para 2 above
7. Tenderers shall ensure that their tenders, complete in all respects, are dropped in the Tender Box
located at HLL Lifecare Limited (Formerly Hindustan Latex Limited), Procurement and
Consultancy Division, B-12, Sector -59, oida -201301, Uttar Pradesh on or before the closing date
and time indicated in the Para 2 above, failing which the tenders will be treated as late tender and
rejected. The tenders sent by post/ courier must reach the above said address on or before the closing
date & time indicated in Para 2 above, failing which the tenders will be treated as late tender and
rejected.
8. In the event of any of the above mentioned dates being declared as a holiday / closed day for the
purchase organisation, the tenders will be sold/received/opened on the next working day at the
appointed time.
9. The Tender Enquiry Documents are not transferable.
10. All Tenders must be accompanied by EMD as mentioned against each item. Tenders without EMD
shall be rejected.
For and on behalf of Employee State Insurance Corporation
Head (P & CD)
HLL Lifecare Limited,
Procurement and Consultancy Division
B-12, Sector -59, oida -201301,
Uttar Pradesh
Page 8
Dated 05.03.2009
SECTIO - II
GEERAL ISTRUCTIOS TO TEDERERS (GIT)
COTETS
Page
o.
Sl.
Topic
o.
A PREAMBLE
1
Definitions and Abbreviations
11
2
Introduction
12
3
Deleted
--
4
Language of Tender
13
5
Eligible Tenderers
13
6
Eligible Goods and Services
13
7
Tendering Expense
13
B
TEDER EQUIRY DOCUMETS
8
Contents of Tender Enquiry Documents
13
9
Amendments to Tender Enquiry Documents
14
10
Clarification of Tender Enquiry Documents
14
C
PREPARATIO OF TEDERS
11
Documents Comprising the Tender
14
12
Tender Currencies
15
13
Tender Prices
15
14
Indian Agent
18
15
Firm Price / Variable Price
18
16
Alternative Tenders
18
17
Documents Establishing Tenderer’s Eligibility and
Qualifications
18
18
Documents Establishing Good’s Conformity to Tender
Enquiry Document
18
19
Earnest Money Deposit (EMD)
19
20
Tender Validity
20
21
Signing and Sealing of Tender
20
D
SUBMISSIO OF TEDERS
22
Submission of Tenders
20
23
Late Tender
21
24
Alteration and Withdrawal of Tender
21
E
TEDER OPEIG
Page 9
Dated 05.03.2009
25
Opening of Tenders
F
SCRUTIY AD EVALUATIO OF TEDERS
26
Basic Principle
22
27
Preliminary Scrutiny of Tenders
22
28
Minor Infirmity/Irregularity/Non-Conformity
29
Discrepancy in Prices
22
23
30
Discrepancy between original and copies of Tender
23
31
Qualification Criteria
23
32
Conversion of Tender Currencies to Indian Rupees
23
33
Schedule-wise Evaluation
23
34
Comparison of Tenders
23
35
Additional Factors and Parameters for Evaluation and
Ranking of Responsive Tenders
23
36
Tenderer’s capability to perform the contract
24
37
Contacting the Purchaser
24
G
21
AWARD OF COTRACT
38
Purchaser’s Right to Accept any Tender and to Reject
any or All Tenders
24
39
Award Criteria
24
40
Variation of Quantities at the Time of Award
24
41
Notification of Award
25
42
Issue of Contract
25
43
Non-receipt of Performance Security and Contract by
the Purchaser/Consignee
25
44
Return of EMD
25
45
Publication of Tender Result
25
46
Corrupt or Fraudulent Practices
25
Page 10
Dated 05.03.2009
A. PREAMBLE
1.
Definitions and Abbreviations
1.1
The following definitions and abbreviations, which have been used in these documents shall have
the meanings as indicated below:
1.2.
Definitions:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
(xii)
1.3
“Purchaser” means the organization purchasing goods and services as incorporated in the
Tender Enquiry document.
“Tender” means Bids / Quotation / Tender received from a Firm / Tenderer / Bidder.
“Tenderer” means Bidder/ the Individual or Firm submitting Bids / Quotation / Tender
“Supplier” means the individual or the firm supplying the goods and services as
incorporated in the contract.
“Goods” means the articles, material, commodities, livestock, furniture, fixtures, raw
material, spares, instruments, machinery, equipment, medical equipment, industrial plant
etc. which the supplier is required to supply to the purchaser under the contract.
“Services” means services allied and incidental to the supply of goods, such as
transportation, installation, commissioning, provision of technical assistance, training,
after sales service, maintenance service and other such obligations of the supplier covered
under the contract.
“Earnest Money Deposit” (EMD) means Bid Security/ monetary or financial guarantee to
be furnished by a tenderer along with its tender.
“Contract” means the written agreement entered into between the purchaser and/or
consignee and the supplier, together with all the documents mentioned therein and
including all attachments, annexure etc. therein.
“Performance Security” means monetary or financial guarantee to be furnished by the
successful tenderer for due performance of the contract placed on it. Performance Security
is also known as Security Deposit.
“Consignee” means the Hospital/Dispensaries/Institute/Medical College/ person to whom
the goods are required to be delivered as specified in the Contract. If the goods are
required to be delivered to a person as an interim consignee for the purpose of despatch to
another person as provided in the Contract then that “another” person is the consignee,
also known as ultimate consignee.
“Specification” means the document/standard that prescribes the requirement with which
goods or service has to conform.
“Inspection” means activities such as measuring, examining, testing, gauging one or more
characteristics of the product or service and comparing the same with the specified
requirement to determine conformity.
“Day” means calendar day.
Abbreviations:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
“T E Document” means Tender Enquiry Document
“NIT” means Notice Inviting Tenders.
“GIT” means General Instructions to Tenderers
“SIT” means Special Instructions to Tenderers
“GCC” means General Conditions of Contract
“SCC” means Special Conditions of Contract
Page 11
Dated 05.03.2009
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
(xii)
(xiii)
(xiv)
(xv)
(xvi)
(xvii)
(xviii)
(xix)
(xx)
(xxi)
(xxii)
(xxiii)
(xxiv)
(xxv)
(xxvi)
(xxvii)
“DGS&D” means Directorate General of Supplies and Disposals
“NSIC” means National Small Industries Corporation
“PSU” means Public Sector Undertaking
“CPSU” means Central Public Sector Undertaking
“LSI” means Large Scale Industry
“SSI” means Small Scale Industry
“LC” means Letter of Credit
“DP” means Delivery Period
“BG” means Bank Guarantee
“ED” means Excise Duty
“CD” means Custom Duty
“VAT” means Value Added Tax
“CENVAT” means Central Value Added Tax
“CST” means Central Sales Tax
“RR” means Railway Receipt
“BL” means Bill of Lading
“FOB” means Free on Board
“FCA” means Free Carrier
“FOR” means Free On Rail
“CIF” means Cost, Insurance and Freight
“CIP (Destinations)” means Carriage and Insurance Paid up to named port of
destination. Additionally the Insurance (local transportation and storage) would be
extended and borne by the Supplier from ware house to the consignee site for a period
including 3 months beyond date of delivery.
(xxviii) “DDP” means Delivery Duty Paid named place of destination (consignee site)
(xxix) “INCOTERMS” means International Commercial Terms as on the date of Tender
Opening
(xxx) ”ESIC” means Employee State Insurance Corporation.
(xxxi) “DG” means Director General of ESIC under the administrative control of Ministry of
Labour and Employment
(xxxii) “AMC” means Annual Maintenance Contract (labour and preventive maintenance)
(xxxiii) “RT” means Re-Tender.
2.
Introduction
2.1
The Purchaser has issued these TE documents for purchase of goods and related services as
mentioned in Section – VI – “List of Requirements”, which also indicates, interalia, the required
quantity, delivery schedule, terms and place of delivery.
This section (Section II - “General Instructions to Tenderers”) provides the relevant information as
well as instructions to assist the prospective tenderers in preparation and submission of tenders. It
also includes the mode and procedure to be adopted by the purchaser for receipt and opening as
well as scrutiny and evaluation of tenders and subsequent placement of contract.
The tenderers shall also read the Special Instructions to Tenderers (SIT) related to this purchase, as
contained in Section III of these documents and follow the same accordingly. Whenever there is a
conflict between the GIT and the SIT, the provisions contained in the SIT shall prevail over those
in the GIT.
Before formulating the tender and submitting the same to the purchaser, the tenderer should read
and examine all the terms, conditions, instructions, checklist etc. contained in the TE documents.
Failure to provide and/or comply with the required information, instructions etc. incorporated in
these TE documents may result in rejection of its tender.
2.2
2.3
2.4
Page 12
Dated 05.03.2009
3.
Deleted
4.
Language of Tender
4.1
The tender submitted by the tenderer and all subsequent correspondence and documents relating to
the tender exchanged between the tenderer and the purchaser, shall be written in the English
language, unless otherwise specified in the Tender Enquiry. However, the language of any printed
literature furnished by the tenderer in connection with its tender may be written in any other
language provided the same is accompanied by a notarised English translation and, for purposes of
interpretation of the tender, the English translation shall prevail.
The tender submitted by the tenderer and all subsequent correspondence and documents relating to
the tender exchanged between the tenderer and the purchaser, may also be written in the Hindi
language, provided that the same are accompanied by notarised English translation, in which case,
for purpose of interpretation of the tender etc, the English translations shall prevail.
4.2
5.
Eligible Tenderers
5.1
This invitation for tenders is open to all suppliers who fulfil the eligibility criteria specified in these
documents.
6.
Eligible Goods and Services
6.1
All goods and related services to be supplied under the contract shall have their origin in India or
any other country with which India has not banned trade relations. The term “origin” used in this
clause means the place where the goods are mined, grown, produced, or manufactured or from
where the related services are arranged and supplied.
7.
Tendering Expense
7.1
The tenderer shall bear all costs and expenditure incurred and/or to be incurred by it in connection
with its tender including preparation, mailing and submission of its tender and for subsequent
processing the same. The purchaser will, in no case be responsible or liable for any such cost,
expenditure etc regardless of the conduct or outcome of the tendering process.
B. TEDER EQUIRY DOCUMETS
8.
Content of Tender Enquiry Documents
8.1
In addition to Section I – “Notice inviting Tender” (NIT), the TE documents include:
Section II
Section III
Section IV
Section V
Section VI
Section VII
Section VIII
Section IX
Section X
Section XI
Section XII
Section XIII
Section XIV
Section XV
Section XVI
Section XVII
Section XVIII
– General Instructions to Tenderers (GIT)
– Special Instructions to Tenderers (SIT)
– General Conditions of Contract (GCC)
– Special Conditions of Contract (SCC)
– List of Requirements
– Technical Specifications
– Quality Control Requirements
– Qualification Criteria
– Tender Form
– Price Schedules
– Questionnaire
– Bank Guarantee Form for EMD
– Manufacturer’s Authorisation Form
– Bank Guarantee Form for Performance Security/AMC Security
– Contract Forms A & B
– Proforma of Consignee Receipt Certificate
– Proforma of Final Acceptance Certificate by the consignee
Page 13
Dated 05.03.2009
Section XIX – Deleted
Section XX – Check List for the Tenderers
Section XXI – Consignee List
8.2
The relevant details of the required goods and services, the terms, conditions and procedure for
tendering, tender evaluation, placement of contract, the applicable contract terms and, also, the
standard formats to be used for this purpose are incorporated in the above-mentioned documents.
The interested tenderers are expected to examine all such details etc to proceed further.
9.
Amendments to TE documents
9.1
At any time prior to the deadline for submission of tenders, the purchaser may, for any reason
deemed fit by it, modify the TE documents by issuing suitable amendment(s) to it.
Such an amendment will be notified in writing by registered/speed post/courier or by fax/email,
followed by copy of the same by registered post/courier to all prospective tenderers, who have
received the TE documents and will be binding on them.
In order to provide reasonable time to the prospective tenderers to take necessary action in
preparing their tenders as per the amendment, the purchaser may, at its discretion extend the
deadline for the submission of tenders and other allied time frames, which are linked with that
deadline.
9.2
9.3
10.
Clarification of TE documents
10.1
A tenderer requiring any clarification or elucidation on any issue of the TE documents may take up
the same with the purchaser in writing. The purchaser will respond in writing to such request
provided the purchaser receives the same on or before the scheduled date of pre-bid meeting.
C. PREPARATIO OF TEDERS
11.
Documents Comprising the Tender
11.1
The Two Tender System, i.e. “Techno – Commercial Tender” and “Price Tender” prepared by the
tenderer shall comprise the following:
A)
Techno – Commercial Tender (Un priced Tender)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
xii)
Earnest money furnished in accordance with GIT clause 19.1 alternatively, documentary
evidence as per GIT clause 19.2 for claiming exemption from payment of earnest money.
Tender Form as per Section X (Un priced).
Documentary evidence, as necessary in terms of clauses 5 and 17 establishing that the
tenderer is eligible to submit the tender and, also, qualified to perform the contract if its
tender is accepted.
Tenderer/Agent who quotes for goods manufactured by other manufacturer shall furnish
Manufacturer’s Authorisation in the prescribed format as per Section - XIV
Power of Attorney/Authorisation in favour of signatory of TE documents
Documents and relevant details to establish in accordance with GIT clause 18 that the goods
and the allied services to be supplied by the tenderer conform to the requirement of the TE
documents.
Performance Statement as per section IX along with relevant copies of purchase orders and
end users’ satisfaction certificate.
Price Schedule(s) as per Section XII filled up with all the details including Make, Model,
etc. of the goods offered with prices blank (without indicating any prices).
Certificate of Incorporation of the bidder.
Checklist as per Section XX.
Statement of deviations parameter wise from tendered technical specifications, if any.
Statement of deviations para wise from tendered commercial conditions, if any.
Page 14
Dated 05.03.2009
B)
Price Tender:
The information given at clause no. 11.1 A) ii) & viii) above should be reproduced with the prices
indicated.
.B.
1. All pages of the Tender should be page numbered and indexed.
2. It is the responsibility of tenderer to go through the TE document to ensure furnishing all
required documents in addition to above, if any.
11.2
11.4
The authorized signatory of the tenderer must sign the tender duly stamped at appropriate places
and initial all the remaining pages of the tender.
A tender, which does not fulfil any of the above requirements and/or gives evasive
information/reply against any such requirement, shall be liable to be ignored and rejected.
Tender sent by fax/telex/cable/electronically shall be ignored.
12.
Tender currencies
12.1
12.3
The tenderer supplying indigenous goods or already imported goods shall quote only in Indian
Rupees.
For imported goods if supplied directly from abroad, prices shall be quoted in any freely
convertible currencies say USD, Euro, GBP or Yen. As regards price(s) for allied services, if any
required with the goods, the same shall be quoted in Indian Rupees only if such services are to be
performed /undertaken in India. Commission for Indian Agent, if any and if payable shall be
indicated in the space provided for in the price schedule and will be payable in Indian Rupees only.
Tenders, where prices are quoted in any other way shall be treated as non-responsive and rejected.
13
Tender Prices
13.1
The Tenderer shall indicate on the Price Schedule provided under Section XI all the specified
components of prices shown therein including the unit prices and total tender prices of the goods
and services it proposes to supply against the requirement. All the columns shown in the price
schedule should be filled up as required. If any column does not apply to a tenderer, same should be
clarified as “NA” by the tenderer.
If there is more than one schedule in the List of Requirements, the tenderer has the option to submit
its quotation for any one or more schedules.
The quoted prices for goods offered from within India and that for goods offered from abroad are to
be indicated separately in the applicable Price Schedules attached under Section XI.
11.3
12.2
13.2
13.3
The price quoted by the tenderer for indigenous goods shall no be higher than the lowest price
charged for the goods of the same nature, class or description to an individual/ firm/ organisation or
department of Govt. of India.
For imported goods, the price quoted shall not be higher than the lowest price charged by the
tenderer for the goods of the same nature, class or description to a purchaser, domestic or foreign or
to any organisation or department of Govt. of India.
If it is found at any stage that the goods as stated have been supplied at a lower price, then that
price, with due allowance for elapsed time will be applicable to the present case and the difference
in cost would be refunded by the supplier to the purchaser, if the contract has already been
concluded.
13.4
While filling up the columns of the Price Schedule, the following aspects should be noted for
compliance:
Page 15
Dated 05.03.2009
13.4.1 For domestic goods or goods of foreign origin located within India, the prices in the
corresponding price schedule shall be entered separately in the following manner:
a) the price of the goods, quoted ex-factory/ ex-showroom/ ex-warehouse/ off-the-shelf, as
applicable, including all taxes and duties like sales tax, CST VAT, CENVAT, Custom Duty,
Excise Duty etc. already paid or payable on the components and raw material used in the
manufacture or assembly of the goods quoted ex-factory etc. or on the previously imported
goods of foreign origin quoted ex-showroom etc;
b) any sales or other taxes and any duties including excise duty, which will be payable on the
finished goods in India if the contract is awarded;
c) charges towards Packing & Forwarding, Inland Transportation, Insurance,
Loading/Unloading and other local costs incidental to delivery of the goods to their
final destination as specified in the List of Requirements and Price Schedule;
d) the price of Incidental Services, as mentioned in List of Requirements and Price Schedule;
e) the prices of Turnkey ( if any), as mentioned in List of Requirements, Technical Specification
and Price Schedule; and
f) the price of AMC, as mentioned in List of Requirements, Technical Specification and Price
Schedule.
13.4.2 For goods offered from abroad, the prices in the corresponding price schedule shall be
entered separately in the following manner:
a) the price of goods quoted FOB port of shipment, as indicated in the List of Requirements and
Price Schedule;
b) the amount of freight and insurance and price of goods quoted CIP port of entry in India as
indicated in the List of Requirements and Price Schedule;
c) the price of goods quoted should be on DDP basis at consignee site in India as indicated in the
List of Requirements, Price Schedule and Consignee List;
d) wherever applicable, the amount of custom duty with CDEC applicable on CIP value on the
goods to be imported; ESIC will issue Customs Duty Exemption Certificate (CDEC) where
applicable.
e) the charges for Loading/Unloading, Inland transportation, Insurance and other local costs,
Incidental cost to delivery of the goods from the port of entry in India to Consignee Site, as
specified in the List of Requirements and Price Schedule;
f) the charges for Incidental Services, as in the List of Requirements and Price Schedule;
g) the prices of Turnkey ( if any), as mentioned in List of Requirements, Technical Specification
and Price Schedule; and
h) the price of AMC, as mentioned in List of Requirements, Technical Specification and Price
Schedule.
13.5
Additional information and instruction on Duties and Taxes:
13.5.1 If the Tenderer desires to ask for excise duty, sales tax/ VAT, Service Tax, Works Contract Tax etc.
to be paid extra, the same must be specifically stated. In the absence of any such stipulation the
price will be taken inclusive of such duties and taxes and no claim for the same will be entertained
later.
13.5.2 Excise Duty:
a) If reimbursement of excise duty is intended as extra over the quoted prices, the supplier must
specifically say so also indicating the rate, quantum and nature of the duty applicable. In the
absence of any such stipulation it will be presumed that the prices quoted are firm and final and
no claim on account of excise duty will be entertained after the opening of tenders.
b) If a Tenderer chooses to quote a price inclusive of excise duty and also desires to be reimbursed
for variation, if any, in the excise duty during the time of supply, the tenderer must clearly
Page 16
Dated 05.03.2009
mention the same and also indicate the rate and quantum of excise duty included in its price.
Failure to indicate all such details in clear terms may result in rejection of that tender.
c) Subject to sub clauses 13.5.2 (a) & (b) above, any change in excise duty upward/downward as a
result of any statutory variation in excise duty taking place within contract terms shall be
allowed to the extent of actual quantum of excise duty paid by the supplier. In case of
downward revision in excise duty, the actual quantum of reduction of excise duty shall be
reimbursed to the purchaser by the supplier. All such adjustments shall include all reliefs,
exemptions, rebates, concession etc. if any obtained by the supplier.
13.5.3 Sales Tax:
If a tenderer asks for sales tax/ VAT, Service Tax and Works Contract Tax to be paid extra, the rate
and nature of sales tax applicable should be shown separately. The sales tax / VAT, Service Tax
and Works Contract Tax will be paid as per the rate at which it is liable to be assessed or has
actually been assessed provided the transaction of sale is legally liable to sales tax / VAT, Service
Tax and Works Contract Tax and is payable as per the terms of the contract. If any refund of Tax is
received at a later date, the Supplier must return the amount forth-with to the purchaser.
13.5.4 Octroi Duty and Local Duties & Taxes:
Normally, goods to be supplied to government departments against government contracts are
exempted from levy of town duty, Octroi duty, terminal tax and other levies of local bodies.
However, on some occasions, the local bodies (like town body, municipal body etc.) as per their
regulations allow such exemptions only on production of certificate to this effect from the
concerned government department. Keeping this in view, the supplier shall ensure that the stores to
be supplied by the supplier against the contract placed by the purchaser are exempted from levy of
any such duty or tax and, wherever necessary, obtain the exemption certificate from the purchaser.
However, if a local body still insists upon payment of such local duties and taxes, the same should
be paid by the supplier to the local body to avoid delay in supplies and possible demurrage charges
and obtain a receipt for the same. The supplier should forward the receipt obtained for such
payment to the purchaser to enable the purchaser reimburse the supplier and take other necessary
action in the matter.
13.5.5 Customs Duty:
The tenderer will pay the Customs duty wherever applicable. The applicable rates and amount of
the Custom Duty and the corresponding Indian Customs Tariff number should be shown separately
in the price schedule. In case ESIC provides CDEC then the bidder will get the goods cleared on
basis of CDEC provided.
13.6
13.7
13.8
13.9
For transportation of imported goods offered from abroad, relevant instructions as incorporated
under GCC Clause 10 shall be followed.
For insurance of goods to be supplied, relevant instructions as provided under GCC Clause 11 shall
be followed.
Unless otherwise specifically indicated in this TE document, the terms FCA, FOB, FAS, CIF, CIP,
DDP etc. for imported goods offered from abroad, shall be governed by the rules & regulations
prescribed in the current edition of INCOTERMS, published by the International Chamber of
Commerce, Paris
The need for indication of all such price components by the tenderers, as required in this clause
(viz., GIT clause 13) is for the purpose of comparison of the tenders by the purchaser and will no
way restrict the purchaser’s right to award the contract on the selected tenderer on any of the terms
offered.
Page 17
Dated 05.03.2009
14.
14.1
Indian Agent
If a foreign tenderer has engaged an agent in India in connection with its tender, the foreign
tenderer, in addition to indicating Indian agent’s commission, if any, in a manner described under
GIT sub clause 12.2 above, shall also furnish the following information:
a) The complete name and address of the Indian Agent and its permanent income tax account
number as allotted by the Indian Income Tax authority.
b) The details of the services to be rendered by the agent for the subject requirement.
c) Details of Service outlets in India, nearest to the consignee(s), to render services during
Warranty and AMC period.
15.
Firm Price
15.1
Unless otherwise specified in the SIT, prices quoted by the tenderer shall remain firm and fixed
during the currency of the contract and not subject to variation on any account.
However, as regards taxes and duties, if any, chargeable on the goods and payable, the conditions
stipulated in GIT clause 13 will apply.
15.2
16.
Alternative Tenders
16.1
16.2
Alternative Tenders are not permitted.
However the Tenderers can quote alternate models meeting the tender specifications of same
manufacturer with single EMD.
17
Documents Establishing Tenderer’s Eligibility and Qualifications
17.1
Pursuant to GIT clause 11, the tenderer shall furnish, as part of its tender, relevant details and
documents establishing its eligibility to quote and its qualifications to perform the contract if its
tender is accepted.
The documentary evidence needed to establish the tenderer’s qualifications shall fulfil the
following requirements:
17.2
a) in case the tenderer offers to supply goods, which are manufactured by some other firm, the
tenderer has been duly authorised by the goods manufacturer to quote for and supply the goods
to the purchaser. The tenderer shall submit the manufacturer’s authorization letter to this effect
as per the standard form provided under Section XIV in this document.
b) the tenderer has the required financial, technical and production capability necessary to perform
the contract and, further, it meets the qualification criteria incorporated in the Section IX in
these documents.
c) in case the tenderer is not doing business in India, it is duly represented by an agent stationed in
India fully equipped and able to carry out the required contractual functions and duties of the
supplier including after sale service, maintenance & repair etc. of the goods in question,
stocking of spare parts and fast moving components and other obligations, if any, specified in
the conditions of contract and/or technical specifications.
d) in case the tenderer is an Indian agent/authorized representative quoting on behalf of a foreign
manufacturer for the restricted item, the Indian agent/authorized representative is already
enlisted under the Compulsory Enlistment Scheme of Ministry of Finance, Govt. of India,
operated through Directorate General of Supplies & Disposals (DGS&D), New Delhi.
18.
Documents establishing Good’s Conformity to TE document.
18.1
The tenderer shall provide in its tender the required as well as the relevant documents like technical
data, literature, drawings etc. to establish that the goods and services offered in the tender fully
conform to the goods and services specified by the purchaser in the TE documents. For this purpose
the tenderer shall also provide a clause-by-clause commentary on the technical specifications and
Page 18
Dated 05.03.2009
18.2
18.3
other technical details incorporated by the purchaser in the TE documents to establish technical
responsiveness of the goods and services offered in its tender.
In case there is any variation and/or deviation between the goods & services prescribed by the
purchaser and that offered by the tenderer, the tenderer shall list out the same in a chart form
without ambiguity and provide the same along with its tender.
If a tenderer furnishes wrong and/or misguiding data, statement(s) etc. about technical acceptability
of the goods and services offered by it, its tender will be liable to be ignored and rejected in
addition to other remedies available to the purchaser in this regard.
19.
Earnest Money Deposit (EMD)
19.1
Pursuant to GIT clauses 8.1 and 11.1(B) the tenderer shall furnish along with its tender, earnest
money for amount as shown in the List of Requirements. The earnest money is required to protect
the purchaser against the risk of the tenderer’s unwarranted conduct as amplified under sub-clause
19.7 below.
The tenderers who are currently registered and, also, will continue to remain registered during the
tender validity period with Directorate General of Supplies & Disposals or with National Small
Industries Corporation, New Delhi for the specific goods as per tender enquiry specification shall
be eligible for exemption from EMD. Vague stipulations in the Registration Certificate such as “to
customers’ specification” etc. will not be acceptable for exemption from furnishing of earnest
money. In case the tenderer falls in these categories, it should furnish copy of its valid registration
details (with DGS&D or NSIC, as the case may be).
The earnest money shall be denominated in Indian Rupees or equivalent currencies as per GIT
clause 12.2. The earnest money shall be furnished in one of the following forms:
19.2
19.3
i. Account Payee Demand Draft
ii. Banker’s cheque and
iii. Bank Guarantee from any of the Commercial Banks
19.4
19.5
The demand draft or banker’s cheque shall be drawn on any commercial bank in India or country of
the tenderer, in favour of the “HLL Lifecare Limited” payable at New Delhi. In case of bank
guarantee, the same is to be provided from any commercial bank in India or country of the tenderer
as per the format specified under Section XIII in these documents. In the case of Bank Guarantee
furnished from banks outside India (i.e. foreign Banks), it should be authenticated and
countersigned by any nationalised bank in India by way of back-to-back counter guarantee.
The earnest money shall be valid for a period of forty-five (45) days beyond the validity period of
the tender. As validity period of Tender as per Clause 20 of GIT is 120 days, the EMD shall be
valid for 165 days from Techno – Commercial Tender opening date.
19.6
Unsuccessful tenderers’ earnest money will be returned to them without any interest, after expiry of
the tender validity period, but not later than thirty days after conclusion of the resultant contract.
Successful tenderer’s earnest money will be returned without any interest, after receipt of
performance security from that tenderer.
19.7
Earnest Money is required to protect the purchaser against the risk of the Tenderer’s conduct,
which would warrant the forfeiture of the EMD. Earnest money of a tenderer will be forfeited, if
the tenderer withdraws or amends its tender or impairs or derogates from the tender in any respect
within the period of validity of its tender or if it comes to notice that the information/documents
furnished in its tender is incorrect, false, misleading or forged without prejudice to other rights of
the purchaser. The successful tenderer’s earnest money will be forfeited without prejudice to other
rights of Purchaser if it fails to furnish the required performance security within the specified
period.
Page 19
Dated 05.03.2009
20.
20.1
20.2
20.3
Tender Validity
If not mentioned otherwise in the SIT, the tenders shall remain valid for acceptance for a period of
120 days (One hundred and twenty days) after the date of opening of techno-commercial tenders
prescribed in the TE document. Any tender valid for a shorter period shall be treated as
unresponsive and rejected.
In exceptional cases, the tenderers may be requested by the purchaser to extend the validity of their
tenders up to a specified period. Such request(s) and responses thereto shall be conveyed by surface
mail or by fax/ telex/cable followed by surface mail. The tenderers, who agree to extend the tender
validity, are to extend the same without any change or modification of their original tender and they
are also to extend the validity period of the EMD accordingly. A tenderer, however, may not agree
to extend its tender validity without forfeiting its EMD.
In case the day up to which the tenders are to remain valid falls on/ subsequently declared a holiday
or closed day for the purchaser, the tender validity shall automatically be extended up to the next
working day.
21.
Signing and Sealing of Tender
21.1
21.2
The tenderers shall submit their tenders as per the instructions contained in GIT Clause 11.
Unless otherwise mentioned in the SIT, a tenderer shall submit two copies of its tender marking
them as “Original” and “Duplicate”. Duplicate tenders may contain all pages including Technical
Literature/Catalogues as in Original tenders.
The original and duplicate copies of the tender shall either be typed or written in indelible ink and
the same shall be signed by the tenderer or by a person(s) who has been duly authorized to bind the
tenderer to the contract. The letter of authorization shall be by a written power of attorney, which
shall also be furnished along with the tender.
All the copies of the tender shall be duly signed at the appropriate places as indicated in the TE
documents and all other pages of the tender including printed literature, if any shall be initialled by
the same person(s) signing the tender. The tender shall not contain any erasure or overwriting,
except as necessary to correct any error made by the tenderer and, if there is any such correction;
the same shall be initialled by the person(s) signing the tender.
The tenderer is to seal the original and copy of the tender in separate envelopes, duly marking the
same as “Original”, “Duplicate” and so on and writing the address of the purchaser and the tender
reference number on the envelopes. The sentence “NOT TO BE OPENED” before __________
(The tenderer is to put the date & time of tender opening) are to be written on these envelopes. The
inner envelopes are then to be put in a bigger outer envelope along with envelope containing EMD,
which will also be duly sealed, marked etc. as above. If the outer envelope is not sealed and marked
properly as above, the purchaser will not assume any responsibility for its misplacement, premature
opening, late opening etc.
TE document seeks quotation following two Tender System, in two parts. First part will be known
as ‘Techno - Commercial Tender’, and the second part ‘Price Tender’ as specified in clause 11
of GIT. Tenderer shall seal ‘Techno - Commercial Tender (along with envelope containing
EMD)’ and ‘Price Tender’ separately and covers will be suitably super scribed. Both these sealed
covers shall be put in a bigger cover and sealed and procedure prescribed in Paras 21.1 to 21.5
followed.
21.3
21.4
21.5
21.6
D. SUBMISSIO OF TEDERS
22.
Submission of Tenders
22.1
Unless otherwise specified, the tenderers are to deposit the tenders in the tender box kept for this
purpose at HLL Lifecare Limited, Procurement and Consultancy Division, B-12, Sector -59,
oida -201301, Uttar Pradesh. In case of bulky tender, which can not be put into tender box, the
same shall be submitted by the tenderer by hand to Head (P&CD) or his nominee, HLL Lifecare
Limited, Procurement and Consultancy Division, B-12, Sector -59, oida -201301, Uttar
Page 20
Dated 05.03.2009
22.2
Pradesh. The officer receiving the tender will give the tenderer an official receipt duly signed with
date and time.
The tenderers must ensure that they deposit their tenders not later than the closing time and date
specified for submission of tenders. It is the responsibility of the tenderer to ensure that their
Tenders whether sent by post or by courier or by person, are dropped in the Tender Box by the
specified clearing date and time. In the event of the specified date for submission of tender falls on
/ is subsequently declared a holiday or closed day for the purchaser, the tenders will be received up
to the appointed time on the next working day.
23.
Late Tender
23.1
A tender, which is received after the specified date and time for receipt of tenders will be treated as
“late” tender and will be ignored.
24.
Alteration and Withdrawal of Tender
24.1
The tenderer, after submitting its tender, is permitted to alter / modify its tender so long as such
alterations / modifications are received duly signed, sealed and marked like the original tender,
within the deadline for submission of tenders. Alterations / modifications to tenders received after
the prescribed deadline will not be considered.
24.2
No tender should be withdrawn after the deadline for submission of tender and before expiry of the
tender validity period. If a tenderer withdraws the tender during this period, it will result in
forfeiture of the earnest money furnished by the tenderer in its tender.
E. TEDER OPEIG
25.
Opening of Tenders
25.1
The purchaser will open the tenders at the specified date and time and at the specified place as
indicated in the NIT.
In case the specified date of tender opening falls on / is subsequently declared a holiday or closed
day for the purchaser, the tenders will be opened at the appointed time and place on the next
working day.
25.2
Authorized representatives of the tenderers, who have submitted tenders on time may attend the
tender opening provided they bring with them letters of authority from the corresponding tenderers.
The tender opening official(s) will prepare a list of the representatives attending the tender opening.
The list will contain the representatives’ names & signatures and corresponding tenderers’ names
and addresses.
25.3
Two-Tender system as mentioned in para 21.6 above will be as follows. The TechnoCommercial Tenders are to be opened in the first instance, at the prescribed time and date as
indicated in NIT. These Tenders shall be scrutinized and evaluated by the competent committee/
authority with reference to parameters prescribed in the TE document. During the Techno Commercial Tender opening, the tender opening official(s) will read the salient features of the
tenders like brief description of the goods offered, delivery period, Earnest Money Deposit and any
other special features of the tenders, as deemed fit by the tender opening official(s). Thereafter, in
the second stage, the Price Tenders of only the Techno-Commercially acceptable offers shall be
opened at a latter date which will be notified to such tenderers. The prices, special discount if any
of the goods offered etc., as deemed fit by tender opening official(s) will be read out.
Page 21
Dated 05.03.2009
F. SCRUTIY AD EVALUATIO OF TEDERS
26.
Basic Principle
26.1
Tenders will be evaluated on the basis of the terms & conditions already incorporated in the TE
document, based on which tenders have been received and the terms, conditions etc. mentioned by
the tenderers in their tenders. No new condition will be brought in while scrutinizing and evaluating
the tenders.
27.
Preliminary Scrutiny of Tenders
27.1
The Purchaser will examine the Tenders to determine whether they are complete, whether any
computational errors have been made, whether required sureties have been furnished, whether the
documents have been properly signed stamped and whether the Tenders are generally in order.
Prior to the detailed evaluation of Price Tenders, pursuant to GIT Clause 34, the Purchaser will
determine the substantial responsiveness of each Tender to the TE Document. For purposes of these
clauses, a substantially responsive Tender is one, which conforms to all the terms and conditions of
the TE Documents without material deviations. Deviations from, or objections or reservations to
critical provisions such as those concerning Performance Security (GCC Clause 5), Warranty
(GCC Clause 15), EMD (GIT Clause 19), Taxes & Duties (GCC Clause 20), Force Majeure
(GCC Clause 26) and Applicable law (GCC Clause 31) will be deemed to be a material
deviation. The Purchaser’s determination of a Tender’s responsiveness is to be based on the
contents of the tender itself without recourse to extrinsic evidence.
If a Tender is not substantially responsive, it will be rejected by the Purchaser and cannot
subsequently be made responsive by the Tenderer by correction of the nonconformity.
The tenders will be scrutinized to determine whether they are complete and meet the essential and
important requirements, conditions etc. as prescribed in the TE document. The tenders, which do
not meet the basic requirements, are liable to be treated as non – responsive and will be summarily
ignored.
The following are some of the important aspects, for which a tender shall be declared non –
responsive and will be summarily ignored;
(i)
Tender form as per Section X (signed and stamped) not enclosed
(ii) Tender is unsigned.
(iii) Tender validity is shorter than the required period.
(iv) Required EMD (Amount, validity etc.)/ exemption documents have not been provided.
(v) Tenderer has quoted for goods manufactured by other manufacturer(s) without the required
Manufacturer’s Authorisation Form as per Section XIV.
(vi) Tenderer has not agreed to give the required performance security.
(vii) Goods offered are not meeting the tender enquiry specification.
(viii) Tenderer has not agreed to other essential condition(s) specially incorporated in the tender
enquiry like terms of payment, liquidated damages clause, warranty clause, dispute resolution
mechanism applicable law.
(ix) Poor/ unsatisfactory past performance.
(x) Tenderers who stand deregistered/banned/blacklisted by any Govt. Authorities.
(xi) Tenderer is not eligible as per GIT Clauses 5.1 & 17.1.
(xii) Tenderer has not quoted for the entire quantity as specified in the List of Requirements in the
quoted schedule.
27.2
27.3
27.4
27.5
28.
Minor Infirmity/Irregularity/on-Conformity
28.1
If during the preliminary examination, the purchaser find any minor informality and/or irregularity
and/or non-conformity in a tender, the purchaser may waive the same provided it does not
constitute any material deviation and financial impact and, also, does not prejudice or affect the
ranking order of the tenderers. Wherever necessary, the purchaser will convey its observation on
Page 22
Dated 05.03.2009
such ‘minor’ issues to the tenderer by registered/speed post etc. asking the tenderer to respond by a
specified date. If the tenderer does not reply by the specified date or gives evasive reply without
clarifying the point at issue in clear terms, that tender will be liable to be ignored.
29
Discrepancies in Prices
29.1
If, in the price structure quoted by a tenderer, there is discrepancy between the unit price and the
total price (which is obtained by multiplying the unit price by the quantity), the unit price shall
prevail and the total price corrected accordingly, unless the purchaser feels that the tenderer has
made a mistake in placing the decimal point in the unit price, in which case the total price as quoted
shall prevail over the unit price and the unit price corrected accordingly.
If there is an error in a total price, which has been worked out through addition and/or subtraction
of subtotals, the subtotals shall prevail and the total corrected; and
If there is a discrepancy between the amount expressed in words and figures, the amount in words
shall prevail, subject to sub clause 29.1 and 29.2 above.
If, as per the judgement of the purchaser, there is any such arithmetical discrepancy in a tender, the
same will be suitably conveyed to the tenderer by registered / speed post. If the tenderer does not
agree to the observation of the purchaser, the tender is liable to be ignored.
29.2
29.3
29.4
30.
30.1
Discrepancy between original and copies of Tender
In case any discrepancy is observed between the text etc. of the original copy and that in the other
copies of the same tender set, the text etc. of the original copy shall prevail. Here also, the
purchaser will convey its observation suitably to the tenderer by register / speed post and, if the
tenderer does not accept the purchaser’s observation, that tender will be liable to be ignored.
31.
31.1
Tenders of the tenderers, who do not meet the required Qualification Criteria prescribed in Section
IX, will be treated as non - responsive and will not be considered further.
32.
Conversion of tender currencies to Indian Rupees
32.1
In case the TE document permits the tenderers to quote their prices in different currencies, all such
quoted prices of the responsive tenderers will be converted to a single currency viz., Indian Rupees
for the purpose of equitable comparison and evaluation, as per the exchange rates established by the
Reserve Bank of India for similar transactions, as on the date of ‘Price Tender’ opening.
33.
Schedule-wise Evaluation
33.1
In case the List of Requirements contains more than one schedule, the responsive tenders will be
evaluated and compared separately for each schedule. The tender for a schedule will not be
considered if the complete requirements prescribed in that schedule are not included in the tender.
However, as already mentioned in GIT sub clause 13.2, the tenderers have the option to quote for
any one or more schedules.
34.
Comparison of Tenders
34.1
Unless mentioned otherwise in Section – III – Special Instructions to Tenderers and Section – VI –
List of Requirements, the comparison of the responsive tenders shall be carried out on Delivery
Duty Paid (DDP) consignee site basis. The quoted turnkey prices and AMC prices will also be
added for comparison/ranking purpose for evaluation.
35.
Additional Factors and Parameters for Evaluation and Ranking of Responsive Tenders
35.1
Further to GIT Clause 34 above, the purchaser’s evaluation of a tender will include and take into
account the following:
i) In the case of goods manufactured in India or goods of foreign origin already located in India,
sales tax & other similar taxes and excise duty & other similar duties, Customs Duties, Service
Page 23
Dated 05.03.2009
Tax, Works Contract Tax etc which will be contractually payable (to the tenderer), on the goods
if a contract is awarded on the tenderer; and
ii) in the case of goods of foreign origin offered from abroad, customs duty and other similar import
duties/taxes, which will be contractually payable (to the tenderer) on the goods if the contract is
awarded on the tenderer.
35.2
The purchaser’s evaluation of tender will also take into account the additional factors, if any,
incorporated in SIT in the manner and to the extent indicated therein.
35.3
The Purchaser reserves the right to give the price preference to small-scale sectors etc. and
purchase preference to central public sector undertakings as per the instruction in vogue while
evaluating, comparing and ranking the responsive tenders.
36.
36.1
Tenderer’s capability to perform the contract
The purchaser, through the above process of tender scrutiny and tender evaluation will determine to
its satisfaction whether the tenderer, whose tender has been determined as the lowest evaluated
responsive tender is eligible, qualified and capable in all respects to perform the contract
satisfactorily. If, there is more than one schedule in the List of Requirements, then, such
determination will be made separately for each schedule.
The above-mentioned determination will, interalia, take into account the tenderer’s financial,
technical and production capabilities for satisfying all the requirements of the purchaser as
incorporated in the TE document. Such determination will be based upon scrutiny and examination
of all relevant data and details submitted by the tenderer in its tender as well as such other allied
information as deemed appropriate by the purchaser.
36.2
37.
Contacting the Purchaser
37.1
From the time of submission of tender to the time of awarding the contract, if a tenderer needs to
contact the purchaser for any reason relating to this tender enquiry and / or its tender, it should do
so only in writing.
37.2
In case a tenderer attempts to influence the purchaser in the purchaser’s decision on scrutiny,
comparison & evaluation of tenders and awarding the contract, the tender of the tenderer shall be
liable for rejection in addition to appropriate administrative actions being taken against that
tenderer, as deemed fit by the purchaser.
G. AWARD OF COTRACT
38.
Purchaser’s Right to accept any tender and to reject any or all tenders
38.1
The purchaser reserves the right to accept in part or in full any tender or reject any or more
tender(s) without assigning any reason or to cancel the tendering process and reject all tenders at
any time prior to award of contract, without incurring any liability, whatsoever to the affected
tenderer or tenderers.
39.
Award Criteria
39.1
Subject to GIT clause 38 above, the contract will be awarded to the lowest evaluated responsive
tenderer decided by the purchaser in terms of GIT Clause 36.
40.
Variation of Quantities at the Time of Award/ Currency of Contract
40.1
At the time of awarding the contract, the purchaser reserves the right to increase or decrease by up
to twenty five (25) per cent, the quantity of goods and services mentioned in the schedule (s) in the
Page 24
Dated 05.03.2009
“List of Requirements” without any change in the unit price and other terms & conditions quoted
by the tenderer.
40.2
If the quantity has not been increased at the time of the awarding the contract, the purchaser
reserves the right to increase by up to twenty five (25) per cent, the quantity of goods and services
mentioned in the contract without any change in the unit price and other terms & conditions
mentioned in the contract, during the currency of the contract.
41.
otification of Award
41.1
Before expiry of the tender validity period, the purchaser will notify the successful tenderer(s) in
writing, by registered / speed post or by fax/ telex/cable (to be confirmed by registered / speed post)
that its tender for goods & services, which have been selected by the purchaser, has been accepted,
also briefly indicating therein the essential details like description, specification and quantity of the
goods & services and corresponding prices accepted. The successful tenderer must furnish to the
purchaser the required performance security within thirty days from the date of dispatch of this
notification, failing which the EMD will be forfeited and the award will be cancelled. Relevant
details about the performance security have been provided under GCC Clause 5 under Section IV.
41.2
The Notification of Award shall constitute the conclusion of the Contract.
42.
Issue of Contract
42.1
42.3
Promptly after notification of award, the Purchaser/Consignee will mail the contract form (as per
Section XVI) duly completed and signed, in duplicate, to the successful tenderer by registered /
speed post.
Within twenty one days from the date of the contract, the successful tenderer shall return the
original copy of the contract, duly signed and dated, to the Purchaser by registered / speed post.
The Purchaser reserves the right to issue the Notification of Award consignee wise.
43.
on-receipt of Performance Security and Contract by the Purchaser/Consignee
43.1
Failure of the successful tenderer in providing performance security and / or returning contract
copy duly signed in terms of GIT clauses 41 and 42 above shall make the tenderer liable for
forfeiture of its EMD and, also, for further actions by the Purchaser/Consignee against it as per the
clause 24 of GCC – Termination of default.
44.
Return of E M D
44.1
The earnest money of the successful tenderer and the unsuccessful tenderers will be returned to
them without any interest, whatsoever, in terms of GIT Clause 19.6.
45.
Publication of Tender Result
45.1
The name and address of the successful tenderer(s) receiving the contract(s) will be mentioned in
the notice board/bulletin/web site of the purchaser.
46.
46.1
Corrupt or Fraudulent Practices
It is required by all concerned to observe the highest standard of ethics during the procurement and
execution of such contracts. In pursuance of this policy, the Purchaser: (a) defines, for the purposes of this provision, the terms set forth below
as follows:
(i) “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving or soliciting of any thing of value
to influence the action of a public official in the procurement process or in contract
execution; and
42.2
Page 25
Dated 05.03.2009
(ii) “fraudulent practice” means a misrepresentation of facts in order to influence a
procurement process or the execution of a contract to the detriment of the Purchaser, and
includes collusive practice among Tenderers (prior to or after Tender submission)
designed to establish Tender prices at artificial non-competitive levels and to deprive the
Purchaser of the benefits of free and open competition;
(b) will reject a proposal for award if it determines that the Tenderer recommended for award has
engaged in corrupt or fraudulent practices in competing for the contract in question;
(c) will declare a firm ineligible, either indefinitely or for a stated period of time, to be awarded a
contract by the purchaser if it at any time determines that the firm has engaged in corrupt or
fraudulent practices in competing for, or in executing the contract.
Page 26
Dated 05.03.2009
SECTIO - III
SPECIAL ISTRUCTIOS TO TEDERERS
(SIT)
The following Special Instructions to Tenderers will apply for this purchase. These special instructions
will modify/substitute/supplement the corresponding General Instructions to Tenderers (GIT)
incorporated in Section II. The corresponding GIT clause numbers have also been indicated in the text
below:
In case of any conflict between the provision in the GIT and that in the SIT, the provision contained in the
SIT shall prevail.
Page 27
Dated 05.03.2009
SECTIO - IV
GEERAL CODITIOS OF COTRACT (GCC)
TABLE OF CLAUSES
Sl o.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Topic
Application
Use of contract documents and information
Patent Rights
Country of Origin
Performance Security
Technical Specifications and Standards
Packing and Marking
Inspection, Testing and Quality Control
Terms of Delivery
Transportation of Goods
Insurance
Spare parts
Incidental services
Distribution of Dispatch Documents for Clearance/Receipt of Goods
Warranty
Assignment
Sub Contracts
Modification of contract
Prices
Taxes and Duties
Terms and mode of Payment
Delay in the supplier’s performance
Liquidated Damages
Termination for default
Termination for insolvency
Force Majeure
Termination for convenience
Governing language
Notices
Resolution of disputes
Applicable Law
General/Miscellaneous Clauses
Page 28
Page
29
29
29
29
29
30
30
31
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
35
35
35
35
36
36
38
39
39
39
40
40
40
40
41
41
41
Dated 05.03.2009
GEERAL CODITIOS OF COTRACT (GCC)
1.
1.1
Application
The General Conditions of Contract incorporated in this section shall be applicable for this
purchase to the extent the same are not superseded by the Special Conditions of Contract
prescribed under Section V, List of requirements under Section VI and Technical Specification
under Section VII of this document.
2.
Use of contract documents and information
2.1
The supplier shall not, without the purchaser’s prior written consent, disclose the contract or any
provision thereof including any specification, drawing, sample or any information furnished by or
on behalf of the purchaser in connection therewith, to any person other than the person(s)
employed by the supplier in the performance of the contract emanating from this TE document.
Further, any such disclosure to any such employed person shall be made in confidence and only so
far as necessary for the purposes of such performance for this contract.
Further, the supplier shall not, without the purchaser’s prior written consent, make use of any
document or information mentioned in GCC sub-clause 2.1 above except for the sole purpose of
performing this contract.
Except the contract issued to the supplier, each and every other document mentioned in GCC subclause 2.1 above shall remain the property of the purchaser and, if advised by the purchaser, all
copies of all such documents shall be returned to the purchaser on completion of the supplier’s
performance and obligations under this contract.
2.2
2.3
3.
3.1
4.
4.1
Patent Rights
The supplier shall, at all times, indemnify and keep indemnified the purchaser, free of cost,
against all claims which may arise in respect of goods & services to be provided by the supplier
under the contract for infringement of any intellectual property rights or any other right protected
by patent, registration of designs or trademarks. In the event of any such claim in respect of
alleged breach of patent, registered designs, trade marks etc. being made against the purchaser, the
purchaser shall notify the supplier of the same and the supplier shall, at his own expenses take
care of the same for settlement without any liability to the purchaser.
Country of Origin
4.3
All goods and services to be supplied and provided for the contract shall have the origin in India
or in the countries with which the Government of India has trade relations.
The word “origin” incorporated in this clause means the place from where the goods are mined,
cultivated, grown, manufactured, produced or processed or from where the services are arranged.
The country of origin may be specified in the Price Schedule
5.
Performance Security
5.1
Within thirty (30) days from date of the issue of notification of award by the Purchaser/Consignee,
the supplier, shall furnish performance security to the Purchaser/Consignee for an amount equal to
ten percent (10%) of the total value of the contract, valid up to sixty (60) days after the date of
completion of all contractual obligations by the supplier, including the warranty obligations.
The Performance security shall be denominated in Indian Rupees or in the currency of the contract
as detailed below:
4.2
5.2
a) It shall be in any one of the forms namely Account Payee Demand Draft drawn from any
Scheduled bank in India or Bank Guarantee issued by a Scheduled bank in India, in the
prescribed form as provided in section XV of this document in favour of the
Purchaser/Consignee.
Page 29
Dated 05.03.2009
b) In the case of Bank Guarantee furnished from banks outside India (i.e. foreign Banks), it
should be authenticated and countersigned by any nationalised bank in India by way of
back-to-back counter guarantee.
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
In the event of any failure /default of the supplier with or with out any quantifiable loss to the
government including furnishing of consignee wise Bank Guarantee for AMC security as per
Proforma in Section XV, the amount of the performance security is liable to be forfeited. The
Administration Department may do the needful to cover any failure/default of the supplier with or
without any quantifiable loss to the Government.
In the event of any amendment issued to the contract, the supplier shall, within twenty-one (21)
days of issue of the amendment, furnish the corresponding amendment to the Performance
Security (as necessary), rendering the same valid in all respects in terms of the contract, as
amended.
The supplier shall enter into Annual Maintenance Contract as per the ‘Contract Form - B’ in
Section XVI with respective consignees, 3 (three) months prior to the completion of Warranty
Period. The AMC will commence from the date of expiry of the Warranty Period.
Subject to GCC sub – clause 5.3 above, the Purchaser/Consignee will release the Performance
Security without any interest to the supplier on completion of the supplier’s all contractual
obligations including the warranty obligations & after receipt of Consignee wise bank guarantee
for AMC security in favour of Head of the Hospital/ Institute/ Medical College of the consignee as
per the format in Section XV.
6.
Technical Specifications and Standards
6.1
The Goods & Services to be provided by the supplier under this contract shall conform to the
technical specifications and quality control parameters mentioned in ‘Technical Specification’ and
‘Quality Control Requirements’ under Sections VII and VIII of this document.
7.
Packing and Marking
7.1
The packing for the goods to be provided by the supplier should be strong and durable enough to
withstand, without limitation, the entire journey during transit including transhipment (if any),
rough handling, open storage etc. without any damage, deterioration etc. As and if necessary, the
size, weights and volumes of the packing cases shall also take into consideration, the remoteness
of the final destination of the goods and availability or otherwise of transport and handling
facilities at all points during transit up to final destination as per the contract.
The quality of packing, the manner of marking within & outside the packages and provision of
accompanying documentation shall strictly comply with the requirements as provided in
Technical Specifications and Quality Control Requirements under Sections VII and VIII and in
SCC under Section V. In case the packing requirements are amended due to issue of any
amendment to the contract, the same shall also be taken care of by the supplier accordingly.
Packing instructions:
7.2
7.3
Unless otherwise mentioned in the Technical Specification and Quality Control Requirements
under Sections VII and VIII and in SCC under Section V, the supplier shall make separate
packages for each consignee (in case there is more than one consignee mentioned in the contract)
and mark each package on three sides with the following with indelible paint of proper quality:
a. contract number and date
b. brief description of goods including quantity
c. packing list reference number
d. country of origin of goods
e. consignee’s name and full address and
f. supplier’s name and address
Page 30
Dated 05.03.2009
8.
Inspection, Testing and Quality Control
8.1
The purchaser and/or its nominated representative(s) will, without any extra cost to the purchaser,
inspect and/or test the ordered goods and the related services to confirm their conformity to the
contract specifications and other quality control details incorporated in the contract. The purchaser
shall inform the supplier in advance, in writing, the purchaser’s programme for such inspection
and, also the identity of the officials to be deputed for this purpose. The cost towards the
transportation, boarding & lodging will be borne by the purchaser and/or its nominated
representative(s).
The Technical Specification and Quality Control Requirements incorporated in the contract shall
specify what inspections and tests are to be carried out and, also, where and how they are to be
conducted. If such inspections and tests are conducted in the premises of the supplier or its
subcontractor(s), all reasonable facilities and assistance, including access to relevant drawings,
design details and production data, shall be furnished by the supplier to the purchaser’s inspector
at no charge to the purchaser.
If during such inspections and tests the contracted goods fail to conform to the required
specifications and standards, the purchaser’s inspector may reject them and the supplier shall
either replace the rejected goods or make all alterations necessary to meet the specifications and
standards, as required, free of cost to the purchaser and resubmit the same to the purchaser’s
inspector for conducting the inspections and tests again.
In case the contract stipulates pre-despatch inspection of the ordered goods at supplier’s premises,
the supplier shall put up the goods for such inspection to the purchaser’s inspector well ahead of
the contractual delivery period, so that the purchaser’s inspector is able to complete the inspection
within the contractual delivery period.
If the supplier tenders the goods to the purchaser’s inspector for inspection at the last moment
without providing reasonable time to the inspector for completing the inspection within the
contractual delivery period, the inspector may carry out the inspection and complete the formality
beyond the contractual delivery period at the risk and expense of the supplier. The fact that the
goods have been inspected after the contractual delivery period will not have the effect of keeping
the contract alive and this will be without any prejudice to the legal rights and remedies available
to the purchaser under the terms & conditions of the contract.
The purchaser’s/consignee’s contractual right to inspect, test and, if necessary, reject the goods
after the goods’ arrival at the final destination shall have no bearing of the fact that the goods have
previously been inspected and cleared by purchaser’s inspector during pre-despatch inspection
mentioned above.
Goods accepted by the purchaser/consignee and/or its inspector at initial inspection and in final
inspection in terms of the contract shall in no way dilute purchaser’s/consignee’s right to reject the
same later, if found deficient in terms of the warranty clause of the contract, as incorporated under
GCC Clause 15.
Principal/ Foreign supplier shall also have the equipment inspected by recognised/ reputed agency
like SGS, Lloyd or equivalent (acceptable to the purchaser) prior to despatch at the supplier’s cost
and furnish necessary certificate from the said agency in support of their claim.
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
9.
Terms of Delivery
9.1
Goods shall be delivered by the supplier in accordance with the terms of delivery specified in the
contract.
10.
Transportation of Goods
10.1
Instructions for transportation of imported goods offered from abroad:
Page 31
Dated 05.03.2009
The supplier shall not arrange part-shipments and/or transhipment without the express/prior
written consent of the purchaser. The supplier is required under the contract to deliver the goods
under DDP at consignee site; the shipment shall be made by Indian flag vessel or by vessels
belonging to the conference lines in which India is a member country through India’s forwarding
agents/coordinators. In case the forwarding agent/coordinators are unable to provide timely
adequate space in Indian flag vessel or by vessels belonging to the conference lines, the supplier
shall arrange shipment through any available vessel to adhere to the delivery schedule given in the
contract.
In case of airlifting of imported goods offered from abroad, the same will be done only through
the National Carrier i.e. Air India wherever applicable. In case the National Carrier is not
available, any other airlines available for early delivery may be arranged.
Goods will be custom cleared by the supplier/ Indian agent and transported to the consignee’s site
as per the contract terms.
10.2
Instructions for transportation of domestic goods including goods already imported by the supplier
under its own arrangement:
In case no instruction is provided in this regard in the SCC, the supplier will arrange
transportation of the ordered goods as per its own procedure.
10.3
The goods shall be custom cleared by the Supplier/ Indian Agent and transported to the
consignee’s site as per contract terms. The supplier shall be responsible for safe and timely
delivery of ordered goods under his own arrangement.
11.
Insurance:
11.1
Unless otherwise instructed in the SCC, the supplier shall make arrangements for insuring the
goods against loss or damage incidental to manufacture or acquisition, transportation, storage and
delivery in the following manner:
i) in case of supply of domestic goods on Consignee site basis, the supplier shall be responsible
till the entire stores contracted for arrival in good condition at destination. The transit risk in
this respect shall be covered by the Supplier by getting the stores duly insured. The insurance
cover shall be obtained by the Supplier and should be valid till 3 months after the receipt of
goods by the Consignee.
ii) in case of supply of the imported goods on DDP Basis, the supplier shall arrange and pay for
marine/ air insurance making the consignee as beneficiary. The additional extended Insurance
(local transportation and storage) would also be borne by the Supplier from the port of entry to
the consignee site for a period including 3 months beyond date of delivery.
12.
Spare parts
12.1
If specified in the List of Requirements and in the resultant contract, the supplier shall
supply/provide any or all of the following materials, information etc. pertaining to spare parts
manufactured and/or supplied by the supplier:
a)
b)
The spare parts as selected by the Purchaser/Consignee to be purchased from the supplier,
subject to the condition that such purchase of the spare parts shall not relieve the supplier
of any contractual obligation including warranty obligations; and
In case the production of the spare parts is discontinued:
Page 32
Dated 05.03.2009
i)
Sufficient advance notice to the Purchaser/Consignee before such discontinuation
to provide adequate time to the purchaser to purchase the required spare parts etc.,
and
ii)
12.2
Immediately following such discontinuation, providing the Purchaser/Consignee,
free of cost, the designs, drawings, layouts and specifications of the spare parts, as
and if requested by the Purchaser/Consignee.
Supplier shall carry sufficient inventories to assure ex-stock supply of consumable spares for the
goods so that the same are supplied to the Purchaser/Consignee promptly on receipt of order from
the Purchaser/Consignee.
13.
Incidental services
13.1
Subject to the stipulation, if any, in the SCC (Section – V), List of Requirements (Section – VI)
and the Technical Specification (Section – VII), the supplier shall be required to perform the
following services.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
14.
Installation & commissioning, Supervision and Demonstration of the goods
Providing required jigs and tools for assembly, minor civil works required for the
completion of the installation.
Training of Consignee’s Doctors, Staff, operators etc. for operating and
maintaining the goods
Supplying required number of operation & maintenance manual for the goods
Distribution of Dispatch Documents for Clearance/Receipt of Goods
The supplier shall send all the relevant despatch documents well in time to the
Purchaser/Consignee
Unless otherwise specified in the SCC, the usual documents involved and the drill to be followed
in general for this purpose are as follows.
A) For Domestic Goods, including goods already imported by the supplier under its own
arrangement
Within 24 hours of despatch, the supplier shall notify the purchaser, consignee, and others
concerned if mentioned in the contract, the complete details of despatch and also supply the
following documents to them by registered post / speed post (or as instructed in the contract):
(i)
Four copies of supplier’s invoice showing contract number, goods description,
quantity, unit price and total amount;
(ii) Two copies of packing list identifying contents of each package;
(iii) Inspection certificate issued by the nominated Inspection agency, if any.
(iv) Certificate of origin;
(v) Insurance Certificate as per GCC Clause 11.
(vi) Manufacturers/Supplier’s warranty certificate & In-house inspection certificate.
B)
For goods imported from abroad
Within 24 hours of despatch, the supplier shall notify the purchaser, consignee, and others
concerned if mentioned in the contract, the complete details of despatch and also supply the
following documents to them by airmail/ registered post / speed post (or as instructed in the
contract).
Page 33
Dated 05.03.2009
(i)
Four copies of supplier’s invoice showing contract number, goods description,
quantity, unit price and total amount;
(ii) Original and four copies of the negotiable clean, on-board Bill of Lading/Airway
bill, marked freight pre paid and four copies of non-negotiable Bill of
Lading/Airway bill;
(iii) Four Copies of packing list identifying contents of each package;
(iv) Insurance Certificate as per GCC Clause 11.
(v) Manufacturer’s/Supplier’s warranty certificate;
(vi) Inspection Certificate for the despatched equipments issued by recognized/ reputed
agency like SGS, Lloyd or equivalent (acceptable to the purchaser) prior to despatch
(vii) Manufacturer’s own factory inspection report;
(viii) Certificate of origin
(ix) Port of Loading;
(x) Port of Discharge and
(xi) Expected date of arrival.
15.
Warranty
15.1
The supplier warrants comprehensively that the goods supplied under the contract is new, unused
and incorporate all recent improvements in design and materials unless prescribed otherwise by
the purchaser in the contract. The supplier further warrants that the goods supplied under the
contract shall have no defect arising from design, materials (except when the design adopted and /
or the material used are as per the Purchaser’s/Consignee’s specifications) or workmanship or
from any act or omission of the supplier, that may develop under normal use of the supplied goods
under the conditions prevailing in India.
This warranty shall remain valid for the period as mentioned in the ‘list of requirement’
(Section – VI) after the goods or any portion thereof as the case may be, have been delivered to
the final destination and installed and commissioned at the final destination and accepted by the
Purchaser/Consignee in terms of the contract, unless specified otherwise in the SCC.
a. No conditional warranty like mishandling, manufacturing defects etc. will be acceptable.
b. Warranty as well as Annual Maintenance Contract will be inclusive of all accessories and
Turnkey work and it will also cover the items if mentioned in the SCC.
c. Replacement and repair will be under taken for the defective goods.
d. Proper marking has to be made for all spares for identification like printing of installation
and repair dates.
In case of any claim arising out of this warranty, the Purchaser/Consignee shall promptly notify
the same in writing to the supplier. The period of the warranty will be as per G.C.C clause number
15.2 above irrespective of any other period mentioned elsewhere in the bidding documents.
Upon receipt of such notice, the supplier shall, within 8 hours on a 24(hrs) X 7 (days) X 365
(days) basis respond to take action to repair or replace the defective goods or parts thereof, free of
cost, at the ultimate destination. The supplier shall take over the replaced parts/goods after
providing their replacements and no claim, whatsoever shall lie on the purchaser for such replaced
parts/goods thereafter. The penalty clause for non-rectification will be applicable as per tender
conditions
In the event of any rectification of a defect or replacement of any defective goods during the
warranty period, the warranty for the rectified/replaced goods shall be extended to a further
period of warranty as given in the list of requirement from the date such rectified / replaced
goods starts functioning to the satisfaction of the purchaser.
If the supplier, having been notified, fails to respond to take action to repair or replace the
defect(s) within 8 hours on a 24(hrs) X 7 (days) X 365 (days) basis, the purchaser may proceed to
take such remedial action(s) as deemed fit by the purchaser, at the risk and expense of the supplier
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15.6
Page 34
Dated 05.03.2009
and without prejudice to other contractual rights and remedies, which the purchaser may have
against the supplier.
15.7 During Warranty period, the supplier is required to visit at each consignee’s site at least once in 6
months commencing from the date of the installation for preventive maintenance of the goods
15.8 The Purchaser/Consignee reserve the rights to enter into Annual Maintenance Contract between
Consignee and the Supplier for the period as mentioned in Section VII, Technical Specifications
after the completion of warranty period.
15.9 The supplier along with its Indian Agent and the AMC provider shall ensure continued supply of
the spare parts for the machines and equipments supplied by them to the purchaser for 10 years
from the date of installation and handing over.
15.10 The Supplier along with its Indian Agent and the AMC Provider shall always accord most
favoured client status to the Purchaser vis-à-vis its other Clients/Purchasers of its
equipments/machines/goods etc. and shall always give the most competitive price for its
machines/equipments supplied to the Purchaser/Consignee.
16.
Assignment
16.1 The Supplier shall not assign, either in whole or in part, its contractual duties, responsibilities and
obligations to perform the contract, except with the Purchaser’s prior written permission.
17.
17.1
17.2
17.3
Sub Contracts
The Supplier shall notify the Purchaser in writing of all sub contracts awarded under the contract
if not already specified in its tender. Such notification, in its original tender or later, shall not
relieve the Supplier from any of its liability or obligation under the terms and conditions of the
contract.
Sub contract shall be only for bought out items and sub-assemblies.
Sub contracts shall also comply with the provisions of GCC Clause 4 (“Country of Origin”).
18.
Modification of contract
18.1
If necessary, the purchaser may, by a written order given to the supplier at any time during the
currency of the contract, amend the contract by making alterations and modifications within the
general scope of contract in any one or more of the following:
18.2
a) Specifications, drawings, designs etc. where goods to be supplied under the contract are
to be specially manufactured for the purchaser,
b) Mode of packing,
c) Incidental services to be provided by the supplier
d) Mode of despatch,
e) Place of delivery, and
f) Any other area(s) of the contract, as felt necessary by the purchaser depending on the
merits of the case.
In the event of any such modification/alteration causing increase or decrease in the cost of goods
and services to be supplied and provided, or in the time required by the supplier to perform any
obligation under the contract, an equitable adjustment shall be made in the contract price and/or
contract delivery schedule, as the case may be, and the contract amended accordingly. If the
supplier doesn’t agree to the adjustment made by the Purchaser/Consignee, the supplier shall
convey its views to the Purchaser/Consignee within twenty-one days from the date of the
supplier’s receipt of the Purchaser’s/Consignee’s amendment / modification of the contract.
19.
Prices
19.1
Prices to be charged by the supplier for supply of goods and provision of services in terms of the
contract shall not vary from the corresponding prices quoted by the supplier in its tender and
incorporated in the contract except for any price adjustment authorised in the SCC.
Page 35
Dated 05.03.2009
20.
Taxes and Duties
20.1
20.2
Supplier shall be entirely responsible for all taxes, duties, fees, levies etc. incurred until delivery
of the contracted goods to the purchaser.
Further instruction, if any, shall be as provided in the SCC.
21.
Terms and Mode of Payment
21.1
Payment Terms
Payment shall be made subject to recoveries, if any, by way of liquidated damages or any
other charges as per terms & conditions of contract in the following manner.
A) Payment for Domestic Goods Or Foreign Origin Located Within India.
Payment shall be made in Indian Rupees as specified in the contract in the following manner:
a) On delivery:
90 % payment of the contract price shall be paid on receipt of goods in good condition and
upon the submission of the following documents:
(i) Four copies of supplier’s invoice showing contract number, goods description, quantity,
unit price and total amount;
(ii) Consignee Receipt Certificate as per Section XVII in original issued by the authorized
representative of the consignee;
(iii) Two copies of packing list identifying contents of each package;
(iv) Inspection certificate issued by the nominated Inspection agency, if any;
(v) Insurance Certificate as per GCC Clause 11;
(vi) Certificate of origin.
b) On Acceptance:
Balance 10 % payment would be made against ‘Final Acceptance Certificate’ as per
Section XVIII of goods to be issued by the consignees subject to recoveries, if any, either
on account of non-rectification of defects/deficiencies not attended by the Supplier or
otherwise.
B) Payment for Imported Goods:
Payment for foreign currency portion shall be made in the currency as specified in the contract in
the following manner:
a) On delivery:
Ninety (90) % of the net CIP price (CIP price less Indian Agency commission) of the goods
shipped shall be paid through irrevocable, non-transferable Letter of Credit (LC) opened in
favour of the supplier in a bank in his country and upon submission of documents specified
hereunder:
(i)
Four copies of supplier’s invoice showing contract number, goods description, quantity,
unit price and total amount;
(ii) Original and four copies of the negotiable clean, on-board Bill of Lading/ Airway bill ,
marked freight pre paid and four copies of non-negotiable Bill of Lading/Airway bill;
(iii) Four Copies of packing list identifying contents of each package;
(iv) Insurance Certificate as per GCC Clause 11 and documents also to be submitted for
payment of LC confirming that dispatch documents has already been sent within 24
hours to all concerned as per the contract;
Page 36
Dated 05.03.2009
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
Manufacturer’s/Supplier’s warranty certificate;
Manufacturer’s own factory inspection report and
Certificate of origin by the chamber of commerce of the concerned country;
Inspection Certificate for the despatched equipments issued by recognized/ reputed
agency like SGS, Lloyd or equivalent (acceptable to the purchaser) prior to despatch.
Certificate of origin
Consignee Receipt Certificate as per Section XVII in original issued by the authorized
representative of the consignee
b) On Acceptance:
Balance payment of 10 % of net CIP price of goods would be made against ‘Final Acceptance
Certificate’ as per Section XVIII to be issued by the consignees through irrevocable, nontransferable Letter of Credit (LC) opened in favour of the Foreign Principal in a bank in his
country, subject to recoveries, if any.
c) Payment of custom duty amount with Custom Duty Exemption Certificate (CDEC), if
applicable, customs clearance and handling charges, loading/ unloading, inland
transportation, incidental costs till consignee site & incidental services (including
installation & commissioning, supervision, demonstration and training) will be paid in
Indian Rupees to the Indian agent at actual not exceeding the quoted rates on proof of 100 %
payment to the foreign principal.
d) Payment of Indian Agency Commission:
Indian Agency commission will be paid to the manufacturer’s agent in the local currency for
an amount in Indian rupees indicated in the relevant Price Schedule (as per prevailing rate of
exchange ruling on the date of Contract) and shall not be subject to further escalation /
exchange variation. Payment shall be paid in Indian Rupees to the Indian Agent on proof of
100 % payment to the Foreign Principal.
C) Payment of Turnkey, if any:
Turnkey payment will be made to the manufacturer’s agent in Indian rupees indicated in the
relevant Price Schedule (as per prevailing rate of exchange ruling on the date of Contract) and
shall not be subject to further escalation / exchange variation. Payment shall be made in Indian
Rupees to the Indian Agent on proof of 100 % payment to the Foreign Principal.
D) Payment for Annual Maintenance Contract Charges:
The consignee will enter into AMC with the supplier at the rates as stipulated in the contract. The
payment of AMC will be made on six monthly basis after satisfactory completion of said period,
duly certified by the consignee on receipt of bank guarantee for an amount equivalent to 2.5 % of
the cost of the equipment as per contract in the prescribed format given in Section XV valid till 2
months after expiry of entire AMC period.
21.2
21.3
21.4
The supplier shall not claim any interest on payments under the contract.
Where there is a statutory requirement for tax deduction at source, such deduction towards income
tax and other tax as applicable will be made from the bills payable to the Supplier at rates as
notified from time to time.
Irrevocable & non-transferable LC shall be opened by ESIC/ Purchaser. However, if the supplier
requests specifically to open confirmed LC, the extra charges would be borne by the supplier. If
Page 37
Dated 05.03.2009
LC is required to be extended and/or amended for reasons not attributable to the purchaser/
consignee, the charges thereof shall be borne by the supplier.
21.5 The payment shall be made in the currency / currencies authorised in the contract.
21.6 The supplier shall send its claim for payment in writing, when contractually due, along with
relevant documents etc., duly signed with date, to the purchaser.
21.7 While claiming payment, the supplier is also to certify in the bill that the payment being claimed
is strictly in terms of the contract and all the obligations on the part of the supplier for claiming
that payment has been fulfilled as required under the contract.
21.8 While claiming reimbursement of duties, taxes etc. (like sales tax, excise duty, custom duty) from
the Purchaser/Consignee, as and if permitted under the contract, the supplier shall also certify that,
in case it gets any refund out of such taxes and duties from the concerned authorities at a later
date, it (the supplier) shall refund to the Purchaser/Consignee forthwith.
21.9 In case where the supplier is not in a position to submit its bill for the balance payment for want of
receipted copies of Inspection Note from the consignee and the consignee has not complained
about the non-receipt, shortage, or defects in the supplies made, balance amount will be paid by
the paying authority without consignee’s receipt certificate after three months from the date of the
preceding part payment for the goods in question, subject to the following conditions:
(a) The supplier will make good any defect or deficiency that the consignee (s) may report within
six months from the date of despatch of goods.
(b) Delay in supplies, if any, has been regularized.
(c) The contract price where it is subject to variation has been finalized.
(d) The supplier furnishes the following undertakings:
“I/We, __________ certify that I/We have not received back the Inspection Note duly receipted by the
consignee or any communication from the purchaser or the consignee about non-receipt, shortage or
defects in the goods supplied. I/We ______ agree to make good any defect or deficiency that the
consignee may report within three months from the date of receipt of this balance payment.
22.
Delay in the supplier’s performance
22.1
The supplier shall deliver of the goods and perform the services under the contract within the time
schedule specified by the Purchaser/Consignee in the List of Requirements and as incorporated in
the contract.
Subject to the provision under GCC clause 26, any unexcused delay by the supplier in maintaining
its contractual obligations towards delivery of goods and performance of services shall render the
supplier liable to any or all of the following sanctions:
(i) imposition of liquidated damages,
(ii) forfeiture of its performance security and
(iii) termination of the contract for default.
22.2
22.3
22.4
If at any time during the currency of the contract, the supplier encounters conditions hindering
timely delivery of the goods and performance of services, the supplier shall promptly inform the
Purchaser/Consignee in writing about the same and its likely duration and make a request to the
Purchaser/Consignee for extension of the delivery schedule accordingly. On receiving the
supplier’s communication, the Purchaser/Consignee shall examine the situation as soon as
possible and, at its discretion, may agree to extend the delivery schedule, with or without
liquidated damages for completion of supplier’s contractual obligations by issuing an amendment
to the contract.
When the period of delivery is extended due to unexcused delay by the supplier, the amendment
letter extending the delivery period shall, interalia contain the following conditions:
(a) The Purchaser/Consignee shall recover from the supplier, under the provisions of the
clause 23 of the General Conditions of Contract, liquidated damages on the goods and
Page 38
Dated 05.03.2009
services, which the Supplier has failed to deliver within the delivery period stipulated in
the contract.
(b) That no increase in price on account of any ground, whatsoever, including any
stipulation in the contract for increase in price on any other ground and, also including
statutory increase in or fresh imposition of customs duty, excise duty, sales tax/ VAT,
Service Tax and Works Contract Tax or on account of any other tax or duty which may be
levied in respect of the goods and services specified in the contract, which takes place after
the date of delivery stipulated in the contract shall be admissible on such of the said goods
and services as are delivered and performed after the date of the delivery stipulated in the
contract.
(c) But nevertheless, the Purchaser/Consignee shall be entitled to the benefit of any
decrease in price on account of reduction in or remission of customs duty, excise duty,
sales tax/ VAT, Service Tax and Works Contract Tax or any other duty or tax or levy or on
account of any other grounds, which takes place after the expiry of the date of delivery
stipulated in the contract.
22.5
The supplier shall not dispatch the goods after expiry of the delivery period. The supplier is
required to apply to the Purchaser/Consignee for extension of delivery period and obtain the same
before despatch. In case the supplier dispatches the goods without obtaining an extension, it would
be doing so at its own risk and no claim for payment for such supply and / or any other expense
related to such supply shall lie against the purchaser.
23.
Liquidated damages
23.1
Subject to GCC clause 26, if the supplier fails to deliver any or all of the goods or fails to perform
the services within the time frame(s) incorporated in the contract, the Purchaser/Consignee shall,
without prejudice to other rights and remedies available to the Purchaser/Consignee under the
contract, deduct from the contract price, as liquidated damages, a sum equivalent to 0.5% per
week of delay or part thereof on delayed supply of goods and/or services until actual delivery or
performance subject to a maximum of 10% of the contract price. Once the maximum is reached
Purchaser/Consignee may consider termination of the contract as per GCC 24.
During the above-mentioned delayed period of supply and / or performance, the conditions
incorporated under GCC sub-clause 22.4 above shall also apply.
24.
Termination for default
24.1
The Purchaser/Consignee , without prejudice to any other contractual rights and remedies
available to it (the Purchaser/Consignee ), may, by written notice of default sent to the supplier,
terminate the contract in whole or in part, if the supplier fails to deliver any or all of the goods or
fails to perform any other contractual obligation(s) within the time period specified in the contract,
or within any extension thereof granted by the Purchaser/Consignee pursuant to GCC sub-clauses
22.3 and 22.4.
In the event of the Purchaser/Consignee terminates the contract in whole or in part, pursuant to
GCC sub-clause 24.1 above, the Purchaser/Consignee may procure goods and/or services similar
to those cancelled, with such terms and conditions and in such manner as it deems fit and the
supplier shall be liable to the Purchaser/Consignee for the extra expenditure, if any, incurred by
the Purchaser/Consignee for arranging such procurement.
Unless otherwise instructed by the Purchaser/Consignee, the supplier shall continue to perform the
contract to the extent not terminated.
24.2
24.3
25.
25.1
Termination for insolvency
If the supplier becomes bankrupt or otherwise insolvent, the purchaser reserves the right to
terminate the contract at any time, by serving written notice to the supplier without any
Page 39
Dated 05.03.2009
26.
26.1
26.2
26.3
26.4
26.5
compensation, whatsoever, to the supplier, subject to further condition that such termination will
not prejudice or affect the rights and remedies which have accrued and / or will accrue thereafter
to the Purchaser/Consignee.
Force Majeure
Notwithstanding the provisions contained in GCC clauses 22, 23 and 24, the supplier shall not be
liable for imposition of any such sanction so long the delay and/or failure of the supplier in
fulfilling its obligations under the contract is the result of an event of Force Majeure.
For purposes of this clause, Force Majeure means an event beyond the control of the supplier and
not involving the supplier’s fault or negligence and which is not foreseeable and not brought about
at the instance of, the party claiming to be affected by such event and which has caused the non –
performance or delay in performance. Such events may include, but are not restricted to, acts of
the Purchaser/Consignee either in its sovereign or contractual capacity, wars or revolutions,
hostility, acts of public enemy, civil commotion, sabotage, fires, floods, explosions, epidemics,
quarantine restrictions, strikes excluding by its employees, lockouts excluding by its
management, and freight embargoes.
If a Force Majeure situation arises, the supplier shall promptly notify the Purchaser/Consignee in
writing of such conditions and the cause thereof within twenty-one days of occurrence of such
event. Unless otherwise directed by the Purchaser/Consignee in writing, the supplier shall
continue to perform its obligations under the contract as far as reasonably practical, and shall seek
all reasonable alternative means for performance not prevented by the Force Majeure event.
If the performance in whole or in part or any obligation under this contract is prevented or delayed
by any reason of Force Majeure for a period exceeding sixty days, either party may at its option
terminate the contract without any financial repercussion on either side.
In case due to a Force Majeure event the Purchaser/Consignee is unable to fulfil its contractual
commitment and responsibility, the Purchaser/Consignee will notify the supplier accordingly and
subsequent actions taken on similar lines described in above sub-paragraphs.
27.
Termination for convenience
27.1
The Purchaser/Consignee reserves the right to terminate the contract, in whole or in part for its
(Purchaser’s/Consignee ’s) convenience, by serving written notice on the supplier at any time
during the currency of the contract. The notice shall specify that the termination is for the
convenience of the Purchaser/Consignee. The notice shall also indicate interalia, the extent to
which the supplier’s performance under the contract is terminated, and the date with effect from
which such termination will become effective.
The goods and services that are complete and ready in terms of the contract for delivery and
performance within thirty days after the supplier’s receipt of the notice of termination shall be
accepted by the Purchaser/Consignee following the contract terms, conditions and prices. For the
remaining goods and services, the Purchaser/Consignee may decide:
a)
To get any portion of the balance completed and delivered at the contract terms, conditions
and prices; and / or
b)
To cancel the remaining portion of the goods and services and compensate the supplier by
paying an agreed amount for the cost incurred by the supplier towards the remaining
portion of the goods and services.
27.2
28.
Governing language
28.1
The contract shall be written in English language following the provision as contained in GIT
clause 4. All correspondence and other documents pertaining to the contract, which the parties
exchange, shall also be written accordingly in that language.
29.
otices
Page 40
Dated 05.03.2009
29.1
29.2
Notice, if any, relating to the contract given by one party to the other, shall be sent in writing or by
cable or telex or facsimile and confirmed in writing. The procedure will also provide the sender of
the notice, the proof of receipt of the notice by the receiver. The addresses of the parties for
exchanging such notices will be the addresses as incorporated in the contract.
The effective date of a notice shall be either the date when delivered to the recipient or the
effective date specifically mentioned in the notice, whichever is later.
30.
Resolution of disputes
30.1
If dispute or difference of any kind shall arise between the Purchaser/Consignee and the supplier
in connection with or relating to the contract, the parties shall make every effort to resolve the
same amicably by mutual consultations.
If the parties fail to resolve their dispute or difference by such mutual consultation within twentyone days of its occurrence, then, unless otherwise provided in the SCC, either the
Purchaser/Consignee or the supplier may give notice to the other party of its intention to
commence arbitration, as hereinafter provided the applicable arbitration procedure will be as per
the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 of India. In the case of a dispute or difference arising
between the Purchaser/Consignee and a domestic Supplier relating to any matter arising out of or
connected with the contract, such dispute or difference shall be referred to the sole arbitration of
an officer, in the Ministry of Law & Justice appointed to be the arbitrator by the Chairman &
Managing Director of HLL Lifecare Limited. The award of the arbitrator shall be final and
binding on the parties to the contract subject to the provision that the Arbitrator shall give
reasoned award in case the value of claim in reference exceeds Rupees One Lac (Rs. 1,00,000/-)
Venue of Arbitration: The venue of arbitration shall be the place from where the contract has been
issued, i.e., Noida (U.P.)/ New Delhi, India.
30.2
30.3
31.
Applicable Law
The contract shall be governed by and interpreted in accordance with the laws of India for the
time being in force.
32.
General/ Miscellaneous Clauses
32.1
Nothing contained in this Contract shall be constructed as establishing or creating between the
parties, i.e. the Supplier/its Indian Agent/AMC Provider on the one side and the Purchaser on the
other side, a relationship of master and servant or principal and agent.
Any failure on the part of any Party to exercise right or power under this Contract shall not
operate as waiver thereof.
The Supplier shall notify the Purchaser/Consignee /the Government of India of any material
change would impact on performance of its obligations under this Contract.
Each member/constituent of the Supplier/its Indian Agent/AMC Provider, in case of consortium
shall be jointly and severally liable to and responsible for all obligations towards the
Purchaser/Consignee/Government for performance of contract/services including that of its
Associates/Sub Contractors under the Contract.
The Supplier/its Indian Agent/AMC Provider shall at all times, indemnify and keep indemnified
the Purchaser/Government of India against all claims/damages etc. for any infringement of any
Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) while providing its services under AMC or the Contract.
The Supplier/its Agent/AMC Provider shall, at all times, indemnify and keep indemnified the
Purchaser/Consignee/Government of India against any claims in respect of any damages or
compensation payable in consequences of any accident or injury sustained or suffered by its
employees or agents or by any other third party resulting from or by any action, omission or
operation conducted by or on behalf of the supplier/its associate/affiliate etc.
All claims regarding indemnity shall survive the termination or expiry of the contract
32.2
32.3
32.4
32.5
32.6
32.7
Page 41
Dated 05.03.2009
SECTIO – V
SPECIAL CODITIOS OF COTRACT (SCC)
The following Special Conditions of Contract (SCC) will apply for this purchase. The corresponding
clauses of General Conditions of Contract (GCC) relating to the SCC stipulations have also been
incorporated below.
These Special Conditions will modify/substitute/supplement the corresponding (GCC) clauses.
Whenever there is any conflict between the provision in the GCC and that in the SCC, the provision
contained in the SCC shall prevail.
Page 42
Dated 05.03.2009
SECTIO - VI
LIST OF REQUIREMETS
Part I:
Sl.
No.
Total
Qty.
Name of items
Warranty AMC
period period
Code Qty. (Years) (Years)
Gurgaon 1
3
5
Consignee
1 Paging System Console
1
2 Nurse call system
12 Gurgaon
12
3
5
3 Glucometer
82 Gurgaon
37
1
Nil
MGM
45
4 Calorimeter
5
Gurgaon
5
3
5
5 Semi-automated Clinical Chemistry Analyser
2
Gurgaon
2
3
5
6 Fully automatic random access biochemistry analyzer
(medium throughput)
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
7 Blood Gas Analyser
3
Gurgaon
2
3
5
MGM
1
8 Bilirubinometer
3
Gurgaon
3
3
5
9 Electrolyte Analyser
3
Gurgaon
1
3
5
MGM
2
3
2
10 Binocular Microscope
11 Gurgaon
9
MGM
2
11 Microscope Binocular with illumination & photography
1
Gurgaon
1
3
2
12 Microscope Binocular with illumination
4
Gurgaon
4
3
2
13 Water Bath(22L)
2
Gurgaon
2
3
2
14 Water Bath (30L)
2
Gurgaon
2
3
2
15 Centrifuge (24-36 tube)
7
Gurgaon
7
3
2
16 Centrifuge Refrigerated
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
17 Centrifuge Cyto / Cyto span
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
18 Vortex mixer
4
Gurgaon
4
3
2
19 Laboratory glassware washer
1
Gurgaon
1
3
2
20 Incubator
3
Gurgaon
2
3
2
MGM
1
21 Water Deionizer (4 LpH)
1
Gurgaon
1
3
2
22 Heamoglbinometer
2
Gurgaon
2
3
2
23 Automatic blood cell counter
2
Gurgaon
1
3
5
MGM
1
24 Neubauer Chamber
8
Gurgaon
8
1
Nil
25 ESR Analyser
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
26 Coagulation analyzer
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
Page 43
Dated 05.03.2009
27 Haemocytometer
2
Gurgaon
2
3
5
28 Biosafety Hood
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
29 Blood bank refrigeratgor (2-6º C),
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
30 Refrigerator 2000 Lts for kits
2
Gurgaon
2
3
5
31 Refrigerator with freezer 2000 Ltr
7
Gurgaon
7
3
5
32 Refrigerator - 1600 Ltr
15 Gurgaon
15
3
5
33 Refrigerator - 1200 Ltr
3
Gurgaon
3
3
5
34 Refrigerator Under couch - 300 Ltr
10 Gurgaon
10
1
Nil
35 Refrigerator - Deep freezer (-40º C) 200 Ltr
2
Gurgaon
2
3
5
36 Complete Dental Unit
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
37 DentalL X-Ray
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
38 Dental x-ray Film Developer
1
Gurgaon
1
3
2
39 intra oral, digital radiography/imaging
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
40 Panoramic x-ray
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
41 Dental instrument set
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
42 Computerised Aneasthesia Dose Delivery System for Dental
2
Gurgaon
2
3
5
43 Wall mounted exam light 10000 lux
2
Gurgaon
2
3
2
44 Examination lamp wall mounted - 5000 lux
48 Gurgaon
48
3
2
45 Examination lamp mobile - 50000 lux
4
Gurgaon
4
3
5
46 Sphygmomanometer
82 Gurgaon
82
1
4
47 Electronic BP apparatus
24 Gurgaon
24
3
2
48 Stethescope
78 Gurgaon
78
1
Nil
49 Hi speed steam Flash sterilizer
3
Gurgaon
2
3
5
MGM
1
Gurgaon
2
3
5
MGM
2
50 Steam Sterilizer 450 Ltr, horizontal, two door, with gravity
drying, with all accessories like loading/unloading trolleys,
loading baskets(built in steam generator)
51 Weighing scale - neonatal
6
Gurgaon
6
3
2
52 X-Ray systems – 300 mA & 500 mA
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
53 CR Reader & monitor
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
54 Dry film printer (laser printer)
2
Gurgaon
2
3
5
55 X-ray processor - Automatic, Dark room Light shields,
exhaust
1
Gurgaon
1
3
2
56 C-arm with DSA system
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
57 Portable x-ray unit 30 kW
2
Gurgaon
2
3
5
58 Portable ultrasound B & W
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
59 General purpose Ultrasound Diagnostic system
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
60 Portable ultrasound with colour doppler
2
Gurgaon
2
3
5
61 Air warmer – (Patient warmer)
6
Gurgaon
6
3
2
62 Baby warmer
4
Gurgaon
4
3
2
63 Baby bassinet
8
Gurgaon
8
3
2
Page 44
4
Dated 05.03.2009
64 Infant resuscitator
5
Gurgaon
3
MGM
2
3
2
65 Patient monitor - with neonatal accesories
6
Gurgaon
6
3
5
66 Ventillator - Critical care
11 Gurgaon
6
3
5
MGM
5
67 ENT Microdrilling System
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
68 ENT Operating Microscope
3
Gurgaon
2
3
5
MGM
1
69 ENT Micro Debrider for FESS (Imported)
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
70 Audiometer
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
71 Tympanometer
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
72 OAE Tester – Hearing screener
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
73 ENT Examination unit complete including cabinets, with
treatment couch etc (with compressed air & vac)
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
74 Schiotz -Applanation Tonometer-1
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
75 Refractometer / Keratometer on stand
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
76 Ophthalmic Ultrasound (A and B)
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
77 Slit lamp with application tonometer and stand
3
Gurgaon
2
3
5
MGM
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
MGM
1
Gurgaon
3
3
Nil
MGM
2
78 Operating microscope - ophthalmology
2
79 Ophthalmoscope – Direct
5
80 Tonometer
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
81 Streak Retinoscope
4
Gurgaon
3
3
5
MGM
1
82 Non contact tonometer on stand
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
83 Digital Retinal Camera
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
84 Yag Laser for Ophthalmology
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
85 Green Laser for Ophthalmology
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
86 Phako machine
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
87 Surgical Instruments for Opthalmology (set)
2
Gurgaon
2
3
Nil
88 Pneumatic Drill complete
2
Gurgaon
1
3
5
MGM
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
MGM
1
Gurgaon
1
3
Nil
MGM
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
MGM
1
Gurgaon
2
3
2
89 Arthoscope set complete
2
90 Instrument Set for Orthopaedic Surgery
2
91 Drill & Saw system - Battery cum electric Operated
92 Tourniquet - Automatic electronic with hose & cuffs
Page 45
2
2
Dated 05.03.2009
93 Technical Specifications for Ultrasonic Aspirator
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
94 Ultrasonic Nebulizer
23 Gurgaon
23
3
Nil
95 Ventilator portable
4
Gurgaon
3
3
5
MGM
1
Gurgaon
4
3
5
MGM
2
Gurgaon
2
3
5
MGM
1
96 ECG Single channel - portable
6
97 ECG 12 channel - Page printer with cart.
3
98 Patient Monitor
20 Gurgaon
20
3
5
99 Multiparameter Monitor
18 Gurgaon
8
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
--
--
--
100 Central Monitoring Station for multi para monitor
3
101 Pulse Oximeter
MGM
10
Gurgaon
1
MGM
2
15 Gurgaon
MGM
102 Defibrillator with monitor
12 Gurgaon
103 Fetal monitor
3
9
6
8
MGM
4
Gurgaon
2
MGM
1
104 Deleted
--
105 Fetal Doppler - handheld
5
Gurgaon
5
3
Nil
106 Fetal Doppler – twin
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
107 Diode laser
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
108 Laparoscopy System with Instruments – General Surgery
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
109 Suction machine - electric
33 Gurgaon
25
3
5
3
5
110 Anaesthesia Workstation
7
---
MGM
8
Gurgaon
4
MGM
3
111 Ambulatory Blood Pressure Monitor
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
112 Surgical diathermy (electro cautery)
11 Gurgaon
9
3
5
MGM
2
113 Fibre Optic Laryngoscope
2
Gurgaon
2
3
5
114 Fibre Optic Bronchoscope Adult with light source
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
115 Fibre Optic Bronchoscope Paed
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
116 Infusion pump
49 Gurgaon
35
3
2
MGM
14
117 Ventilator BIPAP
2
Gurgaon
2
3
5
118 Videocolposcope
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
119 Entenox delivery unit
2
Gurgaon
2
3
5
120 Cysto-urethro-resectoscope (set)
1
Gurgaon
1
3
Nil
121 Cystoscope
1
Gurgaon
1
3
Nil
Page 46
Dated 05.03.2009
122 Electrical stimulator (interferential Theraphy)
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
123 Shortwave diathermy unit -250 W Therapy
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
124 Microwave therapy unit
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
125 EtO Steriliser
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
126 Transport incubator
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
127 Water Treatment System for producing Disinfectant Solution
1
Gurgaon
1
3
2
128 Infant Ventillator
2
Gurgaon
2
3
5
129 Laparoscopy System with Instruments – Gyneac Surgery
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
130 Hysteroscopy System
2
Gurgaon
2
3
5
131 Steriliser Dental - Cassette Autoclave
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
132 Sterilizer Dental - Electric
1
Gurgaon
1
3
5
133 Plaster saw with suction machine
3
Gurgaon
3
3
5
134 Personal Protection System
2
Gurgaon
2
3
5
135 Patient trolley for General Procedure & emergency and
recovery trolley
8
Gurgaon
8
1
Nil
136 Medicine trolley/ crash cart
10 Gurgaon
10
1
Nil
137 Dressing trolley
30 Gurgaon
30
1
Nil
138 Monitor trolley
5
Gurgaon
5
1
Nil
139 Transport trolley S.Steel 45x45 Cm x 80 Cm H one shelf,
open, SS top
13 Gurgaon
13
1
Nil
140 Wheel chair
10 Gurgaon
10
1
Nil
141 Mayo table
3
Gurgaon
3
1
Nil
142 Double Step Foot stool - OPD
40 Gurgaon
40
1
Nil
143 Dangerous drug cabinet
11 Gurgaon
11
1
Nil
144 IV stand/ Saline Stand
36 Gurgaon
36
1
Nil
145 Change Locker - 6unit
37 Gurgaon
37
1
Nil
146 Patient Bed Fowler position bed
110 Gurgaon 110
1
Nil
147 Bedside Locker
122 Gurgaon 122
1
Nil
148 Adjustable Over bed Table
122 Gurgaon 122
1
Nil
149 Fracture Table(Procedure Table) with all traction
accessories&ortho sets.
2
Gurgaon
2
1
Nil
150 Operating table-Electrohydraulic
5
Gurgaon
4
3
Nil
MGM
1
151 Patient Couch for ultrasound examination and patient
examination rooms
24 Gurgaon
24
1
Nil
152 Patient bed - Four Section Bed for ICU/ Recovery Room
12 Gurgaon
12
3
Nil
153 Baby crib
7
Gurgaon
7
1
Nil
154 Labour cum birthing bed
2
Gurgaon
2
1
Nil
155 Closed SS Trolley (to transport sterile items to OT)
2
Gurgaon
2
1
Nil
Page 47
Dated 05.03.2009
156 Closed SS Trolley (to transport unsterile items from OT to
CSSD)
2
Gurgaon
2
1
Nil
157 SS Food Trolley
2
Gurgaon
2
1
Nil
1
Nil
158 All purpose steel stool
150 Gurgaon 150
159 Pediatric ICU Bed
2
Gurgaon
2
3
Nil
160 Patient Transfer Chair
2
Gurgaon
2
1
Nil
Part II: Required Delivery Schedule:
a) For Indigenous goods or for imported goods if supplied from India:
Within 60 days from date of Notification of Award to delivery at consignee site. The date of
delivery will be the date of delivery at consignee site (Tenderers may quote earliest delivery
period).
b) For Imported goods directly from abroad:
Within 90 days from date of opening of L/C. The date of delivery will be the date of delivery at
consignee site (Tenderers may quote earliest delivery period).
Part III: Scope of Incidental Services:
Installation & Commissioning, Supervision, Demonstration, Trial run and Training etc. as specified
in GCC Clause 13
Part IV:
Turnkey (if any) as per details in Technical Specification.
Part V:
Annual Maintenance Contract (AMC) as per details in Technical Specification.
Part VI:
Required Terms of Delivery and Destination.
a) For Indigenous goods or for imported goods if supplied from India:
Delivery required at Consignee Site.
Insurance (local transportation and storage) would be borne by the Supplier from warehouse to the
consignee site for a period including 3 months beyond date of delivery
b) For Imported goods directly from abroad:
The foreign tenderers are required to quote their rates on DDP at consignee’s site basis giving break
up of the price as per the Proforma prescribed in the Price Schedule.
Custom clearance, handling, unloading & loading and transportation to the consignee’s site shall be
the responsibility of the supplier/ Indian agent.
Insurance (local transportation and storage) would be extended and borne by the Supplier from
ware house to the consignee site for a period including 3 months beyond date of delivery.
c) Destination/Consignee details are given in Section XXI
Page 48
Dated 05.03.2009
Section – VII
Technical Specifications
Sch.
No.
001
Name of item
Paging
Console
002
System
Nurse call system
Specification
Electronic Paging System with 50 Radio pagers,
Frequency to be in citizen band; necessary clearance from Department of Telecom to be
obtained by the Vendor.
System transmitter, antenna to be installed and cabling work inclusive.
50 Nos. of miniature pagers with central charger rack at reception area.
Different call facilities to be provided
No talk back facility.
There should not be any black spot area. (Bidders are advised to visit the site for assessment)
Main Consol at Respective nursing stations
Call Switch at Bed Head
Call Alarms to be Audio as well as visual.
Calls acknowledge facility to be available only at the bedside.
Buzzer sound to be adjustable, Temp. buzzer mute facility to be available.
Time keeping (Time of Call and time of acknowledgement) to be available.
Data storage to be for at least 7 days.
Central Nurse Station Displays
• Large easy-to-read room nos. and emergency messages.
• Single button call acknowledgement.
• Patient-Nurse Intercom.
• Call Transfer and Corridor Slave displays.
• Nurse-Call Response Monitoring with reports.
Bed Units & Handsets
•
Rugged handsets with lamp indicators for Normal calls.
• Provision for attendant and cafeteria calls.
• Patient-Nurse Intercom.
• Nurse help requests.
• Instrument alarm relays.
• Code-Blue Alerts.
• Lighting, Audio and TV controls.
Emergency Alert Units
• Safe, rugged, pull-cord units for shower and bath areas.
• Indicator lamps for patient's re-assurance.
Door Displays
• Bright three-colour door displays.
• Call attendance Registration at room entrance.
• Nurse presence indication.
003
Glucometer
Glucometer
•
•
Large, easy to read display
Stores upto 500 test results with date & time
Page 49
Dated 05.03.2009
•
•
004
Calorimeter
005
Semi automated
Clinical Chemistry
Analyzers
Automatic 7, 14 and 30 day averaging
Reading in mmol/L format (fixed)
For determination of wide range substrat, enzymes and hormones.
Memory capacity,
Liquid crystal screen ,
Printer
Quality control program and relevant statistical data with memory.
Unit should be complete with all accessories such as cuvettes, lamp, startup, startup kit etc.
Semi automated Clinical Chemistry Analyzers
1) Compact microprocessor – controlled, general purpose bi-chromatic photometer system with
at least six filters ranging from 340 nm to 700 nm, to read & calculate results of both end point
& Kinetic colorimetric assays.
2) Temperature – 37oC – Peltier based temperature control.
3) Light source – tungsten Halogen lamp
4) Measurement modes – Absorbance, Concentration, turbidometry
5) Calculation modes – single standard, multistandard – linear & nonlinear, factor, kinetic
6) Input – Facility to attach external key board
7) Output – built in printer & facility to attach external printer
8) Measurement range 0.00 to 2.50 absorbance units (A)
9) Measuring device: Facility to use both cuvettes and flow cells
10) Ability to generate patient work list, reports and quality control data for not less than two
levels for 50 parameters or more.
11) Facility to transfer data via LIS
12) Store reagent performance data (blank absorbance), calibration curves, Levy-Jenning plots
and not less than 1000 patient results
13) One spare flow cell, 12 cuvettes, ten bulbs, and 20 printer paper rolls to be supplied along
with equipment.
14) Compatible online UPS with battery back up of at least one hour
Should be supplied with Hi quality Pipette, piston, variable volume 10-1000 µl
--. 2 No.
Should be supplied with Hi quality Piston pipette complete set 5/10/20/50/100/200 ml, with all
accessories. – 2 Nos
Micro pipettes - fixed vol, single channel – 2 Nos.
Auto pipettes (fixed variable, 10 - 100 µl, 20 - 200 µl, 200 - 1000 µl – 2 Nos. each
Timely authentic calibrations of Pipettes (along with the main unit) to be performed by the bidder
in the warranty and contract period, without hampering the functioning of hospital.
006
Fully auto random
access
biochemistry
analyzer (medium
throughput)
AUTOMATIC BIO-CHEMISTRY ANALYZER – RANDOM ACCESS
Multi parameter and discrete analyzer including electrolyte with computer and printer.
•
Capable of analyzing all routine bio-chemistry analysis including electrolytes (ISE –
Module)
•
Throughput up to 320 test/hour, on 24 hours basis.
•
Capability up to 40 samples/run and up to 20 different at any one time
•
On board refrigeration for reagents.
•
Integrated computer system for data management and storage data.
•
Sample volume can be adapted to pediatric samples (micro analysis)
•
Calibration and maintenance requirement is minimum.
•
To be supplied with 90 Litre/hour multi-stage with 3 different grades of water (3 separate
Page 50
Dated 05.03.2009
•
•
•
filter) and deionised.
Tests to be analyzed by pre-analyzer, LFT, liquids, total protein, calcium, phosphorus,
magnesium amylase,, sodium, potassium, bicarbonate, chloride urea, creatine and glucose
etc.
Battery backup to be included
Unit with open system performed
With complete accessories as cuvette, startup kit, consumables, cup 1000 etc.
007
Blood Gas
Analyser
BLOOD GAS ANALYSER
•
A fully automated pH/Blood gas/electrolyte analyzer measuring the following parameters: pH, PCO2, PO2, Barometric pressure.
Na, K, Ca, Cl
Co-oximetry: ct Hb, CCO Hb, Met Hb, Sylf Hb, Haematocrit and Barometric pressure.
•
Sample volume should be approximate 100 µl for all parameters.
•
All calibration and cleaning cycles should be fully automated with user selectable
calibration items.
•
Calibration should be performed by liquid calibration for all parameters.
•
The electrodes provided should be zero maintenance including the reference electrode.
•
The system should have on board data manager to store all patient results, QC data and
calibrations.
•
The system should have a closed waste system and mentioned continuously. Also all the
system reagents should be monitored continuously.
•
A power fail protection for 20 min.to take all calibration and programmed data.
•
The analyzer should have a colour LCD screen to access all the system software and to
display the patient’s results. With alphanumeric key board/touch screen.
•
A built in thermal printer should be provided to print out patient results.
•
The system should work in discrete testing, ie, selectable parameter testing.
•
Should be supplied with consumable, reagents and QC agents for 1000 tests, as per the
user requirements so that they do not expire.
•
Should not preferably use special gases.
008
Bilirubinometer
BILIRUBINOMETER
For total bilirubinometer Photo metric analyzer for determining total bilirubin concentration in new
born infants.
-Sample: 20 (µl) micro-litre undiluted serum.
-Result displayed : 5 second , Read out :15 second digital direct reading
-Range: 0-40 mg/dl
Accessories:
Calibration cuvettee, high level alarm and quality check cuvette, 10 boxes of disposable cuvetts.
009
Electrolyte
Analyser
Blood pH/Gas Analyzer, Electrolytes, CO2 Analyzer
Fully automated Ph/blood gas/electrolytes analyzer, measures the following parameters PH,
PCO2, PCO2 and PO2 and barometric pressure, NA, K, Ca Ct, THB, HCL
• Analyses per hour should not be less than 36
• Sample volume should not exceed 110 µl for all parameter
• All calibration and cleaning cycle should be fully automated with user selectable
calibration times
• The electrodes provide should be zero maintenance including the reference electrode.
• The system should have onboard data management to store all patient result and
calibrations.
• The system should have a open system and monitored continuously.
• A power fault protection for 20 minute to keep all calibration and programmed data
• The system should have a screen to access all system software and to display the
patient results.
Page 51
Dated 05.03.2009
•
•
•
010
Binocular
Microscope
MICROSCOPE PHASE CONTRAST & DARK FILED
•
•
011
Microscope
Binocular with
illumination &
photography
A built –in printer should be provided to print out patient result
The system should have a patient data, new reagents and new electrodes. Startup kit
1000 samples, essential spares.
The system should work on discrete testing, i.e. selectable parameter testing.
Binocular microscope with objective, trinocular eye piece, eye piece lens, reverse revolving
nose piece, coaxial coarse and fine focusing system, large arm rest, photo switch must be
automatic so that it select the appropriate voltage for photomicrography option rectangular
stage, approximately 180 x 141 mm, surface area. Magnification 8 x (1000) for observation,
2.5 x (500) for 35 mm (24x36 mm) photography, dark field condenser oil immersion type
condenser, premium performance with numerical operature of 1.2 – 1.43 or 20 x to 100 x
objectives or dry type dark field condenser has numerical operture 0.8-0.95 for 10 x 40 x
objectives. Complete with all accessories such as spare bulb (6 Nos) and dust cover.
All lenses and optics should be imported.
MICROSCOPE, BINOCULAR
Binocular for bright-field, dark field, phase contrast and fluorescence application.
Microscope basic stand with 30W.
Transmitted light illumination. Coaxial double Knob focusing
Lift approx.20mm,5-fold revolving nosepiece, fixed.
Objective condenser height displacement with rack and pinion and right/left.
Control, Condenser holder with dovetail and centering device for interchangeable condensers.
Transmitted light illumination with collector and 12V 30W halogen lamp, incorporated field
diaphragm, removable for mirror adaptation. Supply unit for the 12 Vx30W lamp, incorporated
and regulating.
Mechanical stage for right hand operation, without object holder, fixed mounted to the stage
holder. Scanning area 76x52 mm;
Spare Halogen lamp 12 V 30 W
Lamp housing with 50 W lamp complete
Lamp source : 220 V / 50 Hz.
Illuminator for incident fluorescence, for 2 filter systems;
Blue filter dark stop commutable; light trap to avoid external light.
Filter system for blue excitation.
Tube trinocular with fixed photo tube , tube lens 00/1x, 30° inclination, automatic constant
sharpness at eye width from 55 to 75 mm; beam splitter for camera.
Object holder for 2 specimens for mechanical stage.
Universal Condenser.
Dust cover
Objective
5 x 0.12.
Objective
10 x 0.25
Objective
40 x 0.65.
Objective
100 x 1.25 Oil immersion.
10 ml Immersion oil
Pair of eyepieces 10 x /20
Power supply : 240 V / 50 Hz.
•
Compatible and appropriate Hi-quality Digital Camera (12 Megapixel or more) along with
couplers, all connecting cables, computer connectivity; and should be quoted separately.
Page 52
Dated 05.03.2009
012
Microscope
Binocular with
illumination
Binocular for bright-field, dark field, phase contrast and fluorescence application.
Microscope basic stand with 30W.
Transmitted light illumination. Coaxial double Knob focusing
Lift approx.20mm,5-fold revolving nosepiece, fixed.
Objective condenser height displacement with rack and pinion and right/left.
Control, Condenser holder with dovetail and centering device for interchangeable condensers.
Transmitted light illumination with collector and 12V 30W halogen lamp, incorporated field
diaphragm, removable for mirror adaptation. Supply unit for the 12 V / 30W lamp, incorporated
and regulating.
Mechanical stage for right hand operation, without object holder, fixed mounted to the stage
holder. Scanning area 76x52 mm;
Spare Halogen lamp 12 V / 30 W
Lamp housing with 50 W lamp complete
Lamp source : 220 V / 50 Hz.
Illuminator for incident fluorescence, for 2 filter systems;
Blue filter dark stop commutable; light trap to avoid external light.
Filter system for blue excitation.
Tube trinocular with fixed photo tube , tube lens 00/1x, 30° inclination, automatic constant
sharpness at eye width from 55 to 75 mm; beam splitter for camera.
013
Water Bath (22L)
Object holder for 2 specimens for mechanical stage.
Universal Condenser.
Dust cover
Objective
5 x 0.12.
Objective
10 x 0.25
Objective
40 x 0.65.
Objective
100 x 1.25 Oil immersion.
10 ml Immersion oil
Pair of eyepieces 10 x /20
Power supply : 240 V / 50 Hz.
•
WATER BATH 22L
Water bath 22 litre having 18/10 stainless steel tank housed in a durable paint finished
outer case. Complete with stainless steel shelf, should be thermostatically controlled and
have a sheathed immersion element incorporating a safety cut-out, including an illuminated
On/Off switch and heater indication lamp.
Capacity: 22 L
•
Temp range: 0-100º C
Sensitivity: +0.25º C
Including stainless steel lid and racks for test tubes
014
Water Bath (30L)
WATER BATH 30L
•
Electronic Microprocessor PID controller with continuous power adaptation.
•
Digital display (LED) temperature.
•
Status LEDs of the programme
•
Stainless steel casing.
•
Material of tank- corrosion resistant
Page 53
Dated 05.03.2009
015
Centrifuge (24-36
tube)
Centrifuge Machine
1 Description of Function
1.1 Centrifuges are required in the Laboratory to separate various components of Blood for
analysis.
2 Operational Requirements
2.1 Aerodynamic compact construction for vibration free performance
2.2 Table top version
3
3.1 Angle Head rotor with Tube Capacity Size 5 – 15 ml
3.2 To have capacity to hold 24-36 tubes at a time.
3.3 Should have a digital timer
3.4 Body should be made of strong fabricated & corrosion resistant steel
3.5 Control panel – for start/stop switch, dynamic brakes, step less speed regulator with
zero start switch & speed indicator with timer and protective fuses.
3.6 Door interlock
3.7 Maintenance-free brushless drive motor with exact speed pre selection and
alphanumerical interactive LCD digital display in control panel of RPM & RCF.
Speed range 100 to 6000 rpm and above.
3.8 Choice of acceleration and braking profiles.
3.9 Imbalance detection and auto shut down.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 Tube Holders as appropriate
5
Environmental factors
5.1 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2:2001(Or Equivalent BIS) or General Requirements of
Safety for Electromagnetic Compatibility.
5.2 The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient temperature of 10 40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.3 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient temperature of 0 50deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6
Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz as appropriate fitted with Indian plug
7
Standards and Safety
7.1 The supplier should be preferably ISO certified for quality standards.
7.2 Product should preferably be FDA/CE or ISI approved
7.3 Should preferably comply with IEC/TR 61010-3-020 :Safety requirements for electrical
equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use - Part 3-020: Conformity
verification report for IEC 61010-2-020:1992 Particular requirements for laboratory
centrifuges"
7.4 Should preferably comply with IEC 61010-1 Safety requirements for electrical
equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use - Part 1: General
requirements
8
Documentation
8.1 User manual in English
8.2 Service manual in English
8.3 Certificate of calibration and inspection from factory
8.4 List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine maintenance support
as per manufacturer documentation in service / technical manual
8.5 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and costing
Page 54
Dated 05.03.2009
016
Centrifuge
Refrigerated
Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly maintenance checklist. The
job description of the hospital technician and company service engineer should be clearly spelt
out.
CENTRIFUGE REFRIGERATED
1
For separation of blood components like packed cells, platelet rich plasma, platelet
concentrate, Cryprecipitate & Buffy Coat
2
Programmable memories with tamper proof facility
3 Rotor head with swing out buckets, windshielded.
4
Oval Shaped metal buckets with removable plastic oval cups to
hold double/triple/ quadruple blood bags
5 Refrigerated centrifuge with suitable rotor head & buckets should accommodate/process
minimum 8 blood bags of 450 ml capacity simultaneously
6
Manufacturer to indicate volume & capacity of plastic bucket
7
Centrifugal Force -- Max ceiling 5000g
8
Microprocessor Controlled rotor speed to with in 10 rpm of set value
9
Different Acceleration & Deceleration profiles should be available
10
Temperature range 0 deg C to + 40 deg C, Microprocessor controlled rotor temperature
with in +/- 1deg C regardless of centrifuge speed
11
Programmable time should be from 0-99 minutes with minimum revolution of 1 minute.
12
Digital display of temperature, speed & time & other relevant parameters
13
Automatic shut down of centrifuge , if rotor load is out of balance with indicator
14
Safety Key lock to prevent unauthorized use
15
The equipment should have lockable castors
16
The Refrigerated centrifuge should have built in memory to store atleast
50 data of centrifugation during the processing of Blood Components.
The data from the centrifuge can be transferred to a computer using a RS
232 data interface
17
Power Supply Requirement :- 220-240 Volts 50 Hz Single Phase
18
Servo Controlled heavy duty line voltage corrector should form part of the standard
configuration
19
A line voltage corrector of appropriate rating giving all the specifications should
Page 55
Dated 05.03.2009
be supplied along with the unit
20
017
Centrifuge Cyto /
Cyto span
Should be a CE marked product & from a ISO , WHO-GMP compliant
manufacturer.
Equipment Specifications for Cytocentrifuge
1.1 A cytocentrifuge, which operates at a speed of between 500 and 2,000 rpm, forces the
cells from a suspension onto a microscope slide and a blotter simultaneously, absorbs
the suspension medium. Cyto evaluation is evaluation of cells under microscope.
2.1 Latest Model Microprocessor controlled compact Centrifuge with sealed rotor head for
separation of cells found in body fluids
Cells are directly attached in a monolayer to a microscope slide by means of
centrifugal force and a slide and funnel device.
3 Technical Specifications
3.1 Speed range at least :500-2000rpm
3.2 Time range at least : 1-60 minutes
3.3 Number of specimen-can handle up to 12 samples in one cycle.
3.4 Memory to store 20 preset procedures.
3.5 There should be a membrane keypad with bright LCD/LED Display of Time, Speed and
program protocols.
3.6 Audiovisual alarm for out of balance, outside speed tolerance or if the lid is not properly
locked. The system will not run if the lid is not locked properly.
4 System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 It should be supplied with reusable and auto-clavable specimen chamber capable of
handling low volumes and high volumes
Prices should be quoted separately
4.2 Quote consumables for 1000 samples.
5 Environmental factors
5.2 Thu unit shall be capable of operating in ambient temperature of 20-30 deg C and
relative humidity of 80%.
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 Reset table over current breaker shall be fitted for protection
6.3 Suitable voltage corrector/stabilizer
7 Standards and Safety
7.1
7.2
7.3
Should preferably be compliant with IEC 61010-1:covering safety requirements for
electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use.
Should be preferably be FDA or CE or ISI approved product.
Comprehensive training for lab staff and support services till familiarity with the system.
8 Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection from factory.
Page 56
Dated 05.03.2009
8.4
8.5
8.6
018
Vortex mixer
as per manufacturer documentation in service / technical manual.
List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and costing.
Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly maintenance
checklist. The job description of the hospital technician and company service engineer
should be clearly spelt out.
Compliance Report to be submitted in a tabulated and point wise manner clearly
mentioning the page/para number of original catalogue.
VORTEX MIXER
•
Automatic press-start operation.
•
Soft foam rubber pad for vibration free operation.
•
Simultaneous vortex mixing of 1-4 tubes
•
Speed stability tocontinue upto 3000 rpm
•
Non slip feet
•
Power supply 240 V/50 Hz
o The supplier should be preferably ISO certified for quality standards.
o Product should preferably be FDA/CE or ISI approved
Product should be FDA / CE approved or ISI approved
019
020
Laboratory
glassware washer
GLASSWARE WASHING MACHINE
Incubator
INCUBATOR FOR LAB (160 L)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
For laboratory glassware automatic washing and disinfecting
made of stainless steel 304
With 40 programs washing
Acid rinsing facility,
Distilled water rinsing facility hot air drying, liquid detergent and acid dispensers
Water softner with automatic regenerator
LCD display for identifying each program facility, with all accessories.
Universal jet basket with 42 jets, basket for all tube, basket for culture tubes.
•
GENERAL PURPOSE LABORATORY INCUBATOR
•
CAPACITY: 160 LITRES
•
TEMPERATURE RANGE: 25º C ABOVE ROOM TEMPERATURE, UP TO 52º C
•
RUST PROOF STAINLESS STEEL INTERIOR
•
DIGITAL TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
•
SAFETY THERMOSTAT FOR OVER TEMPERATURE PROTECTION.
•
HI-QUALITY, LONG LASTING HEATER ELEMENTS TO BE USED.
•
GLASS INNER DOOR
•
ADJUSTABLE FOUR SHELVES
•
TEMPERATURE UNIFORMITY 0.1º C
•
EXCELLENT ELECTRICAL GROUNDING FOR LEAKAGE CURRENT.
•
EARTH CURRENT LEAKAGE INDICATION – AUDIO AND VISUAL.
•
SHOULD COMPLY TO GENERAL ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS
Page 57
Dated 05.03.2009
021
Water Deioniser (4
LpH)
DEIONISED WATER SUPPLY
DEIONISER, WALL MOUNTED WITH CONDUCTIVITY METER, BATTERY OPERATED. TO
GIVE DEIONISED WATER FROM POTABLE WATER WITH THE FOLLOWING
SPECIFICATION:
CONDUCTIVITY: 50-10 US/CM
RESISTIVITY: 0.02-0.1 MN-CM
RESIDUAL SOLIDS: LESS THAN 100 PPM
DESIRED PH TO BE 7.
MAXIMUM FLOW RATE: 4L/H
RESISTIVITY UP TO 18.3 MEGHOHM-CM AND TOC LEVELS BELOW 5 PPB.
RE-CIRCULATION PUMP TO CONTINUOUSLY RECIRCULATION WATER THROUGHOUT
THE ENTIRE SYSTEM TO MAINTAIN WATER PURITY AND REDUCE THE QUANTITY OF
WASTE WATER REQUIRED FOR RINSE-UP.
S/S RESERVOIR AND 250L CAPACITY.
0.2 MICRON ABSOLUTE HOLLOW FIBRE TO REMOVES BACTERIA AND PARTICULATES.
DIGITAL RESISTIVITY METER TO BE AUTOMATICALLY TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED
TO 25°C.
TEMP. RANGE
: 4-49°C
ORGANIC FREE CATRIDGE KIT- 2 NOS. AND CONDUCTIVITY METER (BUILT IN) TO BE
SUPPLIED ALONG WITH.
022
Heamoglbinometer
Square Tube Type Heamoglbinometer
•
•
•
•
Non-fading Color Comparators
Prismatic Color Comparator for parallax-removed alignment giving a clear, uniformly
illuminated background throughout the comparison view-range, or Planoparallel Color
Comparator.
Square Tube for Uniform Illumination of Sample and Comparator Standards for
accurate reading {-unlike Round Tube type where light rays have to travel larger
distance in the centre (leading to a darker shade of diluted acid hematin in the middle)
and a lesser distance on the sides ( giving a lighter shade of acid hematin on the sides
}. This induces undesirable optical error leading to discrepancies in Haemoglobin
values.
Zero Error 20 cmm Haemoglobinometer Pipette made of Heat Resistant Borosilicate
Glass
Haemometer Set to be supplied complete in safe plastic box ready to use with:
1. Comparator Color Standards in non - corrosive plastic housing equipped to hold the
Square Tube vertically in parallel with the color standards.
2. Square Haemometer Tube with permanent marking in Red and Yellow with two faces
optically clear.
3. Zero Error 20 cmm pipette with enough length to dip comfortably upto the acid level in
the square tube.
Page 58
Dated 05.03.2009
4. Stirring Rod for effective stirring of acid hematin in Square Tube during reaction and
while adding distilled water for dilution.
5. Amber bottle for holding the 0.1 N HCl while taking into field
6. Cleaning Brush for cleaning he Square Tube upto the bottom.
023
Automatic blood
cell counter
CELL COUNTER
(5 PART DIFFERENTIAL AUTOMATED HAEMATOLOGY ANALYZER)
• Automated hematology analyzer should include 24 parameters including histogram for
RBC, WBC and platelet.
• Should have impedance principle for counting and photometer for hemoglobin.
• It should read at least 60 samples per hour or more.
• Should have dual channel measurement.
• Double dilution chamber
• Sample volume less than 200 micro litres in whole blood and pre –dilute mode.
• It should have various types of discrete mode and real time random access analysis to
save reagent consumption and analysis time.
• Sampling needle should have automatic wash from inside and outside.
• LCD / VGA Monitor with graphical user interface (GUI) for easy operation.
• Large illuminated colored VGA or LCD should display the result of all parameters and
histogram together.
• Should have sample manual and capillary mode.
• Should have capacity to store at least 20000 numeric patient results and 5000 graphics.
• Should have inbuilt / External graphic printer.
• Should have RS232 serial and parallel port can be connected with LAN and laser
printer.
• Should have a membrane keyboard for routine operations and maintenance with option
to attach external key boar for patient demographic entry at instrument operation.
• Should have three dimensional technology or Flow cytometry for differential analysis to
maximize resolution, specificity and efficiency.
• Should have extended analysis time for cytopenic sample. .
• Should be able to integrate with optional automated slide maker and stainer.
• Should have zero routine maintenance with automatic electronic aperture cleaning and
back flush after each sample.
• Instrument should accept all types of vacutainer tubes.
• The instrument should have option for auto sampler, bar code reader.
• Reagent cost per cycle including start up and shutdown if 200 & 500 samples are
processed at a time should be submitted separately in the financial bid.
• There should be automatic storage of calibration data and extensive quality control
programme with LJ plot for at least 8 control lots and at least 25 runs per lot.
Basic common necessities:
• Input Voltage 230 volts 50 Hz as per Indian standard.
• Service manual and technical data with all necessary passwords without any obligation.
• Instruction and operational manuals without any obligation.
• UPS preferably sine wave based with maintenance free batteries with duration two
hours.
024
Neubaner
Chamber
SPECIFICATIONS FOR IMPROVED NEUBAUER COUNTING CHAMBER
Chamber : Neubauer counting chamber specialized Microscopic slide
Inside cell of chamber: An area of 9 Sq. mm (3 x3 sq. mm) divided into 9 squares of One mm
side by means of triple lines. The central small square is further divided by triple lines into 5x5 =
25 smaller squares each with side 1/5 of a mm. Thus Dimension of individual cell of 0.05 x 0.05 =
0.0025 mm2.
Gap between cover: 0.1 mm. slip and grid area.
Page 59
Dated 05.03.2009
025
ESR Analyser
Pippettes: RBC and WBC Pippettes.
Cover slips : 22 x 25 mm - Ten boxes
Wooden Box: Inside dimensions approx 100 x 175 x 30 mm
Accessories: Additional two RBC and WBC pipettes each with every neubauer chamber.
Preferably ISO certified / BIS marked.
EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS FOR ESR ANALYZER
1.1 ESR (erythrocyte sedimentation rate) is a non-specific screening test for various diseases.
This test measures the distance (in millimetres) that red blood cells settle in unclotted blood
toward the bottom of a specially marked test tube.
2.1 Automated ESR with inbuilt mixing, and printing of results; Westergren principle for analysis
is required.
3.1 The instrument should be compact table top and light weight.
3.2 Throughput greater than 100 samples per hour.
3.3 Analysis should take less than 30 minutes covering in units of milli meter / hour
3.4 Facility for temperature correction.
3.5 Have infrared sensor for analysis
3.6 Sample volume must be less than 100 micro litres in capillary mode. Sample should be
aspirated one at a time with automatically sensing of quantity and clot detection.
3.7 Capable to read ESR in the range of 1 mm / hr to 140mm / hr and provide 1 hr westergren
results.
3.8 Safety feature with close cycle no touch with blood sample and waste collection at
safety tank at the end of the cycle.
3.9 Should be compatible with standard anticoagulants ESR
3.10 The ESR-Analyzer should incorporate a quality control system for monitoring the
laboratory's quality control program and data can be downloaded to a Laboratory
Information System.
3.11 Compatible/Integrated Mixer and printer.
3.12 Compatible Barcode scanner.
3.13 RS 323C interface for communications with networked devices.
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
System as specifiedCompatible Barcode Scanner.
Vacuum Tubes-1.2 ml(box of 100)- 100 boxes
Printer paper- 10 packs.
5.1 The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient temperature of 0 -50deg C
and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.2 Thu unit shall be capable of operating in ambient temperature of 20-30 deg C and relative
humidity of 80%.
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
7.
7.1
Power Supply
Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
Reset table over current breaker shall be fitted for protection
Suitable voltage corrector/stabilizer
Should be compliant to ISO 13485: Quality systems - Medical devices - Particular
requirements for the application of ISO 9001 applicable to manufacturers and service
providers that perform their own design activities.
Page 60
Dated 05.03.2009
7.2
Should be compliant with IEC 61010-1:covering safety requirements for electrical
equipment for measurement control and laboratory use.
7.3
Should be FDA or CE or ISI approved product
7.4
Comprehensive training for lab staff and support services till familiarity with the
system.
8.
8.1
8.2
8.3
026
Coagulation
analyzer
Documentation
User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied
Certificate of calibration and inspection from factory.
List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine maintenance support
8.4
List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and costing
8.5
Log book with instruction for daily , weekly, monthly and quarterly maintenance
should be clearly spelt out
Compliance Report to be submitted in a tabulated and point wise manner clearly mentioning the
page/para number of original catalogue.
COAGULATION ANALYZER (COAGULOMETER)
Fully automated, open random access, 4 detector channel Blood Coagulation Analyzer having
clotting, chromogenic and immunological assay channels.
Clotting detection methods by recording change of viscosity and/or change of light transmitability
and permitting both chromogenic and immunogenic assays
Parameters:
Provision for simultaneous random analysis for at least 15 parameters such as PT, APTT,
Fibrinogen, Protein S , Protein C, APC resistance, ProC, Antithrombin III, Heparin, Plasminogen
Activator inhibitor, D-Dimer Plus, von Willebrand Antigen, Lupus Anticoagulant, and coagulation
factors VIII & IX .
Should have throughput of at least 100 tests per hour for PT.
Should be provided with a compatible printer.
Should have a intra assay reproducibility of:
Normal
Patient
PT < 2.0%
PT < 2.0%
APTT < 2.0%
APTT < 2.0%
Fibrinogen < 4%
Fibrinogen < 5%
Additional Accessories required
:1) All standard accessories 1 set extra.
2) Compatible Online UPS with1 hour back up.
Optional Consumables* :
Quote list price of all consumables for 1000 tests.
Optional features
1) Bidirectional cost of each features should be quoted separately.
Requirements at installation : To be installed by the Company.
027
Haemocytometer
HEMOCYTOMETER
Description:
Hemocytometer is a microcomputer calculator integrated with counting, analysis and monitoring
with ten groups, two’s place and ten carries.
The number is to be calculated with ten keys and showing ten groups of numbers and totals at
the same time.
It should be of accuracy, functional stability, good out shape, clear monitoring, convenient for use
and clinical fit, showing the primary bacterial infection or virus infection. To be Especially suitable
for the small and middle size hospitals.
Specification:
Page 61
Dated 05.03.2009
Maximum count category : Ten Groups
Count capacity of every group: 0~99
Total count capacity: 0~990
Power: AC220V±10%, 50/60Hz
Power consumption: 5W (max)
028
Biosafety Hood
Equipment Specifications for Biological Safety Cabinets-Class-IIA, Microbiology.
1. Description of Function
1.1 Bio safety cabinets are used to provide primary containment in the laboratory when the
investigator is using potentially infectious materials.
2.1 Protection for operator, environment and the product, from aerosols and microorganisms
2.2 Microprocessor/Microcontroller/Microcomputer controlled system.
3.1 Outer Body made of MS Steel with epoxy Powder
coated(dimensions4x2x3 feet with variation range +/- 3inches
3.2 HEPA filters with 99.999% efficiency for particles ³ 0.3 mm (H14 class according to ENI 822)
3.3 Automatic speed compensation system against clogged main HEPA filter Pre-filteration unit
with retention of 10 to 15 micro meter
3.4 Air Circulation to vertical with 30% exhaust and 70% recirculation
3.5 Single stainless steel perforated working platform
3.6 Alarms for power failure and door opening
3.7 Should be fitted with UV light > 800 lux
3.8 High-speed centrifugal blower with lifetime lubricated
3.9 Noise level <58dBA, Elapsed hour counter
3.10 DOP test outlet
3.11 Fluorescent lamp to obtain powerful glare-free lighting . On site installation and appropriate
certificate to be provided
3.12 On/Off switch with key lock.
3.13 Gas connection should be provided in the cabinet
3.14 Quote for BOP tested Hepa filters separately
4. System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1 As specified
5.1 Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2 :2001(Or Equivalent BIS) General Requirements of Safety for
Electromagnetic Compatibility.
5.3 Thu unit shall be capable of operating in ambient temperature of 20-30 deg C and
relative humidity of 80%.
5.4 One filter set replacement should be included in AMC once in a year
6 Power Supply
6.1 Power input to be 220-240VAC, 50Hz fitted with Indian plug
6.2 Reset table over current breaker shall be fitted for protection
6.3 Suitable Servo controlled Stabilizer/CVT
6.4 Suitable UPS with maintenance free batteries for minimum one-hour back-up should be
supplied with the system.
7. Standards and Safety
7.1 Should be compliant to ISO 13485: Quality systems - Medical devices - Particular
requirements for the application of ISO 9001. applicable to manufacturers and service
providers that perform their own design activities.
Page 62
Dated 05.03.2009
7.2 Should be FDA or CE or ISI approved product
7.3 Electrical safety conforms to standards for electrical safety IEC-60601 / IS-13450
8. Documentation
8.1 User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied
8.2 Certificate of calibration and inspection from factory.
8.3 Compliance Report to be submitted in a tabulated and point wise manner clearly
mentioning the page/para number of original catalogue.
8.4 List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and costing
available in stock with the supplier
8.5 Log book with instruction for daily , weekly, monthly and quarterly maintenance
checklist.
The job description of the hospital technician and company service engineer should be
clearly spelt out
029
Blood bank
refrigeratgor (2-6º
C),
BLOOD BANK REFRIGRATOR
1. Blood Bank Refrigerator should have a capacity to hold 300 blood bags of 450 ml each
2 Should maintain internal temp at 4 degree C & the uniformity of this temperature should
be maintained throughout the chamber with the max average temperature variation of +/1 deg C between different chambers
3 Blood Bank Refrigerator should have integrated temperature monitoring system with
microprocessor controls
4 The inbuilt data management system ensures temperature recording & storage of data
for upto 1000 records & transfer of data through LAN to a PC
5 The blood bank refrigerator should have a large LCD which displays:Temperature
High & Low alarm points with date & time
Previous 24 hour temperature in graphical form
Data of power failure/resumption in last 24 hours with date & time
6 The blood bank refrigerator should also have an inbuilt circular chart recorder for 7 days
recording of temperature on circular chart paper.
7 The internal automatic temperature alarm system should work if a temperature falls below
2 deg C & exceeds beyond 6 deg C
8 The internal temperature alarm system should also have a battery back up of minimum 34 hours
9 Inner Chamber of Blood Bank Refrigerator should be made from high quality AISI-304
stainless steel & outside CR sheet with minimum thickness of 1mm
10 Blood Bank Refrigerator should have see through outer glass door & inner door of acrylic
sheet to ensure ease of operations, better maintenace of internal temperature etc
11 Blood Bank Refrigerator should confirm to noise level of less than 85 db(A) as per IEC
61010
Guidelines.
Blood Bank Refrigerator should have in built servo controlled voltage stabilizer of proper
rating
Power supply 230 volts, single phase 50 Hz
Internal cabinet lighting to be provided with lamp illumination whenever door opens.
Roll out steel trays for proper storage of blood bags.
The Blood Bank Refrigerator should have CE mark & should have ISO 13485-2003 &
WHO-GMP compliant certifications
030
Refrigerator 2000
Lts for kids
REFRIGERATOR: 2000 lts
Laboratory refrigerator, lockable with temperature monitoring
Page 63
Dated 05.03.2009
031
032
033
Refrigerator with
freezer 2000 Ltr
Refrigerator - 1600
Ltr
•
Capacity – 2000 l
•
Explosion – proof interior
•
Anti spark protection
•
Audio-visual alarm
•
Temperature setting range:0 to 10 º C
•
Key controlled On/Off
•
Key controlled door opening
•
Adjustable floor stand
•
Low noise, automatic defrezed, freon free
REFRIGERATOR: 2000 lts
•
Capacity – 2000 l
•
•
•
Audio-visual alarm
•
•
•
•
•
Low noise, automatic defrezed, freon free
REFRIGERATOR:1600
•
Capacity 425 liter (15 cu.ft)
•
•
•
Audio-visual alarm
•
•
•
•
•
Low noise, automatic defrosting, freon free
Refrigerator - 1200
Ltr
LABORATORY REFRIGERATOR – 1200 L
•
•
•
•
Laboratory refrigerator with 1200 l capacity
Galvanized sheet steel construction, white powder coated and adjustable feet.
Insulation of high-grade pressure – foamed material.
Lockable door with plastic magnetic sealing surround
Page 64
Dated 05.03.2009
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
034
Refrigerator Under
couch - 300 Ltr
Automatic defrosting and melt water evaporation.
Re-circulating air-cooling system.
Control panel with remote thermometer, main switch and red humidity selection.
Hermetically enclosed, low noise, vibration proof compressor.
Visual and a caustic signal alarm system.
5 shelves with support brackets.
Epoxy coated outside finish and S/S interior.
Refrigerator Under couch - 300 Ltr
Low Height Refrigerator to be kept under the nursing table / desk.
Maximum height should not be more than 2 ½ feet.
Required for storage of essential drugs, kits, reagents, etc
Front opening.
Single well insulated door
- Door bins for Extra Storage
- Convenient 2-Liter Bottle Storage in Door
- Sturdy Slide Out Adjustable Shelf
- Separate Chiller Compartment for Short Term Storage
- Space Saving Flush Back Design
- Recessed / Integrated Door Handle
- Net Capacity 4.4 cu ft
- Height – 32”
- Width – 20”
- Depth – 20”
- Carton Width – 22”
- Carton Depth – 22”
- Manual Defrost
- Power – 220 V / 50 Hz
035
Refrigerator Deep freezer (-40º
C) 200 Ltr
Plasma Deep Freezer-- -40 degC
1
Plasma Freezer should be able to maintain low temperature upto -40 deg C
2
3
Should be able to hold minimum 300 plasma bags & the Freezer should be
vertical (upright)
Should be heavy duty refrigeration system, maintenance free, with hermetically
sealed refrigeration compressors reliable refrigeration with minimal noise &
vibration
4
Should have a short cooling time of 4-5 hrs at maximum ambient temperature of 33 deg
C
5
Integrated digital temperature cum controller with inbuilt 7 days circular chart recorder
with battery back up of 3-4 hours to ensure display & recording of temperature even
during power failures
6
Should have integrated data management system with storage efficiency of
temperature records upto 1000 readings & facility to transfer data through LAN to a PC
7
Should have Large LCD display with facility to see current & last 24 hours temperature
recording , High & Low alarm points with date & time recording, Power
resumption/failure data etc.
8
Construction of double wall with efficient insulation to minimize temperature loss, inner
Page 65
Dated 05.03.2009
chamber should be made of AISI 304 grade non corrosive stainless steel & outer made
of high quality C/R sheet with minimum 1mm thickness
9
Servo controlled line voltage corrector should form part of the standard configuration
10 A line voltage corrector of appropriate rating giving all the specifications should be
supplied alongwith the unit
11
036
Should be a CE marked product & from a ISO , WHO-GMP compliant
manufacturer
Complete dental
Unit
DENTAL UNIT COMPLETE
•
Comprising:
Doctor’s element with flexible positioning easy adjusted. Supporting six different
functions for hand pieces:
Syringe, water (hot & cold )/air,(1)
•
Turbine, air driven,(1)
•
Drill, electrical with fibre optic light ,(3)
•
Electrosurgical unit, with fibre optic light,(1)
•
Ultrasonic scaler,(1)
•
UV light(1)
•
Five positions element, including syringe control, and foot control, for unit functions and
chair movements.
Assistant’s element with flexible positioning, easy adjustable.
•
Supporting five different functions:
•
Syringe,(1)
•
Curing light,(1)
•
High suction,(1)
•
Saliva injector,(1)
•
Saliva flushing device with safety valve
Cuspidor:
•
Scratch resistant bowl
•
Integrated sterilized water system, tempered, with filter
•
instrument tray support
•
Including 10 pcs, Stainless steel trays
Dental chair:
Full positioning programme from sitting to flat horizontal and Trendelenburg position. Preprogrammable positioning
Functions / Specifications:
•
•
•
•
•
Electrically adjustable, pre-programmable positioning
Backrest, seat, leg support
Foot and hand control, easy operated and easy accessible
Armrest(90˚ horizontal turnable )and head support manually or electrically adjustable
All sections upholstered and covered with material easy to clean and disinfect.
Suction Unit, for One Dental Unit:
Page 66
Dated 05.03.2009
Compact design suction unit for saliva ejectors and dental suction equipment.
Built–in noise suppressors
Negative pressure limitation
Compressor, Low Noise, for bone Dental Unit
Compressor unit for hygienic, impeccable air production for multipurpose spray and cooling
spray of the drills.
Oil free, running
Noise suppression (max. level 70 dBA), and vibration insulation
•
Air container capacity ,at least 20 L
•
Air delivery capacity, at least : 50L/min
•
Cut in pressure : 5.5 bar
•
Cut out pressure : 7.0
Chest, Instrument, Mobile:
•
Chest of drawers for dental instruments, with castors minimum four drawers.
•
Drawer fronts and chest top to be manufactured from 18mm thick plywood, laminated with
0.9mm melamine and lipped with 3mm thick PVC lipping
•
Drawers to be fitted with steel sheet sides, epoxy coated or robust plastic construction and
slide runners with nylon gliders.
•
Vertical treatment cabinet for doctor and sister.
•
To be from same source as the supplier of dental unit.
Stool, Doctor’s / Assistant’s:
•
•
•
•
•
037
DENTAL X-RAY
Working stool for doctor and assistant with backrest and footing.
Seat and backrest fully adjusted.
Upholstered seat and backrest.
Upholstery, polyurethane foam or similar, covered with plastic coated elastic fabric, anti
bacterial, flame hardened and tropical heat resistant.
Robust frame construction, non –corrosive material or treatment.
Five star base with castors.
DENTAL X-RAY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Simultaneous ignition, mAs system
Rated peak tube potential and rated tube current 70kVp 10mA
Effective focal point 0.8 x 0.8 mm
Total filtration 2.1 mm AI
Oil cooling system
S.S.D. 200 mm
Hand switch Deadman type
•
Doctor’s element with flexible positioning easy adjusted. Supporting six different
functions for hand pieces:
Syringe, water (hot & cold )/air,(1)
•
Turbine, air driven,(1)
•
Drill, electrical with fibre optic light ,(3)
•
Electrosurgical unit, with fibre optic light,(1)
•
Ultrasonic scaler,(1)
•
UV light(1)
Page 67
Dated 05.03.2009
•
•
Five positions element, including syringe control, and foot control, for unit functions and
chair movements.
Assistant’s element with flexible positioning, easy adjustable.
Supporting five different functions:
•
Syringe,(1)
•
Curing light,(1)
•
High suction,(1)
•
Saliva injector,(1)
•
Saliva flushing device with safety valve
Cuspidor:
•
Scratch resistant bowl
•
Integrated sterilized water system, tempered, with filter
•
instrument tray support
•
Including 10 pcs, Stainless steel trays
038
039
Dental x-ray film
developer
Intra oral,
Digital
Radiography/
Imaging
DENTAL AUTOMATIC FILM PROCESSOR
Fully automatic X-ray film processor with an integrated chemical replenishment system
with infrared sensors for optimal chemical conditions. Complete with daylight loader, film box
8x10 and 6x12, 240V 50Hz. Unit should be complete with stand or table for mounting the unit
and film cassette.
INTRA ORAL, DIGITAL RADIOGRAPHY/IMAGING
Unit for digital intra oral radiography.
Wall mounted or unit mounted flexible suspension.
System, easy adjustment and positioning.
Comprising
•
Tube head
•
Control unit
•
Suspension system
•
X-ray sensor, CCD
Functions / Specifications:
Tube head:
•
70 kV, multi-pulse 10 mA.
•
Focus spot: 0.8 x 0.8 mm
•
Focus-skin distance: 200 mm
•
Radiated field at end of cone: Dia = 60 mm
•
Total filter: min. 2.1 mm AL.
Control Unit:
•
Exposure release control, L (cable) min: 3 m
•
Exposure time settings, range, min: 0.05-3.2 sec.
Suspension Unit:
Page 68
Dated 05.03.2009
•
Manoeuvarability
•
Vertical min. 270 degrees
•
Horizontal 360 degrees
To be supplied with:
1 pack of sensor covers, 100 pcs.
040
Panoramic x-ray
DENTAL PANORAMIC X-RAY UNIT
Panoramic X-ray system for dental exams and temporo mandibular joint (TMJ with panoramic
program, facial bone program, maxillary sinus program, dental program, TMJ program)
The system shall comprise of:
041
Dental instrument
set
•
Vertical frame and mobile head positioner
•
One set of lanex regular intensifying screen
•
Motorized X-ray tube arm holder
•
Master control system
•
The system shall have
•
Shall display 4 TMJ views on single film
•
KV range: from 60 to 100 KVp continuously, variable.
•
•
Low radiation dose with good image quality, with computerized operator’s guide and shall be
with PC and programs.
Shall expose in either direction
•
Panoramic cassettes package of four. Fixed patient chair.
•
25 plastic bite guides
•
3 point head positioning system
•
Cephalometric attachment with b4 cassettes.
DENTAL LAB INSTRUMENTS
The laboratory of dental department should be consist the following
• Plaster specula
• Wax carvers
• Boley gauge
• Pliers (diff. size)
• Plaster forceps
• Plaster knives
• Cutter (diff. size)
• Saw frame and blade
• Rubber bowl (diff. size)
• Bunsen burner
• Vibrator
• Pneumatic curing unit
• Hydraulic press
• Porcelain furnace
• Articulators
• Flasks
• Flask press
Page 69
Dated 05.03.2009
•
Wax knives
Motor for polishing
• Polishing unit with built-in dust collections
• Low noise, vibration free motor with variable speed up to 3000 rpm
• Can be operated from two ends, with spindly on both sides.
• To be supplied with spindlers and wheel mandrel
• With integrated suction at both working ends
• Bench top model
• Working voltage 240V/50Hz.
High speed grinding machine
• High speed grinder with built-in dust collection for denture skeletons and removable cast
denture
• High speed motor up to 20,000 rpm, sturdy and vibration free, selectable speed.
• Quick tool changing facility and rapid stop facility.
• Interchangeable collets.
• Illuminated work
• Tough safety glass screen
• Bench top model
• Working voltage 240V/50Hz
Lab motors with hand pieces
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Micro-motor unit with speed controller
Bench top unit for dental lab
Micro-motor hand pieces with straight motor cord long (1.5m min.)
Foot switch control
Hand piece suspending cradle
Hand pieces holder
Hand piece heavy duty RPM 1000-35000 high torque motor
Nose cone for precision lab work
Spare carbon brushes – 3 pairs
With assorted standard bits.
Water bath-polymerization for curing
042
COMPUTERIZED
ANEASTHESIA
DOSE DELIVERY
SYSTEM FOR
DENTAL
• With electronic water temperature control continuously variable between 30 and 60º C
• Selectable heating time up to 30 minutes
• Constant pressure regulation variable up to 2.5 bar
• Automatic venting facility at the end of process
• Special curing steel vessels, with quick change facility
• With compressed air connection and safety valve
• Non corrosive parts
• Different types of curing vessels
• Bench top model
Working voltage 240V/50 hz
COMPUTERIZED ANEASTHESIA DOSE DELIVERY SYSTEM FOR DENTAL
The system should be supplied with following Items
1 Microprocessor Drive unit with aspirate and reset button
2 Power lite and cartridge volume light
3 Foot control with airhose
Page 70
Dated 05.03.2009
4 Hand piece
5 All the accessories with suitable disposable needle
043
Wall mounted
exam light
10000 lux
EXAMINATION LIGHT WALL MOUNTED
•
•
•
044
Examination lamp
wall mounted –
5000 lux
EXAMINATION LIGHT WALL MOUNTED
•
•
•
045
046
Examination lamp
mobile - 50000 lux
Sphygmomano
meter
Examination lamp, wall mounted to provide cool colour light for examination. 40 watt halogen
bulb, producing light intensity of 10,000 lux in dichroic reflector 240/50 Hz operation.
Should be extendable 80 cm from wall with 35 cm arm extension.
Light head raiser or lowers 70 cm and has 180º rotation capability.
Examination lamp, wall mounted to provide cool colour light for examination. 40 watt halogen
bulb, producing light intensity of 5,000 lux in dichroic reflector 240/50 Hz operation.
Should be extendable 80 cm from wall with 35 cm arm extension.
Light head raiser or lowers 70 cm and has 180º rotation capability.
MOBILE OPERATING LIGHT
Operating lamp, on mobile stand. 4 halogen bulbs, each of 40 Watt, producing a total
intensity of 55,000 lux of cold light.
• Color temperature 4300 k
• Height of stand 190 cm
• Horizontal turning range 360 degree
• Variable setting of lamp head: 132-265 cm
• Diameter of lamp head: 47 cm
• Mains voltage 240 V, 50 Hz
• With five high quality castors, 2 of them lockable and balance.
SPHYGMOMANOMETER - ANEROID
•
047
Electronic BP
apparatus
•
Non-Stop pin aneroid gauge
•
Adult cuff with Velcro for superior durability and appearance
•
Rubber bladder with two tubes
•
Rubber inflation bulb with air release valve and end valve
•
Equipped with adult size cuff
•
Professional accuracy ( not less than 99%)
•
5 different cuff sizes available
•
Zippered storage case included
Should be timely Calibrated and certified from appropriate authorities
traceable up to national level.
Display systolic/ diastolic BP, mean pressure, pulse rate.
Measurement Range:
- Pulse Rate : 30-240 bpm
- Pressure : 20-300 mmHg
Automatic blood pressure monitors to be accurate and simple to use.
Page 71
Dated 05.03.2009
This monitor should automatically inflates with the push of a button.
Should have Intelligent Sensing technology to automatically determine the correct amount of
pressure required to quickly and comfortably measure blood pressure reading.
The result should be accurately measurements every time. (Variation in readings should not be
more than 3 mmHg.)
Minimum 60 memory recall along with date and time to be available.
Rechargeable Batteries and AC Adapter to be included
048
049
Stethescope
Hi speed steam
Flash sterilizer
STETHESCOPE
•
Should be High quality .
•
Binaural stethoscope, double head.
•
28 inch black tubing
•
With spare hi-quality diaphragm
•
And spare comfortable ear pieces.
•
Should be excellent for low as well as high frequencies
•
Should match international standards in quality
Hi speed steam flash sterilization
Alarms for Completion of cycle, over temperature, etc.
The autoclave operates with saturated steam as the sterilizing agent with a temperature range of
105 °C (221°F) to 137 °C (279 °F) and a working pressure that meets AMSE and PED
requirements. Auto clave with single door
Speed
The system should be free standing fast. autoclave. Should come with a jacketed double walled
chamber, which acts as an instant supply of steam and keeps the autoclave warm and ready for
use. The powerful water-ring vacuum-pump provides for fast pre and post vacuum air removal
Should sterilize class B cycles - packaged, porous and hollow A loads.
Should be able to manage large loads efficiently with a powerful vacuum pump
Should be able to enhance monitoring for consistent documentation of sterilization results
Should have automatic safety shutoff to prevent overheating of chamber
Double Wall:
Surrounding the chamber there should be a second wall, the jacket. The internal steam
generator should fill the jacket with steam when the sterilizer is first started. The jacket then
should act as a steam generator and reservoir.
Should minimize the time it takes for each individual cycle to come up to temperature and
pressure
Should be built to run continuously for 24 hours
Page 72
Dated 05.03.2009
Should have excellent temperature distribution in the chamber
Should have negligible condensation and improves drying
Should have excellent chamber insulation which increases efficiency
Capacity
Should be supplied in 70 Liters .
Should have robust high-volume water-ring vacuum-pump for fast and efficient air-removal
Should have Dual-compartment water reservoirs with automatic filling and discharge:
1.Mineral-free water reservoir for steam
2.Tap water supply for the water-ring vacuum-pump
Connection to water draining and to external mineral-free water supply for automatic draining
and filling of water
Stand-by heating mode to keep the autoclave warm and ready to use
316L type stainless steel chamber and door with electro-polish finish
Control lock-out switch to prevent starting a cycle if door is not properly locked
Door protection device to prevent door from opening at high pressure and high temperature
050
Steam Sterilizer
450 Ltr, horizontal,
two door, with
gravity drying, with
all accessories
like
loading/unloading
trolleys, loading
baskets(built in
steam generator)
PRE-VACUUM STEAM STERILIZER
Specifications
•
Double door unit
•
Sliding door sterilizer
•
•
The sterilizer should have the following types of cycles:
1. 121º C pre-vacuum
2. 134º C flash
3. 134º C express
4. 134º C pre-vacuum
5. 121º C gravity
It should also include a leak test cycle and a Bowie-Dick test cycle.
•
Chamber to be fully jacketed and constructed from 316 stainless steel.
•
Chamber capacity: 450 litres approximately
•
The control to include a digital screen, printer and graphic display.
•
The digital screen to display all the cycle parameters (pressure temperature, time etc) as
well as the different phases of the cycle. All the sterilizer functions, including cycle initiation
and cycle configuration should be operated by the control board.
An internal battery back up for all cycle memory for long term storage data. If a power
failure occurs during a cycle, the battery back up system should ensure that the cycle
memory will be retained and proper cycle completion should occur when power is restored.
•
Page 73
Dated 05.03.2009
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
051
Weighing scale neonatal
NEW BORN WEIGHING SCALE
•
•
•
•
•
052
X-Ray systems –
300 mA & 500 mA
The door gaskets are actuated by pressurized air against the door providing a pressure
tight seal. Mechanical system to prevent door from closing if an object remains in the door
opening.
Vacuum system – the unit should have pressure gauges to indicate the chamber and the
jacket pressure. Drying with gravity cycle.
Built in thermocouples for validation.
Temperature sensor to be installed in the chamber drain and in the jacket for monitoring
the temperature.
Unit should be supplied with loading and unloading cars and transfer carriage.
Power: 415 Volt, 50 Hz 3 P. Ac, 36 KW
All the process walls should be SS and should work with external pneumatic air supply
Steam generator with water softener and filters- Loading/unloading trolleys, loading
baskets to be supplied.
On site training for users.
Full set of operator manuals and technical manuals including all electrical and electronic
drawings to be supplied.
To be supplied with consumables and standard set of spare parts.
4th to 7th year comprehensive maintenance rates.
Portable and easily weighing scale with automatic hold feature locks the infant’s weight into
the digital display and remains even after child is removed. Power 240V 50Hz.
Accuracy 1%
Should be able to take unbalanced load.
Should compensate for child movement
Should have soft and comfortable base for child to lay down.
Digital radiography/fluoroscopy system 300 mA and 500mA
(1) X RAY UNIT - 300mA – 1 No.
A.
Generator:
1.
Generator should be high frequency/inverter type for constant output.
2.
Output 30 KW or more.
3.
KV range 40 KV – 110 KV.
4.
Output at 80 KV should be 300 mA or more.
5.
It should have automatic exposure control device.
6.
It should have digital display of KV & mAs.
7.
Anatomical programming radiography should be possible.
8.
It should have over loading protection.
B.
X – Ray Tube and Collimator:
1.
The x-ray tube should be rotating anode high speed, compatible with the generator and
must have dual focus. Focal spots of following sizes:
Large Focus:
2.0 mm or less.
Small Focus:
1.0 mm or less .
Tube with anode heat storage capacity 150 KHU or more.
2.
Motorized collimator having additional filters ( for Dose Reduction) and auto shut
provision for the light.
D.
X – Ray Table:
1.
Horizontal table with floating table top.
2.
It should have transverse + 10 cm or more and longitudinal movements + 35 cm or more
with electromagnetic brakes.
3.
It should be thin table top.
4.
It should be provided with bucky which can hold all standard sizes of cassettes upto
Page 74
Dated 05.03.2009
14”x17”.
5.
Bucky should have a grid ratio 10:1 or more with 65 lines per cm.
F.
Essential Accessories: The following essential accessories to be provided with the unit.
1.
Voltage stabilizer of required capacity, the capacity and make of the voltage stabilizer
should be specified.
H.
Warranty:
Warranty of all parts as well as accessories and auxiliary units supplied with the main
equipment including x – ray tube.
(2) RADIOGRAPHY UNIT- 500mA – 1 No.
A.
Generator:
1.
Generator should be high frequency/inverter type for constant output.
2.
Output 50 KW or more.
3.
KV range 40 KV – 120 KV.
4.
Output at 100 KV should be 500 mA or more.
5.
It should have automatic exposure control device.
6.
It should have digital display of KV & mAs.
7.
Anatomical programming radiography should be possible.
8.
It should have over loading protection.
B.
X – Ray Tube and Collimator:
1.
The x-ray tube should be rotating anode high speed, compatible with the generator and
must have dual focus. Focal spots of following sizes:
Large Focus:
1.2/2.0 mm or better.
Small Focus:
0.6/1.0 mm or better.
Tube with anode heat storage capacity 150 KHU or more.
2.
Motorized collimator having additional filters (for Dose Reduction) and auto shut
provision for the light.
D.
X – Ray Table:
1.
Horizontal table with floating table top.
2.
It should have transverse + 10 cm or more and longitudinal movements + 35 cm or more
with electromagnetic brakes.
3.
It should be thin table top.
4.
It should be provided with bucky which can hold all standard sizes of cassettes upto
14”x17”.
5.
Bucky should have a grid ratio 10:1 or more with 65 lines per cm.
E.
Vertical Bucky Stand:
1.
It should have provision to do chest radiography without grid.
F.
Essential Accessories: The following essential accessories to be provided with the unit.
1.
Voltage stabilizer of required capacity, the capacity and make of the voltage stabilizer
should be specified.
2.
Lateral cassette holder – One.
Should be supplied with following:
•
Dark room light
•
Lead Glass --- 2 Nos.
•
One set of all dark room accessories
•
•
•
Whole body (upper and lower) Lead Apron (standard make) – 8 Nos.
Lead Screen – 2 Nos.
Lead lining for walls and doors
Page 75
Dated 05.03.2009
•
Contrast injector
•
APRON & GLOVE HANGER
Heavy duty multiple glove and apron hanger wall or floor mounted. Stainless steel construction.
Holds two pairs of gloves and two lead aprons. Dimensions: 76 x 46 x 25 cm approximately.
•
053
CR Reader &
monitor
All necessary AERB / BARC approvals.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS STATE OF THE ART LATEST GENERATION COMPUTED
RADIOGRAPHY
Specifications for State of the art Latest Generation Computed Radiography (CR) system for
high resolution Digital radiography
Features Remarks
Technical Requirements - CR system configuration shall include:
a) Imaging plates (IP)
b) Image reader system
c) CR workstations
d) RIS interface
e) Remote ID and Preview stations
f) Accessories and consumables
g) Laser Imager
CR Compatible imaging plates
Following sizes are required a) deleted
b) 35 cm x 35 cm - 1 2Nos.
c) 24 cm x 30 cm - 12 Nos.
d) 18 cm x 24 cm - 12 Nos.
e) 15 cm x 30 cm - --6 nos
Image reader shall meet the Functional requirements :
a) Various image-processing protocols available for the respective regions of the body
b) IP processing rate should be about 90 plates/hour
c) Mechanism for accepting exposed Imaging Plates with out patient demographics, for Causality
/Trauma workflow requirement
d) Mechanism for Re-routing the newly acquired Images to the preconfigured CR workstation
e) Capability of retrieving (Service Intervention) at least last 10 scanned images, as part of
contingency plan.
f) Capability for quick check of the image and exam data of at least the last 4 Imaging Plates
scanned at the x- ray room
g) Protocol for verifying the connectivity status of configured image destinations
h) Spatial resolution of the digital image shall preferably be 2kx2kx16 bits for optimal resolution.
Identification and Preview
System Functional requirements:
a) Capability of interfacing to HL7, Non-HL7, Proprietary, DICOM Work list or user defined
Windows/DOS /Linux based interface protocols to HIS/RIS.
b) Please specify whether you have tested interfacing with HL7-DICOM Bridge.
c) Mechanism for retrieving Demographics of at least last 10 patients identified on a particular
Identification Terminal.
d) Customizable Graphic User Interface (GUI) in Identification station with facility of selecting
DICOM print & Storage destination.
e) Indication of Over Exposure on the preview module.
f) Mechanism for User release from Preview terminal in case of Auto-routing Images to Predefined DICOM Destinations.
g) Customizable Graphic User Interface (GUI) for Preview terminal.
Page 76
Dated 05.03.2009
h) Solution for storing patient demographic data for multiple exams in RIS/non RIS environment.
i) It should be possible to put a custom configurable data field in the demographic information of
the patient linked with the image.
Software
System should include the following Software applications:
Please list all the optional software(s) which are available with you for enhancing the workflow
and service in the Digital Radiology environment for the following
1. Advanced Processing Software
2. Application Software
3. Connecting Software
4. Visual Output Software
5. Quality Monitoring Software
The system should include the following SW applications as standard:
Full Leg/Full spine image processing.
Quality control software.
Software, which enables to see in the preview terminal the deviation from normal exposure and
with the details of the deviation on the CR workstation.
Software masking of the collimation areas.
Special attention should be placed on pediatric applications.
Software for storing images on any DICOM 3 (or newer versions) compliant stations.
Software for printing on any DICOM printer.
CR Workstation
System configuration requirements:
a) Accept images from CR Reader without any loss of data
b) Capable of Archiving & Printing selected image to a standard DICOM destination in DICOM
3.0 Format.
c) Storing images in the local disk for pre-defined period.
d) Mechanism for accepting New images when the local disk is full
e) Should include 21” antiglare flicker free TFT/LCD color monitor (1.2K X 0.78K resolution)
f) Should include 21” Monochrome antiglare flicker free Medical Grade TFT/LCD monitor with at
least 2k X 2k resolution.
g) CD/DVD Burner
h) 240 GB or more on board storage
System Functional requirements:
a) Support DICOM Work list or user defined Windows/Dos based interface to HIS/RIS
b) Mechanism for retrieving Demographics of atleast last 10 patient identified on that Terminal.
c) Customizable Graphic User Interface with facility of selecting DICOM print & storage
destination.
d) Indication of Over Exposure on the preview module.
e) Mechanism for User release in case of Auto-routing Images to Pre-defined DICOM
Destinations.
Functional requirement for CR workstation:
a) Built in routine for using predefined image processing parameters for image quality
enhancement.
b) Mechanism for storing the Patient image based on name, date, exam, etc.
c) Capability of storing user defined image processing parameters.
d) Capability of overwriting predefined image parameter with user-defined parameters & storing
these two images separately.
e) Correcting typographically in Patient Demographic module, in case the RIS connection was
down and manually data entry was done.
f) Capability of changing W/l, Flipping, Rotating, Zooming, Collimating Annotating incoming
image.
g) Auto-routing incoming image to predefined DICOM Store (SCP storage) or Print Destination
Page 77
Dated 05.03.2009
(SCP Print Destination)
h) Mechanism for printing Multiple Images in one film, with the possibility of slide and True Size
printing
i) Compatible DVD Writer along with relevant software to be quoted separately.
Laser Imager System Configuration requirements:
Print Images from CR Workstation
a) Capable of Printing Images in DICOM 3.0 format
b) Mechanism to print images 14x 17,11X14, 8 x 10 film sizes simultaneously.
c) Resolution should be 600 dpi or more
d) Capable of handling mammography plates.
Functional requirement for Laser Imager:
a) Capable of Printing images in High quality
b) Mechanism for printing images in 14 x 17,11X14 and 8 x 10 film sizes simultaneously.
c) Mechanism for Printing Multiple Images in one film, with the possibility of slide printing.
Provision for Distributed CR System should be present. Please quote separately for additional
workstation image reader preview stations and image planes.
Warranty/AMC: As per the Tender Document
Please list all the Optional software’s, which are available with you for enhancing the workflow
and services in the Digital Radiology environment.
Quote separately for additional laser imagers.
The CR plates should be usable on the regular x-ray machines of 300mA and 500mA .
Review station at key areas – qty 12 nos. ( in OPD,OR, DOCTOR’S room etc.)
(Quote unit cost of review stations.)
PC based DVD reader image manipulating software and high definition monitor (1.2K
×0.78K) (approx).
054
055
056
Dry film printer
(laser printer)
PRINTER OPTION
X-ray processor Automatic, Dark
room Light shields,
exhaust
STAND ALONE DRY FILM PROCESSOR
C-arm with DSA
system
MOBILE C-ARM IMAGE INTENSIFIER WITH DSA
1. Generator
Microprocessor controlled High Frequency generator with 2.5Kw or More with integrated beam
filters to reduce patient skin radiation dose
2. Collimator: IRIS or multileaf
3. X Ray mode (kV & mA range):
KV- range 40- 110KV
Fluoroscopya) Fluoroscopy should not exceed 5 mA .
b) Pulsed Fluoroscopy with last Image Hold
Radiography –
Radiographic mode for cassette exposures: minimum of 20mA
•
•
Laser printer-dry laser printer to print dry film of high quality. Inter faced with reader. Printer
should have at least three DICOM compatible inputs.
90 second process cycle, monitoring all processing functions, audible alarm and error
message display, automatic stand by and automatic dry processor with automatically light
feed loader. Micro processor controller precise temperature and built-in stand by control.
Film sizes max.43 cm of any length min 10x10 cm. Unit complete with all accessories and
laser camera interface.
Page 78
Dated 05.03.2009
4. Image Intensifier:
9”or More Triple Mode Image Intensifier with CCD Camera
5. Image Processing:
a) Minimum 12 bit Digital Fluoroscopy Imaging Unit
with dedicated video pipe-line processor
b) Archival memory CD/DVD mode.
c) Detachable Cassette holder for film recording.
6. Image Display:
Two 18” TFT/ LCD High resolution, high contrast and flicker free Monochrome Monitors of at
least 1024 X 1024 matrix with automatic adaptation of monitor brightness to ambient light
7. System Functionality:
Vertical ,Horizontal and Orbital Travel should be available
C arm rotation 130 degree or more
8. The system should perform DSA with acquisition of 6 frames per second or more, real time
and peak hold , road mapping, annotation, re-masking and multi image display.
9. The System should be DICOM ready
10. Accessories:
a)Wrap around light weight vinyl Lead Aprons with 0.5 mm lead equivalence certified by BARC
or AERB or ISO : 2 (Two Nos.)
057
058
Portable x-ray unit
30 kW
Portable
Ultrasound B&W
MOBILE X-RAY MACHINE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Mobile X-ray machine for routine X-rays in the wards.
General purpose, user-friendly-ray unit.
Easy maneuverability with buffered wheels.
Hand brake, for parking, emergency and moving on ramps.
Microprocessor controlled with digital display.
Counter balanced dual –arm system with turn –plate.
Cassette storage cabinet (for at least 8 cassettes) on the machine.
Conforming to internationally accepted safety standards . Power 30 kW
KVp Range
: 40 to 130 kV(or more) in 25 or more steps.
MAs range
:0.5 to 200 mAs in 50 (or more) steps.
Shortest exposure time
: 1 msec or less.
Maximum exposure time
: 1.3 sec or more programs can be stored.
Rotating anode tube, focal spot 1.2 x 1.2 mm
Integrated manually adjustable multi –leaf collimator, motorized
Collimator lamp
: Halogen.
Total inherent filtration
: min .3.8 mm Al.
Concealed cables.
Power cord
: 8 mts Length or more.
Exposure release : detachable, remote control with 5 mt. Coiled cord.
Durable, Rugged cover for the entire machine.
Operation and service manual(2 sets each )
Connectability to any standard electrical outlet, 15 A/20 A
220-240 volts and 50Hz. Operations, Built in regulator
PORTABLE ULTRASOUND MACHINE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Portable ultrasound machine with biopsy attachment.
Scanning mode: Linear and convex
Display mode: B mode, M mode, B+M and M+M
Monitor screen should be 10” high resolution latest technology
Display depth:25 cm max
Magnification: 8 steps
Facility for image zoom, image reverse, image freeze and image magnification, reduction
Page 79
Dated 05.03.2009
•
•
059
General purpose
Ultrasound
Diagnostic system
Alphanumeric keyboard for character entry and character display
Gynecology measurement facility for uterus, cervix, special probe for gynecology to be
provided 3.5MHz linear probe, 3.5MHz convex probe, Ultrasound gel, biopsy attachment
and black and white video printer with at least 10 No. rolls, mobile stand.
ULTRASOUND UNIT
GENERAL PURPOSE DIAGNOSIS
ULTRA SOUND SCANNER
The Following requirements must be met:
- scanner meant for radiology applications. This should be capable of performing state-ofthe-art imaging primarily for abdominal applicators, but for also OB GYN, Thyroid,
Testicles, Breast, carotid and othr peripheral vascular applications.
- Image modes 2D (sector and Linear array)
- Doppler colour flow maping.
- Transducers number of transducer elements (64-128) Number of measurement
channels (64-128) phased and linear array transducers for 2D; 2D Doppler. Following is
the minimum requirement for transducers. General purpose transducer 5 MHZ general
purpose sector transducer & 3.5 MHZ linear array transducer. One or two transducers
(5-7.5 MHZ) for small parts and vascular imaging- cw Doppler Probe.
- Trans vaginal imaging probe
- Trans rectal probe
- Imaging system;
Scan converter with 512 x 512 x 6 to 8 bit image memory. Pre and post processing
capabilities. Controls for time gain compensation. (TGC) variable power , Dynamic range
and overall gain controls.
Adjustable transmit zone (specify transducers with this facility). Dynamic receive focus
(specify transducers with this facility). Maximum display depth 24 cms.
- Alpha numeric Keyboard.
- Digital calipers for linear, circumference and area measurements. Annotation
capabilities.
- Obstertric calculation package gestational age programs.
- Pan Zoom features for real time and frozen images. (specify magnification)
- Cardiac imaging option.
- PW Doppler analysis for carotid and peripheral vascular application.
- Variable sample volume and variable or selectable wall filters for Doppler. Velocity
versus time display with angle correction as well as frequency versus time displaysimultaneous 2D-Doppler.
- Imaging sector angle (45-90 degree)
- Monitor (single-dual) 12” (mini) patient Data Mode selector display.
- Image display (dual/quad).
- Audio for Doppler – with head set.
- General purpose biopsy guide with associated software for visual guidance.
- Small parts biopsy guide.
- Fetal M Mode studies.
- Simultaneous M-mode 2D.
- Continuous cine Loop.
- Colour Flow maping
- User Programmable protocols.(specify)
- Archiving facility for 1000 frames programme leading through floppy computer with
keyboard.
- Hard copy facility.
- B&W printer with roll DVD. Record with 100 DVD’s.
- Replay frame grabber and analysis options.
- Service documentation 2 sets.
- Essential set of consumables and accessories.
Page 80
Dated 05.03.2009
060
Portable
Ultrasound with
colour doppler
DICO M 3 prepared.
STATE OF THE ART LATEST GENERATION PORTABLE COLOUR DOPPLER SYSTEM
System should be latest generation state of the art portable color Doppler for
Abdominal, Vascular, Obstetrics & Gynecology, Musculoskeletal, small parts
application etc., with suitable evaluation and measurement packages
Features Remarks
1. System should be offered with following Broad Band width Transducers:
(i) Convex Array Transducer ( frequency range of 2 to 4 MHz ) (+/- 1 MHz)
(ii) Linear Array Transducer ( frequency range of 4 to 10 MHz ) (+/- 1 MHz)
(iii) Broad band micro convex transducer (frequency range between 4 to 10 MHz)
(+/- 1 MHz)
(iv) Intracavitary Transducer ( frequency range between 4 to 10 MHz ) (+/-1 MHz)
2. System should have following modes:
2 D, M Mode, Pulsed Wave, Continuous Wave, Color Flow Imaging & Color Power Angio
Imaging,
Tissue Harmonic Imaging should be available atleast in one transducer.
3. Digital Processing Channels – 60 or more digital channels for high resolution imaging with
acquisition rate of at least 50 frames per second
4. Grey scale (min. 256 or more)
5. Broad Bandwidth Beam former technology transducers for extreme high resolution 2D Imaging
6. Extended Field of View Imaging
7. System should have facility for gain adjustments using slide pot controls.
8. Should have minimum 2 active ports with direct switching from console
9. System should have a High resolution Fully Articulating Non Interlaced flicker free, antiglare,
Flat Panel Display of 10 inches or more.
10. System should have Image Management facility with facility for direct storage of Images and
loops in the Hard Disk Drive and also thumbnail review to view & edit Images, loops and also
reports
11. Display Annotation, Patient id display and alpha numeric key board with track ball & provision
for reverse, invert facility
12. Complete package for measurement and calculation provision for distance, area, volume &
Circumference etc.
13. Weight of the equipment should not be more than 5 to 7 kg.
14. Image Storage:
Should have inbuilt hard disk for image storage. Specify image storage capacity
15. Image Archival:
Inbuilt CD writer/ Flash drive with the facility to transfer images
16. DICOM Compatible
17. System should have direct connectivity to Color laser printer for printing images & report
18. System should have extensive Calculation software package for General Imaging, Ob/Gyn &
Vascular Imaging
19. Accessories:
1. B/w Thermal Printer of latest model (with CE or FDA mark)
2. Color laser Printer for direct printing of Images from the system (with CE or
FDA mark) (min dpi of 1200)
3. Biopsy attachment for the Convex, Linear & the TV/TR probes
4. UPS of appropriate rating with 60 mins back up; additional to in-built battery back-up of at
least 30 min.
5. 20 Free software upgrade(s) during the period of warranty/AMC.
061
Air warmer –
(Patient warmer)
Should be suitable for Adult as well as peadiatric use.
Should have upper and lower temp. setting and should automatically cut off.
Page 81
Dated 05.03.2009
Temp. accuracy to be 99%.
Should be noise less ( not more than 35 dBA)
Should be well electrically insulated.
062
Baby warmer
Should not cause EMI interference to other medical equipments.
Infant warmer
Infant warmer to be used in neonatology.
The unit should conform all relevant international, national and local standards.
Specifications
Temperature control:
• Range
30-38° C
• Skin range 25 – 42 °
• Increment 0.1°
• Display
Digital
Control Unit (to be supplied with.)
• Automatic heat control type
• Set point mechanism
• Heater Indicator.
Alarms (Audible and Visual)
• High air temperature
• Sensor disconnect
• Power Failure
Alarm in manual mode: every 15 minutes with automatic shutoff
The warmer should includes:
• Self- check features
• Breaks for casters
• Skin sensor
• Supplemental humidity
• Protection against breaks and bursts of radiant and light source
• Spares and accessories
• Service and users manuals
Accessories:
• No. of hand ports
6
• No. of tubing ports
6
• No. of oxygen inlet port 1
• Backup thermostat
Examination Light 50 W Halogen
Radiant heat source Quartz tube 600w
Options
• Phototherapy lights
• Resuscitation equipment packages
• X-Ray cassette holder
063
Baby bassinet
BABY BASSINET
•
•
•
•
Standard bassinet for birthing suit room with fixed height stand including monitor shelf. Micro
processor based control system examination light and examination bulb life 3000 hours
heater: output 440 watts.
Parabolic reflector, wormer module temperature saving system: Skin probe range: 34ºC to
38ºC, audible and visual alarms. Dimension: 185HX71WX50D cm (approx.)
Bed dimension
:
48cm x 66 cm (approx.)
Possibility of tilting
:
Trendelburg
Page 82
Dated 05.03.2009
•
064
Infant resuscitator
Power
:
240 Vac/50Hz
Infant resuscitator
Manometer Range: 20 to 80 cm H2O (-20 to 7.8 kPa)
Maximum Pressure relief should be 5 to 70 cm h2O at 8 LPM
Peak inspiratory Pressure (PIP) should be 5 to 70 cm H2O at 8 LPM
Positive-end expiratory pressure PEEP) should be 1 to 9 cm H2O at 8 LPM.
Gas inlet flow range:5 LPM (min) to 15 LPM (max) If the gas inlet flow rate increases from 5 to 15 LPM, the peak
inspiratory pressure typically increases approximately 8cm H2O (0.8 kPa).
Delivered oxygen Concentration: - Up to 100% depending on gas supply
Operating time (400 L cylinder):- @ 8 LPM
50 minutes
Recommended body weight: -
065
Patient monitor with neonatal
accesories
Should be supplied with all related tubing’s and consumable (Preferable reusable) for at least
50 cases (application)
ICU NEONATAL MONITOR
•
•
•
•
•
066
Ventillator - Critical
care
Up to 10 kg (22 lb)
ICU Neonatal colour monitor for date processing and collection include the following:
Heart rate, respiratory rate, temperature, ECG, invasive B.P, Non invasive B.P, SiO2,
ETCO2, PCO2, screen display, peep volume control, audible and visual alarms
Power requirement: 240 VAC/50Hz
With complete set of accessories, probes, transducers, pressure, transducers. Essential
disposables item required.
Unit should be compatible with data management system.
VENTILATOR
Microprocessor controlled Ventilator with invasive & non-Invasive ventilation in both
pressure and volume based modes.
Should be expandable and up gradable.
Should have the both pressure & flow trigger sensitivity.
Minimum of following Modes of ventilation should be present: • CAMV – controlled Assisted mechanical ventilation
• SIMV – with pressure and volume support mode (VS)
• Pressure controlled ventilation
• Tube compensation
• PRVC
• BIPAP/Bi-level or equivalent with pressure support
• CPAP
• Optional:- PAV+ (Proportional Assist Ventilation) or equivalent mode
Should have following Parameters: Tidal volume: 5 to 2000 ml
• Frequency: 2 to 150 b/m
• I:E Ratio : 1:299 to 4:1
• Pressure support: 0 to 70 cmH2O
• Inspiratory time 0.2 – 8 sec.
• Inspiratory flow: 3-150 L/min.
• Inspiratory pressure : 5-90 cmH2O
• Exhalation Sensitivity: 1-80% of Spont. Peak Flow
• Oxygen cone. :- 21 to 100%
Page 83
Dated 05.03.2009
• PEEP / CPAP : 0-45cmH2O
Following parameters should be monitored:a) Volume: Exp. Tidal volume & M.V
b) Tinsp.
c) Frequency
d) FiO2
e) Pressure: peak, plateau, peep, mean
f) Resistance and compliance
g) Ti/ Total & RSBI, P0.1 and Vital capacity
Should have user programmable Apnea back-up & should have detection of severe
patient occlusion to protect patient against excessive airway pressure, terminate
normal ventilation and allow patient to exhale through inspiratory limb by opening
safety valve.
Should have at least 10” size integrated colored touch screen.
Should display: a) Wave forms: P x t, f x t, v x t
b) Loops: p x v, f x v
c) Should have different color for different breath
Alarms: - Audio visual Alarms for low air pressure, low oxygen pressure, low and high
inspiratory pressure, low and high rate, leak rate, disconnection, apnea alarm time 15-60
sec, low battery etc.
Should have reusable auto cleavable heated bacterial filter exhalation isolation system
Inbuilt Battery back up for ventilator for at least 30 min.
Essential Accessories:A) Reusable auto cleavable heated bacterial filter/cassette exhalation isolation
system- 10no.
B) Humidifier- Heated temperature controlled, preferably temperature monitored
with alarms- 1 no.
C) Reusable humidifier chamber- 05no
D) Heater wires – 05no.
E) Heater wire adapter- 05no.
F) Flow sensor with flow sensor cables- 10no.
G) Reusable Breathing Circuits adult = 05no.
H) Reusable breathing Circuits pediatrics = 05no.
I) Reusable breathing circuits neonatal = 05no.
J) NebulizerUltrasonic nebulizer with pore size up to 2 micro meters to deliver
medicament. It should not affect
Ventilator parameter delivered to pt. When in use & it has both timed and Continuous
nebulisation mode.
K) Compressor –
a. Should be integrated with the ventilator
b. Should be oil free, medicalgrade and silent (less then 60db at 1/meter)
and flow upto 160LPM.
c. Should have high temperature and low-pressure alarms.
d. Compatible to be connected to compressed air from hospital central gas
supply.
L) Trolley
Page 84
Dated 05.03.2009
It should conform to international standards eg. CE/ANZ/FDA/IFC approved.
067
ENT
MICRODRILLING
SYSTEM
ENT MICRODRILLING SYSTEM
Specification :
1. High speed of 40000 rpm
2. Dual speed control from control box as well as food pedal.
3. Both modes forward and reverse cutting.
4. Inbuilt pump for Irrigation.
MICROMOTOR HAND PIECES
Specification :
1. rated for minium 40000 rpm.
2. Ball bearing type so as to generate minium heat & vibration.
3. With attached Irrigation pipes.
4. Standard Coupling for Micromotor.
5. Straight hand pieces-2 nos.
6. Contra angled hand pieces –2 nos.
BURRS
Specification:
1. Stainless Steel burrs cutting set of 12 varying from 0.7mm to 7mm standard length of
70mm, round.
2. Diamond burrs complete set of six varying from 2.3mm to 7mm length 70mm, round.
3. Oil Spray for Hand pieces with Nozzle
068
ENT Operating
Microscope
ENT OPERATING MICROSCOPE
ENT OPERATING MICROSCOPE
1. Microscope provided with co-axial, fiber optic illumination by a cold light source having a
xenon lamp
2 Three objective lenses having focal length of 200mm, 300mm, 400mm or variable objective
3 Binocular, Inclinable viewing tube, 0-180 or more.
4 Wide Field, high eye point eyepiece with integrated eyecup having a magnification of
10X.
5 Five step manually adjustable magnification changer
6 Manual fine focussing device.
7 Knob for manually adjustable interpupillary distance.
8 Should have built in IR and UV filter.
9 Mounted on a mobile floor stand with locking facility, having a minimum height of 1.25mm.
10 Adjustable friction of all joints.
11 Microscope should be movable on an inclined coupling for positioning in lateral direction.
12 The maximum stretching length of the horizontal arm to be not less than 1000mm.
13 The swivel angle of the carrier arm not less than 300 degrees.
14 The microscope should have six movements of degree of freedom allowing it to be moved to
and fro, up and down and from side to side.
15 Back up lamp
16 Working on mains power supply of 220V.
17 Accessories:
a. Beam spliter, C - mount
b.Binocular co - observation tube.
Page 85
Dated 05.03.2009
069
ENT MICRO
DEBRIDER FOR
FESS
(IMPORTED)
c. Handle for repositioning of microscope.
d.Sterlizable rubber caps for control knobs
ENT MICRO DEBRIDER FOR FESS (IMPORTED)
System Consisting of:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Control Console
Foot Switch
Micro Debrider Hand Piece
Cutter 4.0mm
Cutter 3.5mm
Cutter 3.0mm
Cutter Angled 3.5mm
Control Console should have touch screen functions.
Should have capability to adapt two handpieces simultaneously.
Should have digital display for actual and preset speed.
Should be software upgradeable.
Should have in built irrigation facility.
Footswitch should be five pedal
Footswitch should be water resistant..
Footswitch should be programmable.
Hand piece should be light weight
Hand piece should have RPM of 12000
Hand piece should have irrigation / suction control.
Cutters should have irrigation facility.
070
Audiometer
AUDIOMETER
Two channel audiometer for clinical use interface with sound proof room with complete
accessories to insure complete functionally
Specifications:
• Input: Tone, microphone 1&2 Tape/CD 1&2, NB, WN, SN
•
•
Output: Left, right, bone, L&R, free-field, insert phones, High frequency phones
Frequency range
• Air conduction
:
125 to 12000 Hz
•
High frequency
:
8000 to 20000 Hz
•
Bone conduction
:
250 to 8000 Hz
•
Sound field
:
250 to 12000 Hz
•
Insert
:
125 to 6000 Hz
•
:
Two independent U-V meters one for Ch. 1 and 1 for Ch.2
•
U-V meter
speech
Microphone :
•
Speech score counter
For live voice testing and communication
• External A and external B: To accept recorded speech material from external
stereo tap cassette or CD player
•
Talk forward, talk back and monitoring facilities
Page 86
Dated 05.03.2009
071
Tympanometer
•
Signal format
•
Steady
:
Tone continuously present.
•
Pulsed
:
Tone pulsed 200 mses ON, 200 msec OFF
•
FM
:
Tone modulated +/- 5% of center frequency at
rate of 5Hz
•
With signal processing software and patient management software to be supplied with PC
and manual
•
All accessories for all above facilities to be included.
Airbone Or Tree Field
Pure, Pulsed Or Warble Tones
Frequency : 125 Hz 20 Khz
Bone Frequency : 250 Hz To 8 Khz
Attenuation : 1dB Step Resolution
To be able to Procees All Type Of Test Including S.I.S.I. Ablb , Stenger, Rainville, Dli, Auto
Thresh Hold, Tone Decay, Mcl/Ucl, Dlf, Mlb
Built In Thermal Printer .
Should be regularly calibrated in warranty and contract period as per manufacturer’s
recommendations. ( pl mention the frequency of calibrations as mentioned in operation or service
manual)
TYMPANOMETER
Tympanometer, clinical tests to be performed:
• Tympanogram
• Stepedial reflexes contra and IPSI
• Reflex decay
• Reflex lantency
• E.T function with perforation without perforation
Specification
• Probe tones
• 266 Hz (85dB SPL +/- 1.5 dB)
• 678 Hz (85dB SPL +/- 3.0 dB)
• 1000 Hz (75dB SPL +/- 3.0 dB)
• Accuracy: +/- 1 %
Pressure measurements:
• Range: +200 to -600 daPa
• Accuracy: +/- 1 %
• Sweep rate: 12.5, 50.0, 200 daPa/sec
• Sweep accuracy: 10% of nominal rate
• Maximum limits (in 5 cc cavity): -800 daPa and +600 daPa
• LPSI and control
Reflex measurements
•
Stimuli: 250, 500, 1k, 2k, 4k, BBn, LBN, HBN, click external input
•
Frequency accuracy: +/- 3%
•
Harmonic distortion: Less than 5%
•
Intensity range: 35 to 120 dB HL in 5 dB steps
•
Calibration accuracy: +/- 3 dB
Page 87
Dated 05.03.2009
•
Step accuracy: +/- 5 dB
•
Computer interface
•
Built-in display and printer
•
•
To be including: Probe assembling, ear tips, printer paper, calibration kit and cleaning kit
All accessories to carry out above tests to be included.
072
OAE Tester –
Hearing screener
Specification for baby screener and ABR
Baby screener for measurement of OAE by DPOAE and / or TEOAE tests , hand held,
lightweight, fast automatic tests print out, with measuring probe, screening software carrying
case.
Screener should be integrated with evoked otoacoustic emissions (OAE) and brain Stem
Responses (ABR) into a single, portable screening device, battery operated, self- contained with
diagnostic features, to test new borns, children, adults, the elderly and all difficult- to- test
patients, storage memory.
The above system should be supplied with all standard accessories including:
- Probe
- Adapter
- Power cord
- Electrodes 2 each
- Disposable Electrodes – minimum 4 Pkts.
- Printer with cartridges.
- Infant Ear Tip Kit-5 sizes
- Universal Ear Tips-100
- Child Ear Tip Kit
- Adult Ear Tip Kit
- Comfort cops
- Probe cleaning kit
- Labels, video and software on database.
- Carrying case
- Operating and service manuals.
073
ENT Examination
unit complete
including cabinets,
with treatment
couch etc (with
compressed air &
vac)
ENT EXAMINATION UNIT
ENT examination unit, comprising of:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hose connection for irrigation of maxillary duct, lure core.
Splash protector Plexiglas
Water warmer, 37 deg with electric temperature contril.
Compressed air device, complete with 2 medicament sprays, one powder blower, apolitzer
adapter and spray holder
Jet connetion for water irrigation handle, short, medium, and angles.
Connection box for automatic switching ON/OFF water supply by master switch.
Mains supply unit, with connection box, and installation kit.
Head light with exit source light.
Cotton swabs dispenser.
Tongue patches dispenser.
Holder for ear funnels
Water filter, complete for warm water equipment.
Cold light source, with additional rear light outlet, for operating microscope.
Operating microscope mounted on unit, with double pantograph arm, straight binocular
head.
Endoscope holder and warmer.
Air flow for cold light, to prevent misting
Mirror pre warmer.
Page 88
Dated 05.03.2009
Instrument cabinet all steel casing comprising of:
• Suturing complete set
• 4 large instrument trays
• Aluminium trays
• Shallow drawer
• Deep drawer
• Used instrument deposit
Swivel chair adjustable high with back rest
Should be supplied complete with treatment couch and compressed air & vac.
074
075
Schiotz Applanation
Tonometer-1
Refractometer /
Keratometer on
stand
APPLANATION TONOMETER
•
Schiotz Type
•
With accessories
•
Carrying box
AUTO – KERATO REFRACTOMETER
(composite unit)
Objective Refrectometer mode
Sphere
- 25 + 22 D in 0.25 D step (0.12 D step available)
Cylinder
0 to ± 8 D in step 0.25 D (0.12 D step available)
Axis
1 to 180 in 1 and 5 step
Minimum pupil diameter
2.0 mm
Method of relaxation
Automatic fogging
Chart for objective testing
Scenic picture
Cornial curvature mode
Cornial curvature radius
0.01 mm
Refrection index
1.3375
Corneal refrection
67.5 D – 33.75 D
Corneal astigmation
0.12/0.25D
Corneal astigmation axial angle 1 – 180
Measuring area
3 mm with 7.7 mm radius
Measuring step
Corneal curvature radius
0.01 mm
Cornial refrection
0.12/0.25 D
Corneal astigmation
0.12/0.25 D
Corneal axis angel
1/5
Others
PD measurement
85 mm maxi in 1 mm step
Measuring start
Auto start and manual
Corneal diameter measurement Yes
Pupil diameter
Range 2 – 13 mm/step 0.25 mm
Measurement display
TV monitor screen
Measurement recording
Built in printer (upto 10 measurements each eye can be
Alignment
Screen Display
Vertex distance
0, 12.0 & 13.75 mm (selective)
Energy saving
Automatic switch off when left unused after 10 min
IOL
Special IOL switch to adjust to circumstances of IOL
Power supply
100, 120, 220, 240 V
Page 89
Dated 05.03.2009
Power supply
Output
100, 120, 220, 240 V
RS – 232 C
The following requirements must be met.
Refractive Power :- -18D to + 18 D (sph.)
- 8D to + 8 D (cyl)
Keratometery Power : K1, K2: 5.5 to 10 mm
Cyl: -10D to + 10D
Ax: 0 to 180 Degree
Minimum Pupil Diameter : 2.9 mm
Printed Data : Refractive power
Corneal curvature
I.P.D
C.L.Data
Motorized instrument stand
Practice eye
Contact lens holder.
076
Ophthalmic
Ultrasound (A and
B)
A/B SCAN (OPTHALMIC ULTRASOUND)
The following requirements must be met
•
High resolution dedicated A and B, ophthalmic Scanning unit Bscan will cross vector.
•
The system should consist of fourth generation microcomputer and high speed digital
electronics, with highest resolution monitor.
Technical Features:
•
A-scan
•
Three A scan Modes
•
Auto biometric, Manual Biometric, Diagnostic
•
Complete IOL program capabilities include SRK1 SRK11 SRK. T Hollady or Binkhorest
formulas.
•
Save in memory capacity at least 45 cases for A-scan images and corresponding IOL data.
•
10MHZ solid probe
•
The unit should incorporate, audio feed back for probe alignment.
•
B-scan
•
256 Gray Levels
•
user definable, DGC curve
•
Pre & post processing capabilities.
•
Volume, distance and area/ perimeter measurement
•
Selectable A-vector for simultaneous A/B display.
•
Annotation/arrow placement
•
Archiving of at least 150 patients in a single data file with an unlimited number of data files
possible.
•
Complete IOL calculation capability with IOL data storage.
•
B-scan sector angle at least 55˚
•
Standard Accessories
•
Should include :
•
Console with 7’’ display
•
Alphanumeric keyboard
•
Trackball
•
Foot pedal
•
7&10 MHZ, A-B scan probe
•
A scan calibration cylinder
•
Probe holders etc.
•
Vendors may quote other optional accessories
Page 90
Dated 05.03.2009
•
Standard accessories should include :
•
Console with 7” display
•
Alphanumeric key board
•
Trackball
•
Foot pedal
•
100 & 12.5 MHZ, A-B scan probe
•
A scan calibration cylinder
•
Probe holders etc
Vendors may quote other optional accessories.
077
078
Slit lamp with
application
tonometer and
stand
SLIT LAMP
Operating
microscope ophthalmology
SURGICAL OPERATING MICROSCOPE FOR Ophthalmology
Haag - Streit type Slit lamp
Galilean converging binocular
Magnification variable 5-step, range 6x - 40x
Eyepieces 12.5x
Field of view 44 to 6
Interpupillary distance 48.5 to 80 mm
Slit length 0.2 to 12 mm
Slit width 0 - 12 mm
Filters cobalt blue, red-free, grey & heat absorbing
Slit rotation 0o - 180o
Vertical Tilting Slit 0o to 20o
Working distance 80 mm
Fixation point luminous flexible red diode
Chin rest height adjustable 70 mm
Goldmann type Applanation tonometer
Digital camera attachment with hardware & software for image processing and storage
Eyepiece head
inclination 200°
wide angle oculars 10x magnification
PD adjustment via knob or by pushing
Front Lens f=200 mm
focal length 200 mm
apochromatic optics with correction of residual aberration
Microscope body
SMD technology
Stereo base 25mm
zoom range 4,3 to 26
visual field diameter 8,5 - 51 mm
Incorporated Slit module for 2 horizontal Slits with each 25 mm travel
focus range ± 25 mm
XY range ± 30 mm (= 60 x 60 mm)
comfortable stepless inclination via gear knob ± 10°
new stepper motor technology; motorized focus, zoom (1:6) and XY movement
filter, blue (405 nm), yellow (475 nm), orange (515 nm), green (525 nm)
Illumination angle main light 6°, red reflex enhancer +2°/-2° to –1°
integrated "Zero Beam" red reflex enhancer with double function knob on/off and fine tuning –2°
Page 91
Dated 05.03.2009
to –1 °
Illumination module with 2 integrated
slits
ergonomic handles with integrated function keys for focus, zoom, brakes and XY movement
Floor stand
Small round base (735 mm Diam.) with power supply for external instruments
mobile on castors with lock in provisions
vibration damper
arm extension, max. 1500 mm
weight balanced spring with free floating characteristics; balancing by push of a button
automatic speed control (ASC)
Electro-magnetic brakes
bi-directional computer interface RS 232 / 9 poles for software connection
integrated connection socket for footswitch
control panel with display for software guided individual setting of motorized microscope
functions (balancing, 12 user settings etc.)
integrated self-test function and service program
vertical lift 722 mm
Light source
integrated in floor stand through fiber optic cable
brightness control
1 Halogen lamp, min. 150 W/15 V
1 Halogen back-up lamp
min. 150 W/15 V
Footswitch
12 functions: focus (upwards / downwards); zoom (larger / smaller); XY movement (left / right
and forward / backward); camera (ON / OFF); light (on / off); brightness control
waterproof
B. Configuration
Basic Structure
Stereo Operating microscope
with tiltable eyepiece head and apochromatic optics; microscope body on inclinable and tiltable
suspension (manual coarse and fine setting); integrated motorized XY linear movement;
motorized zoom system 1:6; motorized fine focussing ±25 mm; "zero beam 900" red reflex
enhancer; stereo base 25 mm; two sets of sterile caps; dust cover
Floor stand
with mobile microscope; round base with lock-in provisions, weight balanced spring joint arm with
rotatable carrier, length 1500 mm; magnetic brakes and free floating characteristics of spring
arm patent pending); one button motorized fine-balancing; special arm-cover for integration of
cables; integrated, adjustable 15 V-halogen illumination system, 150 W and switchable spare
bulb; light fiber cable; user-friendly control panel for software guided individual setting of
motorized functions; alpha-numeric display; integrated self-test function and service program;
speed control switchable from ASC to individual setting; integrated connection socket for
footswitch
Accessories
EIBOS
EIBOS for simultaneous wide-angle observation of fundus and incision area; non-contact, handsHLL/PCD/ESIC-03/08-09
Page 92
Dated 05.03.2009
free and bi-manual application for vitreoretinal surgery, approx. 100° field of view; integrated
reversing optics for left-right correction (SDI) with reduced building height; safe for patient's eye
by spring-loaded suspension; internal focussing via lever ranging from retina to upper vitreous
body; ideal for quick inspection of posterior segment; swing-away position without interfering with
cataract surgery
adapter ring
90 D lens
SPXL – lens
Professional video camera
PAL system
1 CCD color video camera
image enhancer
min. 500 lines resolution (horizontal)
power supply and connection cable to monitor
Stereoscopic observer
three axis inclination
image erection
straight eyepiece head
two oculars 12.5x (screw type)
diopter setting
video camera adapter for 1 CCD camera
Disposables
sterilizable caps
dust cover
079
Ophthalmoscope –
Direct
OPHTHALMOSCOPE
•
•
•
080
Tonometer
Ophthalmoscope, head, monocular with 3.5V krypton bulb, with the following features: Hemi
spot, full circular spot, red-free interference filter, test mark with fixation star and polar
coordinates, slit.
Battery handle, for above e3.5V nominal voltage. Rechargeable Ni-Ca cell. Brightness
control Rheostat.
Battery charger, for 3.5V handle, microprocessor control, boost charge/trickle charge modes.
Charges 2 handles. Should be combined with Retinoscope.
TONOMETER
Specifications for Tonometer
1. Dynamic Contour Tonometer (DCT) Contact type
2. Unit to give digital display of Intra Ocular Pressure (IOP), Ocular Pulse
Amplitude (OPA) and quality of signal
3. Unit to give accurate IOP reading
4. Slit lamp Mounted Tonometer
5. Audio feedback during measurement
6. No need for Fluroscein
7. All functions to be accessed by one knob.
8. Self calibrating unit
9. Tonometer readings should not be influenced by Corneal thickness and other
characteristics of Cornea.
10. Measurement range IOP : 5 – 80 mmHg
11. Disposable tip cover – 250 nos. to be supplied
Page 93
Dated 05.03.2009
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
081
Blue tooth technology for data transfer to the PC-Laptop
PC-Laptop of current generation to be supplied
Wireless printer – 1no.
Unit to run on disposable or reusable battery
2 nos. Disposable battery
2 nos. of Reusable battery with battery charger
CE and FDA approved
Streak
Retinoscope
SPECIFICATIONS OF STREAK RETINOSCOPE
The unique optical design provides the first truly bimodal Retinoscope with just a quick bulb
change. A true streak or spot - no compromises.
FEATURES
•
•
Brilliant, bright Halogen illumination
Earth magnetic signke control for rotation, convergence and divergence
•
Double Neutralization Check makes it easier for students
Two position apertures that optimize brightness of the retinal reflex
082
Non contact
tonometer on
stand
TONOMETER
Computerised Non- Touch Tonometer
Soft air pulse control with accurate measurement for intraocular pressure.
Measurement range : 0-60mmHg, accuracy + 1mm Hg.
Fully Computerized and automated for quick measurement in pediatric.
Built in Printer.
Fully automated table.
Optional accessories to be quoted.
Mode: Auto/ Manual
Working Distance:11mm
Measurement Time: Less than 3 m sec.
Fixation target: Internal target, fixed green LED
Alignment: One Light alignment/ focus Indicator.
Safety look: to avoid physical contact with eye.
With height adjustment and alignment detector.
Coarse and fine longitudinal transverse, and vertical adjustments.
083
Digital Retinal
Camera
Digital Retinal Camera for Ophthalmology
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Digital camera for capturing retina images in colour, red-free, infra-red &
fluorescein modes
Anterior segment & anterior chamber imaging for cornea, iris & sclera
Scanning digital Ophthalmoscope
Field of vie for retina 50 degree
Field of view for optic nerve head examination 25 degree
Field of view for anterior segment imaging 12 x 16mm
Focus Range: 15 Diopters spherical
Light Source : halogen Lamp (6V / 35 W)
Video/Camera system : Digital colour and B/W camera: 25 fps
Display modes : Single frame, movie
Portability : laptop PC
Operating System : Windows XP
Page 94
Dated 05.03.2009
•
084
Yag Laser for
Ophthalmology
Specifications of Yag Laser for Ophthalmology
-
085
Green Laser for
Ophthalmology
Phako machine
Laser wavelength of 1064 nm
Fundamental Q-switched laser
Energy continuously adjustable from 0.2 to 10 mJ
Spot size of 8 microns
Single, Double & triple pulse modes. Separation between pulse 20 microseconds
Pulse repetition rate of better than 1 pulse per second
Laser offset shift continously adjustable upto 500 microns both anterior & posterior
around the aiming focal plane
Slit Lamp focal length 107 mm
Cone angle 16 degrees
Slit Lamp magnification 5 step 16x to 40x
Aiming beam dual beam 635 nm diode, variable intensity upto 200 micro-watts
Cooling system air convection
Specifications for Green Laser for Ophthalmology
-
086
Networking : Eye explorer software
Diode pumped frequency doubled technology
Wavelength of 532 nm Green True continuous wave
Power output of 1.5 Watts from Laser delivery unit
Pulse duration adjustable from 0.05 to 2.0 seconds
Repeat interval adjustable from 0.05 to 2.0 seconds
Aiming beam red diode laser adjustable < 1.0 mW, wavelength 635 nm
Air cooled thermoelectric cooler system
Slit lamp delivery, LiO delivery & endoprobe delivery
Diode laser integrated into the slit lamp.
Spot size adjustable from 50 to 1000 microns
Slit Lamp with 5-step magnification with Micromanipulator
Laser Indirect Ophthalmoscope with coaxial viewing , 300 micron spot size with 20D
lens
Mainster Standard 90 degree lens
Macula viewing lens
Laser Goggles for eye protection
Technical specification for Advanced Phaco Emulsification Unit with Posterior Vitrectomy
system
1. The phaco system should have both peristaltic and Venturi pump.
2. It should be possible during surgery to switch over from peristaltic to venture
mode or vice versa instantaneously.
3. Titanium and ultra light 6 Crystal Phaco handpiece should be quoted having
frequency range between 25KHz and 35 KHz.- Four phaco handpieces to be
quoted
4. Power to be varied between 1 to 100% in steps of 1%
5. Unit must have programmable burst mode with burst duration to be varied
between 25 mSecond to 450 mSecond.
6. Unit should have programmable pulse mode with maximum pulse frequency of
40 Hz. Also pulse duration to be adjusted between 0.50 to 1500 mSecond.
7. Unit must have Cool Micropulse Phaco and Co-Axial Microincision Phaco
Facility
8. Unit should have 3 phaco memories (Phaco1, Phaco 2 and phaco3).
9. I/A System (Peristaltic)should have max vacuum of 600mm Hg and Aspiration
Page 95
Dated 05.03.2009
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
087
Surgical
Instruments for
Opthalmology
flow rate of 50 ml/min
I/A System (Venturi) should have max vacuum of 600 mmHg
9 nos. Autoclavable cassette to be supplied.
Reflux – Either through Pump or Bottle
Autoclavable Straight Phaco Tips – 15 Degree, 30 Degree – 4 nos. each
Autoclavable Bent Phaco tip – 30 Degree – 4nos.
Irrigation Sleeves for above tips – 10 nos.
Autoclavable Cool Phaco Tip 30 degree with incision size of 1.6 and 2.2 mm 2 nos. each AND corresponding sleeves- 5 nos each
I/A Bimanual – 2no.
I/A coaxial with straight and bent tip - 1 set
R.F.Capsulotomy Tip-1 no.
Test Chamber – 5 no and Irrigation Sleeve – 10 nos.
Serilisation Tray – 4nos.
Diathermy handpiece along with Bipolar forceps to be quoted
Unit must have Dual Linear Pedal with Complete programmability. Should
provide function switching, pump switching and bottle height control.
Unit must have memory for minimum 30 surgeon program
Integrated motorized I/V pole to be supplied.
Vitrectomy Cutter (20G): 12 Electric cutter with a motor to be quoted .Cuts rate
to be more than 1000Cuts/Minute
Pneumatic Cutter (20G) – 20 Pneumatic cutter to be quoted . Cut rate to be
more than 2500 cuts/minute
Posterior Vitrectomy – Dual linaer Vitrectomy
Metal halide light with dual output
Single cut mode
Pars Plana Tip
Simultaneous connection of 3 Vitrectomy instruments
Endo Diathermy tip – 20G
Air Delivery Line, Silicon application set, Infusion terminus and Endo illuminaors
for 20G posterior vitrectomy -20 nos. each to be quoted
23 G Posterior Vitrectomy accessories – Endo Illuminators, Pars Plana
Microincision set – 20 nos to be quoted
23 G Auto Seal PMS Microincision to be quoted – 20 nos
23 G Pneumatic cutter with cut rate more than 2500 cuts/min – 20 nos
Endo diathermy tip – 23 G
Optional: Overlay facility for displaying phaco parameters on monitor
Power supply 230V +- 15%, 50 Hz
Voltage stabilizer of necessary rating to be provided.
Surgical Instruments for Opthalmology
SR.NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CATARACT SET (E.C.C.E)
DESCRIPTION
DASTOOR SUP. RECTUS FORCEPS
DRESSING FORCEPS
TOWEL CLIP
TAG FORCEPS
KELMAN McPHERSON FORCEPS
McPHERSON TYING FORCEPS
McPHERSON TYING FORCEPS ANGLED
BARRAQUER COLIBRI FORCEPS
Page 96
QTY
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
Dated 05.03.2009
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
LIMS FORCEPS
ST. MARTIN FORCEPS
CASTROVIEJO FORCEPS
BLAYDES IOL FORCEPS
ARTERY FORCEPS
SINSKEY HOOK
KUGLEN HOOK
THORNTON MARKER
SCALPEL BLADES NO.15
B.P. BLADE HANDLE
CASTROVIEJO MICRO SCISSORS RIGHT
CASTROVIEJO MICRO SCISSORS LEFT
CORNEAL SCISSORS UNIVERSAL
McPHERSON WESTCOTT SCISSORS
GILLS VANNAS SCISSORS
WESTCOTT SCISSORS
BARRAQUER IRIS SCISSORS
CALIPER
IRRIGATING HANDLE
SCISSORS CURVED
CARBON BLADES (pkt of 100)
BLADE HOLDER
BARRAQUER NEEDLE HOLDER
KALT NEEDLE HOLDER
TROUTMAN NEEDLE HOLDER
JAFFE SPATULA
CYCLODIALYSIS SPATULA
NIGHTINGALE POLISHER
IRRIGATING VECTIS
HYDRO DISSECTION CANNULA
JENSON POLISHER
SIMCOE CANNULA
SILICONE BULB
AIR INJECTION CANNULA
A.C. WASH CANNULA
HYDRO DISSECTION CANNULA
INDO-GEM SPECULUM RIGHT
INDO-GEM SPECULUM LEFT
SPECULUM
STERILIZING CASE WITH TWO MATS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LID SURGERY SET
SR.NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
ENTROPION CLAMP RIGHT
ENTROPION CLAMP LEFT
PTOSIS CLAMP
BEER CILIA FORCEPS
HUNT CHALAZION CLAMP
DESMARRES CHALAZION CLAMP
AYER CHALAZION CLAMP
CASTROVIEJO FORCEPS 1x2 TEETH
JEWELLERS FORCEPS
HARMS TYING FORCEPS STRAIGHT
HARMS TYING FORCEPS CURVED
FIXATION FORCEPS
DRESSING FORCEPS
Page 97
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Dated 05.03.2009
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
PATON TYING FORCEPS
TOWEL CLIP
BARRAQUER NEEDLE HOLDER
WESTCOTT TENOTOMY SCISSORS
WESTCOTT TENOTOMY SCISSORS SHARP TIP
STEVEN TENOTOMY SCISSORS
CONJUNCTIVAL SCISSORS
STRABISMUS SCISSORS CURVED
ARTERY FORCEPS CURVED
ARTERY FORCEPS STRAIGHT
CASTROVIEJO NEEDLE HOLDER
WILLIAMS EYE SPECULUM
CASTROVIEJO CALIPER
KALT NEEDLE HOLDER
JAEGER LID SPATULA
BISHOP HARMON FORCEP
IRRIGATING SILICONE BULB
LID RETRACTOR
DOUBLE FIXATION HOOK
CHALAZION CURETTE
BARD PARKER BLADE NO.15
BARD PARKER HANDLE NO.9
GRAEFE HOOK
JAMESON HOOK
BLADE HOLDER
STERILIZING CASE
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MUSCLE SURGERY SET/squint
SR.NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
CLAMPS
CLAMPS
TOWEL CLIP CROSS ACTION
CALIPER CASTROVIEJO STRAIGHT
WESTCOTT TENOTOMY SCISSORS
SCISSORS
Artery forcep
SCISSORS
FORCEPS
NEEDLE HOLDER
NEEDLE HOLDER
SPECULUM
SPECULUM
B.P BLADE
B.P BLADE
B.P HANDLE
Page 98
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Dated 05.03.2009
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
LID RETRACTOR
HOOK
HOOK
HOOK
HOOK
CANNULA
CANNULA
TRAY
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
ENUCLEATION SET
SR.NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
SR.NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Fixation forceps 1x2 teeth
Enucleation scissors half curved
Stevens tenotomy scissors st.
Mule evisceration spoon
Bunge evisceration spoon
Wells enucleation spoon
Desmarres lid retractor
Graefe muscle hook
Lester Burch eye speculum
Artery forcep
Eye collection bottle
Sterilizing case single mat.
D.C.R. SET
DESCRIPTION
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
SCISSORS
SCISSORS
SCISSORS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
NEEDLE HOLDER
NEEDLE HOLDER
TOWEL CALMPS
RETRACTOR
RETRACTOR
CANNULA
CANNULA
CANNULA
CANNULA
NIBBLER
PUNCH
SPECULUM
TREPHINE
MALLET
PROBE
DILATOR
DILATOR
PROBE
PROBE
PROBE
Page 99
QTY.
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Dated 05.03.2009
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
BLADE HOLDER
RETRACTOR
RETRACTOR
BONE GOUGE
OSTEOTOME
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR
CHISEL
AUTOCLAVE BOX
SUCTION CANNULA
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
PHACO-EMULSIFICATION SET
SR.NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
CLAMPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
NEEDLE HOLDER
TOWEL CALMPS
FORCEPS
FIIXATION RING
HOOK
PHACO CHOP
PHACO CHOP
SCISSORS
PHACO CHOP
PHACO CHOP
CALIPER
ENLARGING BLADE
KERATOME
TUNNEL BLADE
SPATULA
SPATULA
SPATULA
SCISSORS
NEEDLE HOLDER
SCISSORS
SCISSORS
NEEDLE HOLDER
SPECULUM
SPECULUM
SPECULUM
SCISSORS
CALIPER
CANNULA
CANNULA
CANNULA
Page 100
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Dated 05.03.2009
44
45
46
47
48
49
CANNULA
CANNULA
CANNULA
BI MANUAL H.P.
BI MANUAL H.P.
TRAY
1
1
1
1
1
1
SMALL INCISION NON-PHACO SET
MINI NUCLEUS TECHNIQUES
SR.NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
SR.NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
BLADE HOLDER
HOOK
HOOK
MVR BLADE
KERATOME
TUNNEL BLADE
CALIPER
GLIDE
ACM CANNULA
CANNULA
SPECULUM
SPECULUM
CANNULA
CANNULA
CANNULA
CANNULA
CANNULA
TRAY
SNARE NUCLEUS DIVIDING
DESCRIPTION
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
KEENER SNARE
SPARE SNARE
VECTIS
CANNULA
CANNULA
TRAY
KANSAS NUCLEUS DIVIDING
SR.NO. DESCRIPTION
1
CUTTING BOARD
2
KANSAS CUTTING BOARD
3
TRISECTOR
4
BISSECTOR
5
CANNULA
6
CANNULA
7
TRAU
SR.NO.
1
GLAUCOMA SET
DESCRIPTION
FORCEPS
Page 101
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
QTY.
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
1
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
QTY.
1
Dated 05.03.2009
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
FORCEPS
SCISSORS
SCISSORS
SCISSORS
NEEDLE HOLDER
NEEDLE HOLDER
SCISSORS
PUNCH
FORCEPS
SCISSORS
Blade holder
PROBE
PROBE
CALIPER CASTROVIEJO STRAIGHT
KNIFE
HOOK
KNIFE
KNIFE
SPATULA
KELLY PUNCH
SPATULA
SPECULUM
SPECULUM
TOWEL CLIP
CANNULA
CANNULA
TONOMETER
TRAY
PROBE
PROBE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
NAME OF INSTRUMENTS
QTY.
Arruga needle holder- straight
Atkinson Retrobulbar needle, beveled sharp
rounded point length 38 mm- 23G
1
Atkinson Retrobulbar needle, beveled sharp
rounded point length 38 mm- 25G
1
Bipolar Cautery complete with forceps- Tenzel
Bipoler forceps Jeweler's type pointed tip, straight, plain 1
Chang Quick chop Combo
1
Cheatle's forceps
1
Dastoor iris retractor- 3.5mm wide- straight
1
De-wecker's iris scissors sharp-sharp
1
Ellis foreign body Spud- very thin, lightly curved
& rounded tip
1
Faulkner lens inserting forceps for folding &
inserting soft IOL's inserter and holder both
1
Girrard AC maintainer cannula 23 G x 5.00 mm
1
Graefe muscle hook- size 1
1
Kirby Lens Expressor & vectis
1
Page 102
Dated 05.03.2009
Reverse Simcoe 21 G
Reverse Simcoe 22 G
Reverse Simcoe 23 G
Schiotz Tonometer
Slit Blade 3 mm angled 45°
Slit Enlarging blade blunt, 5 mm angled 45°
Traquair periosteal elevator
Tunnel Blade 3 mm angled 60°
Flash Auto Clave for OT
088
089
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Pneumatic Drill
complete
Equipment Specifications for PNEUMATIC DRILL MACHINE FOR ORTHOSURGERY
Arthoscope set
complete
SPECIFICATIONS FOR ARTHROSCOPY SYSTEM COMPLETE
Handpiece Heavy duty Push quick release
Drill Chuck
Quick coupling for drilling & Tapping & screwdriving
Connecting Hose
Reamer attachment
DHS/DCS Triple Reamers attachment
Radiolucent drill
Drill Bit 2.00 mm
Drill Bit 2.50 mm
Drill Bit 3.20 mm
Drill Bit 4.00 mm
K wire attachment
Torque Limiter attachment 1.5 NM
Torque Limiter attachment 4.5 NM
Oscillating Saw Attachment
Saw Blade (assorted) 14
Reciprocate-Saw-Attachment
Saw Blade f/Reciprocate-Saw 80*1.05
Trinkle Adapter modified Zimmer Adapter
Arthroscope Set complete with high defination camera, HD monitor 19"
Scope, General Instruments, Shaver System, ACL Reconstruction Set, Arthroscopy Pump
System Arthroscopic shoulder surgery set and arthroscopic ankle surgery set
Imaging System
High Defination Camera System
1. Camera console 220 v with universal coupler & Autoclavable camera head
2. Pure Digital signal with high definition video(1280*1024 native resolution)
3. Resolution-2000 horizontal lines
4. 8 specialty settings
5. Integrated Flexible Scope filter
6. Signal to Noise ratio-70 db
7. Progressive scan technology both on camera head & console
8. Brightness Control on console & camera head
9. Aperture Control on console
10. Inbuilt 16 step digital Image Enhancer on console
11. Digital zoom & white balance on camera head
12. Integrated Gain/shutter/Enhancement with brightness control
13. Two peripheral control on camera head
Page 103
Dated 05.03.2009
Xenon Light Source 300 Watts
Light Source xenon, 300 watts lamp , color temperature 6000 k, universal jaw for accepting any
make fiber optic cable adjustable light intensity from 0 to 100 percent; one spare xenon lamp,
300 watt.
Fiber Optic Cable
Hgh Defination Monitor 19"
High Definition monitor, screen 19”, resolution 1280 x 1024 DVI input.
Option for wall mounting and desktop in same unit.
Imaging Movable Trolley – Indian
Arthroscope Set
Telescope 4mm, 30 Deg Dual connect Arthroscope Sheath 5.9mm. Obturator for Sheath Hook
Probe Straight Punch, 3.4mm Cutting Width 15 Deg Upbiter 3.4mm 30 Deg Left Cutting 3.4mm
30 Deg Right Cutting 3.4mm 90 Deg Left Cutting 3.4mm 90 Deg Right Cutting 3.4mm Foreign
Body Grasper With Lock
Shaver System
Elecronic Control Unit
Foot Control
Handpiece Autoclavable RPM 12000
Microdriver with drilling, wiring and micro saw attachment
Full radious resector
End cutter
Aggressive Cutter.
Meniscus Cutter
Oval Bur
ACL Reconstruction Set
Tendon Stripper
Thickness Tester
Tibial Guide
Femoral Offset Guide 4, 5, 6, 7 mm
Reamers 4,5,6,7,8,9, 10
Length Guage for measuring the tunnel
Reaming Wire
Currette
Rasp
Arthroscopic Pump System With Tubing
Pole mount console with autoclavable remote control
Maximum flow rate of 2000ml/minute with maximum pressure upto 150mmHg
Arthroscopic Inflow/Outflow tubing set
Arthroscopic Shoulder & ankle surgery system
090
INSTRUMENT
SETS FOR
ORTHOPAEDIC
SURGERY
INSTRUMENTS SETS FOR ORTHOPAEDIC SURGERY
Wire Instrument set in sterilising tray with lid
Sterilising Tray with lid
Drill Bit, 2.0mm
Triple Drill Guide 2.0 with 3 holes, opposite side 1 hole
Wire Passer, 45mm bending diameter
Page 104
1
1
1
1
1
Dated 05.03.2009
Wire Tightener with handle and two pegs,
Holding Forceps for Cerclage Wires,
Wire Bending Pliers,
Parallel Pliers, flat nosed
Wire Cutter, large,
Wire Cutter, short,
Bending Iron, for Kirschner Wires
Unreamed Humeral&Proximal Humeral nail Instrument Set
Kirschner Wire, 2.5mm dia., with trocar tip, L 280mm
Threaded Guide Wire, 2.0mm dia., with trocar tip, L 230mm
Drill Bit, 4.5mm dia., L 147/120mm for quick coupling
Double Drill Sleeve 4.5/3.2
Holding Sleeve
Screwdriver, hexagonal, large, with groove, L 240mm
Holding Sleeve, large, L 120mm
Screwdriver, hexagonal, small, L 270mm
Drill Bit, 3.2mm dia., L 210/185mm calibrated, for quick coupling
Depth Gauge for 2.7mm to 4.0mm Screws
Screw Forceps, self-retaining, L 85mm
Combination Wrench, 11mm, L 140mm
Slotted Hammer L 270mm
Awl with T-Handle, cannulated, straight, L 190mm
Depth Gauge for Locking Bolts
Hand Reamer, 6.0mm dia., for predrilling in pseudarthroses
Hand Reamer, 7.0mm dia., for predrilling in pseudarthroses
Driving Head
Protection Sleeve 11.0/8.0, L 96mm
Drill Sleeve 8.0/3.2, blue, L 110mm
Trocar 8.0mm dia., L 110mm
Impactor/Extractor for UTN and UHN, L 250mm
Connecting Screw for UHN, L 105mm
Radiographic Ruler for UHN, L 340mm
Compression Device, L 52mm,
Compression Connecting Screw, , L 165mm
Insertion Guide Attachment for Spiral Blade Locking,
Projectile Reamer, 10mm dia., L 130mm, for quick coupling
Trocar, 2.0mm dia.
Protection Sleeve 14.0/4.5
Aiming Arm for Standard Locking
Drill Bit, 4.5mm dia., cannulated
Insertion Handle for UHN/PHN
Drill Sleeve 4.5/2.0
Inserter for Spiral Blade UHN/PHN
Connecting Screw for Spiral Blade UHN/PHN
Measuring Device for Spiral Blade UHN/PHN
Coupling Block for UHN extraction
Drill Bit, 2.7mm dia., calibrated, 3-flute, for quick coupling
Sterilising Tray
Recon Nail Instrument Set
Measuring Device for AFN, L 490mm
Cleaning Brush, 2.9mm dia., L 350mm
Page 105
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
Dated 05.03.2009
Stylet, 2.8mm dia., L 335mm
Spanner Wrench
Combination Wrench, 11mm, L 140mm
Pin Wrench, 4.5mm, L 120mm
Tissue Protector, L 140mm
Reaming Rod, 2.5mm dia., L 950mm, 3.5mm olive
Reamer, 6.5/4.5mm dia., for Hip Screw
Fixation Sleeve for Reamer
Drill Bit, 14.0mm dia., cannulated, L 312mm
Drill Bit, 16.0mm dia., cannulated, L 312mm
Protection Sleeve 11.5/9.0, magenta
Drill Sleeve 9.0/2.8, magenta
Trocar, 2.8mm dia., magenta
Screwdriver, hexagonal, 3.5mm dia.
Reverse Awl, 14mm dia., for 9-10mm
Reverse Awl, 16mm dia., for 11-12mm
Screwdriver Shaft, hexagonal 4/11, cannulated
Screwdriver Shaft, hexagonal 11/11
Guide Wire, 2.8mm dia., with Hook, L 460mm
Extraction Screw and Spiral Blade
Drill Bit 4.0mm dia., L 270/245mm, calibr., centering tip, quick coupling
Direct Measuring Device, L 350mm, for Guide Wires 2.8mm dia.
Driving Cap L 82mm
Hammer Guide, L 360mm,
Ram with Handle,
Screwdriver, hexagonal, with ball
Screwdriver Shaft, hexagonal cannulated, 8.0mm, L 330mm
Insertion Handle, cannulated,
Aiming Arm 130º
Drill Sleeve 8.0/4.0, green, L 150mm
Trocar 4.0mm dia., green, L 160mm
Universal Chuck with T-Handle, L 160mm
Connecting Screw cannulated
Case for additional Instruments
Case Standard Instrument Set, without lid, without contents
Case without contents
Case
Guide Wire 2.8mm dia., L 350mm
Drill Bit, 4.0mm dia., L 195/170mm 3-flute, for quick coupling
Screwdriver, hexagonal, large, L 280mm
Medullary Reamer instrument set
T-Handle with quick coupling
Holding Forceps for Reaming Rod 2.5mm
Releasing Box
Reaming Rod, 2.5mm
Flexible Shaft, 7.0mm
Cleaning Brush
Reduction Head, straight
Reduction Head, displacement 2.5mm
Page 106
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
5
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
Dated 05.03.2009
Reamer Head, 8.5mm dia.
Reamer Head, 13.0 mm dia.
Cannulated Screws Instruments set 4.5mm
Threaded Guide Wire, 1.6mm
Drill Bit, 1.5mm dia.
Drill Bit, 3.2
Countersink Shaft, cannulated,
T-Handle with quick coupling,
Tap, cannulated, for 4.5mm Cannulated Screws
Parallel Wire Guide,
Trocar 1.6mm dia.
Screwdriver, hexagonal, large,
Drill Sleeve
Protection Sleeve
Screwdriver Shaft, hexagonal, large
Screwdriver, hexagonal, cannulated
Holding Sleeve
Measuring Device,
Stylet, 1.6mm
Holding Clip 4.5 - 7.0mm for screw
Bone Forceps set
Reduc-Forceps w/Points speed-lock L160
Reduct-Forceps-large w/Points speed-lock
Reduc-Forceps toothed speed-lock L170
Bone Holding Forceps self-center speed-l
Reduc-Forceps toothed speed-lock L240
Dynamic Screw/Hip screw Instrument set
DHS/DCS® Threaded Guide Wire, 2.5mm dia., L 230/5mm
DHS® Angled Guide 135º
DHS® Angled Guide 150º
DHS/DCS® Direct Measuring Device
DHS/DCS® Wrench for one-step insertion L 230mm
DHS/DCS® T-Handle with quick coupling, L 80mm
DHS® Triple Reamer
DHS/DCS® Impactor for one-step insertion, L 260mm
DHS/DCS® Tap, L 220mm
Page 107
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Dated 05.03.2009
DHS/DCS® Centering Sleeve, locking
Coupling Screw, cannulated
DCS® Angled Guide
DCS® Triple Reamer
Small Fragment Instrument set 3.5mm
Drill Bit, 3.5mm dia., L 110/85mm, for quick coupling
Countersink Shaft 3.5, L 72mm
Tap for 3.5mm Cortex Screws L 50/110mm
Tap for 4.0mm Cancellous Bone Screws L 110mm
T-Handle with quick coupling, L 80mm
Insert Drill Sleeve 3.5/2.5, L 42mm Drill Bit 2.5mm dia.
Screwdriver, hexagonal, small, with Holding Sleeve
Screwdriver Shaft, hexagonal, small, L 100mm, for quick coupling
Screwdriver, hexagonal, small, with groove, L 200mm
Holding Sleeve,
Depth Gauge for 2.7mm to 4.0mm Screws
Sharp Hook, L 155mm
Holding Clip 4.5 - 7.0mm
DCP® Drill Sleeve 3.5 for neutral and load position
Bending Iron, slit widths 4.5/2.5mm, L 150mm, for Plates 2.7 and 3.5
Bending Iron, slit widths 2.5/4.5mm, L 150mm, for Plates 2.7 and 3.5
Bending Pliers for Plates 2.4 to 4.0, L 230mm
Bending Template for DCP® 3.5 and LC-DCP 3.5, L 87mm
Wire Bending Pliers, L 155mm
Bending Iron, for Kirschner Wires 1.25 to 2.5mm dia., L 120mm
Reduction Forceps with points, L 130mm
Reduction Forceps with points, wide, ratchet lock, L 132mm
Reduction Forceps, toothed, ratchet lock, L 140mm
Bone Holding Forceps, self- centering, speed lock, L 190mm
Retractor, small, 8mm wide, short narrow tip, L 160mm
Periosteal Elevator, round edge, 6mm wide, L 200mm
Retractor, 15mm wide, L 160mm
Basic Instruments set 4.5mm
Tap for 4.5mm Cortex Screws, L 70/125mm
Tap for 6.5mm Cancellous Bone Screws L 195mm
Insert Drill Sleeve 4.5/3.2, L 80mm
Screwdriver Shaft, hexagonal,
Screwdriver, hexagonal, large,
Page 108
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Dated 05.03.2009
Depth Gauge for 4.5 to 6.5mm Screws
Sharp Hook, L 155mm
Tension Device, articulated
Combination Wrench,
DCP® Drill Sleeve 4.5
LC-DCP Drill Sleeve 4.5
Universal Drill Sleeve 4.5
Ratchet Wrench, 11mm, L 140mm
Countersink, large,
Basic Intramedullary Nailing Instrument set
Combination Wrench, 11/14mm, L 150mm
Measuring Device for nail diameters
Screwdriver, hexagonal, large, L 280mm
Pin Wrench, 4.5mm, L 120mm
Awl, small, L 210mm
Tissue Protector, L 140mm
Socket Wrench 11mm, cannulated, L 180mm
Driving Piece, curved, L 120mm
Driving Head
Guide Rod, cannulated,
Ram
Grip, flexible, L 170mm
Insertion Handle, for Tibial Nails 9.0 to 14.0mm dia.
Threaded Bolt, conical, for Tibial Nails 9.0 to 14.0mm dia.
Insertion Handle, for Femoral Nails 9.0 to 12.0mm dia.
Threaded Bolt, conical, for Femoral Nails 9.0 to 12.0mm dia.
Knurled Nut for Tibial Nails 9.0 to 14.0mm dia.
Knurled Nut for Femoral Nails, 9.0 to 12.0mm dia.
Protection Sleeve 11.0/8.0, L 96mm
Insert Drill Sleeve 3.2
Drill Bit, 4.0/4.5mm dia., L 225/200mm, for quick coupling
Sterilizing Tray 1/1
Lid for 307.030
Guide Rod, 3.0mm dia., with flat tip
Locking Compression Instrument set Large& Small
Torque-limiting Attachment
Extraction Drill Bit
Extraction Screw, conical, for 3.5mm Screws
Drill Bit, 2.8mm dia., L 165mm
Screwdriver Shaft 2.5mm, L 80mm
Screw Holding Sleeve for LCP 3.5
Threaded LCP Drill Guide for 2.8mm Drill Bit
Page 109
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
Dated 05.03.2009
Guide Sleeve for 1.25mm K-wires
Handle with Quick Coupling
Universal Drill Sleeve LCP 3.5
Torque-Limiting Screwdriver, for LISS Screws
Extraction Drill Bit
Extraction Screw, conical, for 4.5/6.5mm Screws
Drill Bit, 4.3mm dia., L 221mm
Screwdriver Shaft 3.5, self-retaining, L 110mm
Threaded LCP Drill Guide, for 4.3mm Drill Bit
Universal Drill Sleeve LCP 4.5/5.0
Screw Holding Sleeve for LCP 4.5/5.0
Sterilising Case
Sterilising Lid
Cannulated Screws Instrument Set for 7.00mm
Sterilising Case with Lid
Threaded Guide Wire, 2.0mm dia., with trocar tip, L 230mm
Drill Bit, 4.5/2.1mm dia., cannulated, L 230/210mm, 3-flute, for Jacobs
chuck
Countersink, cannulated, for 7.0mm Cannulated Screws, L 230mm
Tap, cannulated, for 7.0mm Cannulated Screws, L 230mm
Parallel Wire Guide, 2.0mm dia.
Screwdriver, hexagonal, cannulated L 245mm, for 7.0mm Cannulated
Screws
Measuring Device, L 230mm, for 7.0mm Cannulated Screws
Cleaning Brush, 2.1mm dia., L 285mm
Stylet, 2.0mm dia., L 280mm
Holding Clip 4.5 - 7.0mm
Parallel Drill Guide 4.5
Drill Sleeve 4.5/2.0, L 109mm
Drill Sleeve 8.0/4.5, L 100mm
Bone Graft Instrument set
T-Handle f/Steinm-Pins+SchanzScr
Extract-Instr f/Holder
Trocar f/Holder
Protect-Sleeve f/Holder
Holder f/Set f/BoneGraft-Harvest incl No
Trephine-Attachm ø8.5 f/Holder
Trephine-Attachm ø14 f/Holder
Extract-Attachm ø8.5 f/Holder
Page 110
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Dated 05.03.2009
Extract-Attachm ø14 f/Holder
Impl-Holder ø8.5 f/Holder
Impl-Holder ø14 f/Holder
GuideWire ø3.5 w/Stop L265 SSt
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
Hand Drill for drilling & Reaming
Hand Drill
Quick Coupling Hand Drill
DrillChuck Hand Drill
Connection Hand Drill
General Instrument Set
Bone Hook, sharp, small, L 230mm
Bone Hook, sharp, medium, L 230mm
Retractor, 8mm wide, short narrow tip, L 220mm
Retractor, 18mm wide, short narrow tip, L 235mm
Retractor, 24mm wide, long and wide tip, L 270mm
Periosteal Elevator, curved shaft, 14mm wide, L 200mm
Periosteal Elevator, round edge, 6mm wide, L 200mm
Periosteal Elevator, straight shaft, 14mm wide, L 200mm
Hammer 500g, L 230mm
Chisel Handle, L 185mm
Chisel Blade, 10mm wide, thickness 0.9mm, L 81mm
Gouge, curved, for cancellous bone graft harvest., 10mm wide, L
250mm
Damaged screw,Broken Nail Removal Instrument set
Aluminium Case, white, small, perforated, without contents
Tray, subdivided
Tray for Instruments, without contents
Hollow Reamer for 3.5/4.0mm Screws
Spare Reamer Tube
Extraction Bolt for 3.5/4.0mm Screws
Extraction Screw, conical, for 2.7mm, 3.5mm and 4.0mm Screws
Hollow Reamer for 4.5mm Screws
Spare Reamer Tube
Extraction Bolt for 4.5mm Screws
Extraction Screw, conical, for 4.5/6.5mm Screws
Hollow Reamer for 5.0/6.0/6.5/7.0mm Screws
Spare Reamer Tube
Extraction Bolt, for 5.0/6.0/6.5/7.0mm Screws
Aluminium Plate, anodized
Sharp Hook, L 155mm
Forceps for Screw Removal, L 205mm
Gouge, 10mm wide, L 205mm
Extract-Hook f/Nails ø9-11
Extract-Hook f/Nails ø11+larger
Extract-Hook long f/Nails ø11-14
Page 111
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Dated 05.03.2009
Extract-Hook L480 f/Nails ø9
Connector f/Extract-Hook
T handle
Tap Sleeve
Drill Sleeve
Screw Driver sleeve
Tap
Drill Bit 3.5 mm
Drill Bit 2.7mm
Cannulated Tap Handle
Tap Sleeve
Cannulated counter sleeve
Sharp Hook, L 155mm
Direct Screw depth Guage
Canal Brush
Holding Clamps
Guide wire 1.2mmx150mm
Screw Driver
Chisel&Impacter Instrument Set
Handle with quick coupling, L 150mm
Cancellous Bone Impactor, 6.0mm dia., round, L 140mm
Cancellous Bone Impactor, 6.0mm dia. flattened, L 140mm
Cancellous Bone Impactor, 8.0mm dia., round, L 140mm
Cancellous Bone Impactor, rectangula 6x16mm, L 140mm
Cancellous Bone Impactor, rectangular 10x20mm, L 140mm
Cancellous Bone Impactor, rectangular 10x30mm, L 140mm
Gouge, curved, 10mm wide, L 140mm
Gouge, curved, 15mm wide, L 140mm
Chisel, flat, straight, 16mm wide, L 140mm
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Tap Sleeve 3.5mm
Drill Sleeve 2.5mm
Screw Driver sleeve
Tap
Drill Bit 3.5 mm
Drill Bit 2.7mm
Cannulated Tap Handle
Tap Sleeve 2.7mm
Cannulated counter sleeve
Sharp Hook, L 155mm
Direct Screw depth Guage
Canal Brush
Holding Clamps
Guide wire 1.2mmx150mm
Screw Driver
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10
1
Page 112
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10
1
Dated 05.03.2009
Proximal Femoral Nail Instruments
Tap, 6.5 mm dia., cannulated, for Hip Pin
Large Hexagonal Pelvic Screwdriver, length 300 mm
Cleaning brush 2.9mm dia
Pin Wrench, 4.5 mm dia., L 120 mm
Protection Sleeve 20.0 / 17.0
Drill Sleeve 17.0 / 2.8
Trocar 2.8 mm dia
Drill Bit 17.0 mm dia., cannulated, length 312 mm
Cleaning Stylet, 2.8 mm dia., length 450 mm
Insertion Handle for PFN and long PFN
Threaded Plug
Aiming arm for PFN 130°
Connecting Screw,
Socket, hexagonal, with T-Handle,
Slotted Hammer with Handle for PFN, 400g, detachable
Protection Sleeve 14.0 / 11.0, for Femoral Neck Screw
Drill Sleeve 11.0 / 2.8,
Trocar 2.8 mm dia.,
Protection Sleeve 8.0 / 6.5, for Hip Pin
Drill Sleeve 8.0 / 6.5, blue, L 210 mm
Trocar, 2.8 mm dia., blue, L 220 mm
Direct Measuring Device for Guide Wires
Reamer 11.0 mm dia., complete, length 440 mm
Drill Bit 6.5 mm dia., cannulated, length 330 mm
Wrench for PFN Femoral Neck Screw, complete
Screwdriver, hexagonal, cannulated, for PFN
Protection Sleeve 11.0 / 8.0, for Locking Bolts
Drill Sleeve 8.0 / 4.0,
Trocar,
Drill Bit 4.0 mm dia., length 250 mm
Extraction Guide Rod, for PFN
Extraction Holding Sleeve, for Hip Pin
Radiographic Ruler for PFN
Depth Gauge for measuring range upto 100mm
Universal Chuck with T-Handle
Hammer with synthetic inserts
Sterilising tray with lid
Elbow Recon System Instruments
Srerilising Tray for Elbow Plate System
Screw rack for LCP screws Ø 2.7mm (head LCP 2.4) and Ø 3.5 mm,
with Lid, without contents
Kirschner Wire Ø 1.25 mm with trocar tip, length 150 mm, Stainless
Steel
Kirschner Wire Ø 1.6 mm with trocar tip, length 150 mm, Stainless Steel
Extraction Screw for Screws Ø 3.5 mm
Drill Bit Ø 2.5 mm, length 110/85 mm, 2-flute, for Quick Coupling
LCP Drill Bit Ø 2.8 mm, length 165 mm, 2-flute, for Quick Coupling
Drill Bit Ø 3.5 mm, length 110/85 mm, 2-flute, for Quick Coupling
Screwdriver Shaft, hexagonal, small, Ø 2.5 mm
Screwdriver, hexagonal, small, Ø 2.5 mm, with Groove
Drill bit 1.8mm, length 100/75 mm , 2 flute, for Quick Coupling
Drill bit 2.4mm, length 100/75mm, 2 flute, for Quick Coupling
Drill bit 2.0mm, with double marking , length 140/115mm, 3 flute, for
Page 113
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Dated 05.03.2009
Quick Coupling
LCP Drill Sleeve 2.7 (head LCP 2.4), with scale up to 60mm, for drill bits
2.0mm
Universal Drill Guide 2.4
Depth Gauge for screws 2.0 and 2.4mm, measuring range up to 60mm
Screwdriver shaft stardrive, T8,cylindrical , with groove,shaft 3.5mm,
Holding sleeve for LCP screws stardrive 2.4/2.7 (head LCP 2.4), T8, for
screwdriver shaft 3.5mm
Combined Holding sleeve for cortex screws stardrive 2.4/2.7mm, T8, for
screwdriver shafts 3.5mm
Depth Gauge for Screws Ø 2.7 to 4.0 mm, measuring range up to 60
mm
Screw Forceps, self-holding
LCP Drill Sleeve 3.5, for Drill Bits Ø 2.8 mm
Centering Sleeve for Kirschner Wire Ø 1.6 mm, length 70 mm,
Universal Drill Guide 3.5
Bending Iron for Plates 2.4 to 3.5, length 145 mm
Bending Iron for Plates 2.4 to 3.5, length 145 mm
Bending Pliers for Plates 2.4 to 4.0, length 230 mm
Handle for Torque Limiter
Torque Limiter, 0.8 Nm,
Aiming Block, left, for Aiming Arm
Aiming Block, right, for Aiming Arm
Drill Sleeve 2.7, for Aiming Arm
Aiming Arm for DHP
Insert for Drill Sleeve 2.7
Insert for Drill Sleeve 3.5
Drill Sleeve 3.5, for Aiming Arm
Insert for LCP Distal Humeral Plates
Insert for LCP Olecranon and LCP-DMH Plates
Kirschner Wire Ø 1.6 mm with trocar tip, length 150 mm, Stainless Steel
Aiming device for LCP Olecranon Plate, right
Aiming device for LCP Olecranon Plate, left
Centering Sleeve 6.0/5.0, Aiming Device
Drill Sleeve 5.0/2.9, Aiming Device
Centering Sleeve for Kirschner Wire Ø 1.6 mm, length 70 mm,
Direct Measuring Device for Kirschner Wire Ø 1.6 mm
Aiming device for LCP-Metaphyseal plate 3.5 for distal medial humerus
LCP Drill Sleeve 3.5, for Drill Bits Ø 2.8 mm
Locking Compact Hand Instruments set
Tray f/Std-Instr f/CompHand w/Lid w/o Co
Handle-medium Mini-Quick-Coupl
Depth Gauge f/Scr ø1.3-1.5 meas-range up
Depth Gauge f/Scr ø2+2.4 meas-range up-t
Pliers flat-nosed pointed f/Pl 1-2.4
Hold-Forceps ø1-2.4
Bend/Cut-Pliers
Handle w/Quick-Coupl L110
Sharp Hook L155
Reduc-Forceps w/Points narrow ratchet-lo
Hold-Forceps w/Swivel Foot f/Pl 1.3-2.4
Termite-Forceps ratchet-lock L90
Stagbeetle-Forceps ratchet-lock L120
Bone-Lever small short narrow tip w/6 L1
Page 114
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Dated 05.03.2009
Bone-Lever small short narrow tip w/8 L1
Periost-Elev slightly curv-blade straigh
Tray f/Addit-Instr f/CompHand w/Lid w/o
Countersink 1.3-2 L50
DoubleDrillGuide 1.3/1
ScrDriverShaft 1.3 crucif w/Hold-Sleeve
ScrDriverShaft 1 crucif w/Hold-Sleeve L6
Drill Bit ø0.8 L40/16 2flute
Drill Bit ø1 L46/34 2flute
Module CompHand 1/1.3 w/Lid w/o Cont TiCountersink 1.5-2.4 L52
DoubleDrillGuide 1.3/1
ScrDriverShaft-1.5 crucif w/Hold-Sleeve
Module CompHand 1.5 w/Lid w/o Cont Ti-Im
Module LCP CompHand 2 w/Lid w/o Cont TiDrill Bit ø1.5 w/marking L96/82 2flute
Drill Bit ø2 L67/55 2flute
LCP Drill Sleeve 2 w/Scale f/Drill Bits
Univ-Drill-Guide 2
Countersink 1.5-2.4 L52
Bend-Pin f/LCP-Pl 2
ScrDriver Shaft 2 w/Hold-Sleeve L66
Module LCP CompHand 2.4 w/Lid w/o Cont T
Drill Bit ø1.8 w/marking L96/82 2flute
LCP Drill Sleeve 2.4 w/Scale-30 f/Drill
Univ-Drill-Guide 2.4
Countersink 1.5-2.4 L52
Bend-Pin f/LCP-Pl 2.4+2.7
ScrDriver Shaft T8 self-hold
Instruments - LCP Distal Radius Plates 2.4 in Graphic Case
Drill Bit ø2.7 L100/75 2flute f/Quick-Co
Drill Bit ø1.8 w/marking L110/85 2flute
Drill Bit ø2.4 L100/75 2flute f/Quick-Co
Drill Bit ø2 w/marking L110/85 2flute f/
Handle-large w/Quick-Coupl L155
ScrDriverShaft Stardr T8 self-hold
Hold-Sleeve f/Scr Stardr ø2.4 T8 f/ScrDr
Depth Gauge f/Scr ø2+2.4 meas-range up-t
Depth Gauge f/Scr ø2.7-4 meas-range up-t
LCP Drill Sleeve 2.4 w/Scale-30 f/Drill
Pliers flat-nosed pointed f/Pl 1-2.4
Termite-Forceps ratchet-lock L90
Reduc-Forceps w/Points softlock L126
Reduc-Forceps w/Points wide softlock L12
Bone-Lever small short narrow p w/6 L1
Periost-Elev slightly curv-blade straigh
K-Wire ø1.25 w/trocar p L150
K-Wire ø1.6 w/trocar p L150
Page 115
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
10
10
Dated 05.03.2009
Torque Limiter 0.8Nm
Novocase f/Lock-Dist-RadiusSyst 2.4
Anterior cervical fixation Instruments set
Cleaning Instrument for Screw Head
Fixation Pin for temporary use
Screwdriver for Insertion, self-holding
Awl Ø 2.5 mm with trocar tip
Drill Bit Ø 2.5 mm, length 12 mm, 2-flute, for Quick Coupling
Screwdriver for Extraction
Drill Guide 8.0/3.2, with fixed angle,
Drill Guide 8.0/3.2, with variable angle,
Bending Pliers for cervical plate Plates
Drill and Screw Guide,
Tap for Cancellous Bone Screws Ø 4.0 mm, length 220 mm
Tap for Cancellous Bone Screws Ø 4.5 mm, length 220 mm
Holding Sleeve, for No. 324.105
Drill Bit Ø 2.5 mm, complete, length 220 mm, drilling depth 12-26 mm, 2flute, for Quick Coupling
Posterior Intralaminar Cage Instrument system
Instruments
Lamina Spreader
Implant Holder
Trial Implant, size 7 mm
Impactor straight
Impactor curved
Osteotome, straight, 8 mm
Osteotome, straight, 12 mm
Bone Curette, straight, 7.5 mm
Bone Curette, angled, 7.5 mm
Bone Curette, right angled, 7.5 mm
Bone Curette, left angled, 7.5 mm
Bone Curette, rectangular, right, 8 mm
Bone Curette, rectangular, left, 8 mm
Bone Rasp, right, 8 mm
Bone Rasp, left, 8 mm
Packing Block
Cancellous Bone Impactor
Funnel for Cancellous Bone Graft, Æ 8 mm, length 220 mm
Cancellous Bone Impactor, Æ 8 mm
Page 116
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Dated 05.03.2009
Cancellous Bone Impactor
T-Handle with Quick Coupling
091
Battery cum
electric Operated
drill & saw system
1
1
BATTERY CUM ELECTRIC DRILL & SAW SYSTEM
The handpieces should have
Battery cum Electric Trauma Drill for Emergency OT
Light weight Hand piece
Electric console
Cable for Hand piece
Drilling attachment
Medullary reaming attachment
K wire attachment
Jacobs Chuck and key attachment
Battery Charger 4 station
Reciprocating saw Attachment
Sagittal Saw Attachment
Blades for Sagittal saw
Blades for reciprocating saw
Battery Packs
Transfer Kit
092
093
Automatic
electronic
tourniquet with
hose & cuffs
AUTOMATIC ELECTRONIC TOURNIQUET WITH HOSE & CUFFS
Technical
Specifications for
Ultrasonic
Aspirator
Technical Specifications for Ultrasonic Aspirator
1
24
4
1
1. Electrically operated(22v) system from reputed international manufacturers with two
hoses and battery back up of upto 45 min.
2. Should have option for bier"s block and bilateral procedures.
3. Seven Sizes 8'' to 42" of cylindrical cuffs should meet individual requirements of thin
and fat patient for arm and thigh. cuffs should be autoclavable.
4. Small and light weight unit that can be mounted on I.V pole or placed on a table.
5. Audible and visual alarms when pressure variation is detected
6. Unit should perform self-calibration check every time it is turn on.
7. 7.50 to 475 mm Hg pressure setting
8. 8.6 to 240 minutes time setting.
9. 9.positive locking connectors, leak free inflation cuff sleeves, which help reduce
wrinkles pinching and shearing of soft tissues.
10. 10.cuff with lockout features, which should ensure that the cuffs stays inflated
1.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2.
Main Unit
Microprocessor based console with integrated suction
and irrigation system, with adjustable flow.
Based on the latest technology. Piezoelectric or equivalent
state of the art.
It should be provided with self diagnostic checks of complete
system and automatic frequency calibration on switching on.
Should have automatic recall of settings when hand piece is attached.
Should have foot control for activation.
Should be provided with trolley.
Page 117
Dated 05.03.2009
2.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
One angled hand piece for microsurgical use. It should be lightweight and sleek
with working length between 130 to 150mm. It should have internal irrigation
facility. Tip Diameter of 1.0mm to 1.5mm. Frequency between 30 to 40Khz.
One hand piece for macro work with working length of 120 to 140mm. Tip diameter
of 3 to 4mm. Should have external irrigation and central suction facility. Frequency
between 20 to 25 Khz.
Handpiece should be autoclavable by steam-sterilisation.
The handpiece should have detachable and autoclavable cables.
The tips should be reusable and autoclavable .
Please mention the disposable accessories that are necessary to run the system
and the quantity that will be provided. Voltage stabilizer of necessary rating to be
provided along with the unit.
Optional accessories – Bone Knife Handpiece with Cable – 1no
(g)
35 KHz handpiece with irrigation and aspiration with cable - 1no.
Irrigation and Aspiration Tubing system – 50 nos.
NEBULIZER
(f)
094
Ultrasonic
Nebulizer
Should be based on ultrasonic peizo-electric principal.
Ultrasonic nebulizer suitable for continuous nebulization Of distilled water medium flow rate for inhalation of
water Soluble medicaments.
To produce a mist with droplet sizes of 0.5 to 4 micron.
Supplied with all accessories & tubing, cart, drip bottle etc
Noise level should be less than 35 dB.
Power requirement: 240VAC/ 50Hz
095
Ventilator portable
PORTABLE VENTILATOR
Specifications for Portable/ transport ventilator
1. Micro turbine controlled intensive care ventilator adult and paediatric
2. Should have invasive – non invasive ventilation
3. Ventilator should weight not more than 5kg ( five kg)
Modes:
1. Should have the following modesA. PCV (Pressure controlled Ventilation) / PACV (Pressure Assisted Controlled
Ventilation)
B. CV (Controlled Volume)/ ACV (Assisted Controlled Volume)
C. SIMV (Synchronous Intermittent Mandatory Ventilation)
D. PSV-S(Pressure Support Ventilation) / PSV-ST (Pressure Support with a back up rate)
E. CPAP (Continuous Positive Pressure)
F. Should have Target Tidal Volume available with all dual pressure Modes
Parameter Settings:
A. Tidal Volume : 50-2000ml
B. Rate: 4-60bpm
C. Inspiratory flow rate:0 to 200 1pm
D. PEEP: 0-20MBAR
Page 118
Dated 05.03.2009
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
Inspiration Pressure: 4 to 60 mbar
I/E ratio:1.0-3.0
I/T ratio:25-50%
FiO2 measurement from 21 to 100%
Should have Inspiratory Trigger
Should have Exhalation Trigger
Should have Sigh
Should have integrated SPO2 monitor
Should have double limb ventilation
Should have battery back up for at least 10 hours
Should have availability to change the flow pattern in volume control (rectangle and
decelerate)
P. Ramp control for pressure modes
Alarms
Should have minimum & maximum Inspired Tidal Volume alarm
A.
Should have minimum exhaled Tidal Volume leak maxi alarm
B.
Should have Fr(Frequency) Maxi
C.
Should have min &maxi Inspiratory Time
Monitoring & Display
A. Should have Vent parameters: Inspired Positive Airway Pressure IPAP (inspired
pressure) EPAP (positive exhalation pressure) Inspired Tidal Volume, Leak , Breath
rate , FiO2,SpO2,I/E, Inspiratory time
B. Should have Alarms, Graphics, Alarm history, General Configuration, preferences,
curves configuration, maintenance menu and sub menu.
C. Should have pressure volume loop, and flow volume loop
096
ECG Single
channel - portable
ECG Single channel - portable
Floating: protection against defibrillator effect, Lead,
standard 12 leads,
lead change, automatically,
patient current leakage
input impedance
calibrating voltage: 1mv
A/D conversion: 12 bit
Frequency response: 0.05Hz-150Hz(IEC)
Time constant> 3.2 sec
CMRR>80 dB
EMG filter-35Hz(-3 dB)/25Hz (-3 dB)
Sensitivity : ½, 1,2(cm/mV) , conversion deviation
097
ECG 12 channel Page printer with
cart.
ECG 12 CHANNEL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Simultaneous acquisition of up to 12 leads.
Real time continuous recording of 3, 6 and 12 channel.
Recording speeds of 5, 10. 25 or 50 mm/sec
Extensive ECG quality control by AC Noise Filtering and Baseline.
A4 size reports for convenient reading and filing.
Colour coded keys for case of operation.
Convenient battery operation for greater mobility.
Versatile report formats and speed options to provide auto reports or rhythm reports.
User configurable filters.
Preview signal quality prior to printing. Saving time and paper.
Page 119
Dated 05.03.2009
098
Patient Monitor
•
•
•
Keyboard entry for patient ID information.
Capability to generate any number of ECG copies possible for filing and distribution.
Adult and paediatric analysis programs std.
•
Automatic interpretations of ECG data.
•
Availability of adult, paediatric and neonatal accessories.
•
•
Optional accessories e.g., stand, cables, electrodes etc. Should be quoted separately.
Consumables for one year, ( a list should be attached)
•
Service and operation manual complete.
SPECIFICATION OF BEDSIDE MONITOR:
Cardiac Monitor(ECG,NIBP and SpO2)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
099
MULTI
PARAMETER
MONITOR
Three channel Patient monitor with ECG, NIBP and SpO2
ECG - Lead I, II and III
Display of Heart Rate, Alarm Limit
Alarm indications for Arrhythmia, Tachy cardia, Brady Cardia and Fault & Cable
disconnection
ECG Range - 30 – 250 BPM
Inbuilt Cautery and defibrillation protection
3 lead ECG Cables – 2nos to be supplied
Electrodes – Disposable 50 nos and Reusable – 15 nos.
ECG Jelly – 2 Bottles
NIBP Range – 30 ~ 250 mmHg
Modes of NIBP – Manual, Automatic and STAT mode (Continuous BP
measurement for 3-5 minute operation)
NIBP Intervals – Programmable from 2 min to 60 min
Cuffs – 6 nos. ( 3 Adult, 2 Paediatric and 1 Neonatal)
Safety Measures – Automatic Deflation if cuff pressure exceeds 290mmHg or
measurement time exceeds 120 seconds.
Alarm setting for Systolic and Diastolic
SpO2 – Range 0 – 100%
Modes – Slow, Normal and Fast
Display: Plethesmograph, Pulse strength and SpO2 values
Alarm setting for SpO2 value
SpO2 Probe with extension cable – 2set
Minimum 18 Hours graphical trend for HR and SpO2
100 readings tabular form for NIBP
Graded and colour coded alarm
Battery back up of at least 1 hour
High Resolution Display - Color TFT/Colur LCD
Easy to transport- Portable and light weight
USB port, Slave display , RS 232 port
Optional : Inbuilt or External Themal Array recorder and Printer
MULTI PARAMETER MONITOR
Patient monitor system should be of modular type and capable of monitoring adult, pediatric
neonatal patients.
Page 120
Dated 05.03.2009
Monitor should have 15” independent flat panel display.
Touch screen user interface is preferable.
Module rack / housing should be independent and shall be able to be placed near to the patient.
Should be capable of 8 traces display.
Monitor must be capable of simultaneously monitoring the following parameters which should be
present as standard: ECG, NIBP, SpO2, invasive pressures (4), temperatures (2), and
Capnography.
Should be compatible with Cardiac output, EEG, and BIS.
ECG should have capability for 3, 5 and / or 10 lead monitoring and should have built in
arrhythmia monitoring on all leads.
Inbuilt ST segment analysis and arrhythmia detection for all the leads should be possible.
Haemodynamic and drug dose calculations should be available.
Arrhythmia should be grouped based on classifications – and should show no of arrhythmias
occurred.
Respiration should be available with Cardio Vascular Artifact filter.
OCRG should be available for monitoring neonates.
ICP monitoring should be possible.
Alarm parameter should flash red in the presence of high priority alarms (e.g. ventricular
fibrillation and asystole) and flash yellow in the presence of medium or low priority alarms (e.g.
noisy signal, etc.)
24 hours trend data should be displayed.
All monitors including central station should have similar user interface for easy usage among all
clinicians.
Monitor shall provide the capability to interact with alarms at remote bedsides.
Monitor shall provide the capability to receive and display real-time waveforms, trended data and
alarm status from other bedside or telemetry units on the patient monitoring network.
Monitor shall provide the capability enter patient information at the bedside or central monitor.
On-screen keyboard for entering this data is preferable. Should have USB ports to connect
mouse, key board, bar code scanner.
Alarm limit status (ON/OFF) must be indicated on-screen for each parameter and actual
parameter alarm settings must be displayed on-screen when alarms are on.
Position of the displayed waveforms must be user configurable.
Waveform color changing should be user configurable.
Page 121
Dated 05.03.2009
Monitor shall permit the optional ability to receive and display information from other patient
devices such as ventilators, infusion pumps and other standalone devices.
All modules should be compatible with all monitors quoted.
Bed to bed communication between the monitors should be possible with out a central station.
Networking to central station should be possible.
Patient monitoring network shall use standard TCP/IP protocol and be capable of residing on
hospital’s network infra-structure.
Should be compatible with HIS and Should be HL7 compliant.
Monitor should have capability to accommodate remote viewing of real time waveforms through
internet.
Patient monitoring network shall be able to support up to 1,000 monitoring nodes.
Should be supplied with necessary accessories for adult , pediatric and neonatal accessories.
Should have CE and FDA certifications.
Accessories and spares
1. ECG / respiration: 5 lead ECG cable and lead wire set and 10 lead ECG cable
and lead wire set per monitor
2. NIBP: Adult: 2 sizes and Pediatric 2 sizes and neonatal, 1 size per monitor
3. SPo2 Sensor: Adult sensor with cable, pediatric sensor with cable and
neonatal sensor with cable per monitor
4. IBP: Include 10 nos of disposable pressure transducer with bracket and
interface cable per monitor
5. Temperature: Skin and nasopharyngeal probes per monitor.
6. BIS: 25 nos of disposable sensors per monitor
100
Central Monitoring
Station for multi
para monitor
Central Monitoring Station for multi para mnitor
System should have minimum 16 beds capability.
Central station should have 17” color display.
Should have drug dose and hemodynamic calculations.
It should have possible to view information such as vital signs, alarm status, arrhythmia analysis,
trended parameters, patient data etc for any selected bed from the central station.
Should have separate computer keyboard and 4 channel thermal array recorder.
should have default alarm limits and customizable parameter settings.
Central station should have full bed review capability.
Central station should be able to be configured as a bedside monitor if required.
Should have capability for HL7 interface. Should be capable of monitoring telemetry modules.
Page 122
Dated 05.03.2009
Should be supplied with a UPS>
Should have 24 hours trends.
All system should have FDA certifications.
101
Pulse Oximeter
PULSE OXIMETER
TECHNICAL FEATURES PULSE OXIMETER
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
102
Defibrillator with
monitor
It monitors from Adult to Neonate.
Oximax Technology to track Oxygen Saturation even during low perfusion
condition.
Sat seconds Alarm Management technology avoids unnecessary alarm &
distraction during monitoring of severe motion patients.
Big 7 segment LED display for better monitoring.
Dual colour LED for differentiating normal mode & alarm mode.
Internal battery provides minimum of 8 hours backup.
10 Segment LED Bar graph for pulse strength monitoring.
Facility for Computer Interface & Printer Connectivity
Individual Alarm settings for Sao2 & pulse rate.
It is compact & very light, easy to transport.
Pole mounting facility (optional) available for convenient monitoring.
Compatible with the complete range of Nellcor disposable & Reusable sensors.
Optional Footswitch Alarm Disabling facility.
Built-in Battery Charges with charges indication.
DEFIBRILLATOR (WITH MONITOR AND RECORDER)
•
Compact, portable and easy to use
•
Light weight, less than 7 kgs.
•
Biphasic truncated exponential
•
Waveform/monophasic
•
External energy selection from 2 J to 200 J, 360 diphasic optional
•
Charging time less than 5 seconds @ 200 J (with a charged battery)
•
Synchronizer and cardio version
•
Unique disarm button (in addition to automatic time delay)
•
Should come with an LCD monitor with screen freeze capacity
•
•
Should come with 3 lead ECG than can be measured from cables, hard adult external
paddles, paediatric adapters, disposable multipurpose defibrillator/ pacing/ECG paddles.
Respiration: Measured from ECG
•
Heart rate: 20 to 300 BPM with user selectable alarms.
•
Should come with external pacing, demand and asynchronous modes
•
Should have large internal memory that stores and prints 25 ECG events.
Page 123
Dated 05.03.2009
•
Long lasting sealed lead acid Ni-Cd battery: not less than 2 hours of continuous ECG
monitoring or 60 full energy discharges.
•
Battery indicator on LED display and self test on battery
Accessories needed
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
103
Deluxe paddles with remote energy selection, charge and discharge buttons on paddles.
Pediatric paddles adapters (set of 2)
Internal defibrillation paddles (spoons) cable.
Internal defibrillation sterilisable extension cable
Internal paddles (spoons), size 50 mm
Integral A/c 240 V 50 Hz charger and mains power source. Adult paddles and test paddles.
3 lead patient cable
One spare battery
Roll of 50mm recording paper x 10 rolls
5 oz tube of defibrillation gel x 5 tubes
ECG cable with leads.
Operation manual, service manual complete.
Fetal monitor
INTRAPARTUM FETAL MONITOR
Cardiotocograph machine with twin monitoring capability should meet the following specification
and capabilities:
•
FHR twin monitoring using external ultrasound
•
Direct ECG and maternal ECG measurements.
•
Uterine activity using an external toco transducer or IUP catheter.
•
Fetal movement profile parameter to record accurately the fetal movements using the
ultrasound channel without additional procedures or transducers and statistics for advance
information on fetal well-being.
•
Low ultrasound energy to the fetus.
•
Audible alert indication of fetal bradycardia and tachycardia
•
Audible indications of paper out and NST time complete.
•
Should have a feature to provide more accurate and continuous fetal heart rate (FHR)
thereby reducing the need for repositioning the ultrasound transducer.
•
Should have the facility of cross channel verification when two channels are picking up the
same signal.
•
Should have signal quality indicators guiding to obtain the strongest and most continuous
ultrasound FHR signal.
•
Built-in multi channel high resolution thermal array recorder with visual and audible paper
end detection and should annotate time of day, date and paper.
Should be supplied with the following accessories:
•
Mobile cart with two drawers and integrated mounting rail.
•
2 x ultrasound transducers
•
1 x external toco transducer
•
1 x ECG module with DEGL & MECG adapter cable
•
20 x 250 g bottle of gel.
•
100 numbers of disposable signal spiral fetal scalp electrodes, quick connect type
Page 124
Dated 05.03.2009
•
80 packs of recording paper. (to be supplied as per the usage; i.e. in a manner that they
should not get faded without being used.)
104
Deleted
105
Fetal Doppler handheld
Deleted
ULTRA SOUND FETAL DETECTOR (HANDHELD DOPPLER FETAL DETECTOR)
Fetal heart Doppler
•
•
•
•
106
Fetal Doppler –
twin
Small, lightweight, high sensitivity pocket Doppler with 2 MHz fetal Doppler probe for use
by GP or midwife for routine antenatal fetal heart detection from 10th week of gestation.
Should have built-in FHR correlation software and RS-232 connection.
Should have large LCD display and built-in loudspeaker with volume control.
Powered by normal battery which should provide at least 6 hours of use.
TWIN FETAL DOPPLER
Cardiotocograph machine with twin monitoring capability should meet the following specifications
and capabilities:• FHR twin monitoring using external ultrasound
• Direct ECG and maternal ECG measurements
• Uterine activities using an external toco transducer or IUP catheter
• Fetal movement profile parameter to record accurately the fetal movements using the
ultrasound channel without additional procedures or transducers and statistics for
advance information on fetal well-being.
• Low ultrasound energy to the featus.
• Audible alert indication of fetal bradycardia and tachycardia.
• Audible indications of paper out and NST time complete.
• Should have a feature to provide more accurate and continuous fetal heart rate (FHR)
thereby reducing the need for repositioning the ultrasound transducer.
• Should have the facility of cross channel verification when two channels are picking up
the same signal.
• Should have signal quality indicators guiding to obtain the strongest and most
continuous ultra sound FHR signal.
• Built in multi channel high resolution thermal array recorder with visual and audible
paper end detection and should annotate time of day, date and paper speed.
• Should be supplied with the following accessories:
1. mobile cart with two drawers and integrated mounting rail
2. 2 x ultrasound transducers
3. 1 x External toco transducer
4. 1 x ECG module with DECG & MECG adapter cable
5. 20 x 250g bottle of gel
6. 100 nos. of signal spiral fetal scalp electrodes, quick connect type
7. 80 packs of recording paper.
107
Diode laser
DIODE LASER PHOTO COAGULATOR
(Diode pumped, frequency densed Nd / YAG laser )
Portable solid state photo coagulator
-laser out put wavelength -532 nm(screen range)
-spot size = 50-1000um
-output power=50-2000 mW at cornea(slit lamp)
50-1000mV at cornea(L 1 0)
Page 125
Dated 05.03.2009
Out put ports= dual
Delivery systems=slit lamp (hag streat 900Bm/Bq zeiss SL 130)
Hein omega 180 LIO Operating monoscope of Zeiss, Leica,Woller, Wedel,wild, top(m) with
automatic fibre recognition system. Fibre optic probes for different application to be quoted)
Programmable memory- For procedure detail (delivered power, pulsed time, patient ID etc.)
Control – Computerised with monitor
Accessories – All essential accessories & consumables
Working voltage – 230vac, 50 Hz
108
Laparoscopy
System with
Instruments –
General Surgery
Complete Laparoscopy System for General Surgery with Instruments:
(A) LAPAROSCOPY TROLLEY
•
Mobile unit tower with 4 adjustable unit shelves, 1 drawer, 1 Compartment for unit
connection cable, 1 cable channel, 1 winding bracket, 8 power sockets, 1 isolating
transformer and power cable, 240V, 50Hz.
Camera head holder.
•
Extension arm for second monitor.
•
Device connecting cable, 150 cm long.
•
Device connecting cable, 250 cm long.
•
Universal CO2 bottle holder.
•
Laparoscopy System for General Surgery :
Specifications for High Definition Laparoscopy System
High Definition Three Chip Camera System
4. Specialty settings not less than 6
6. Signal to Noise ratio-70 db (approx)
Video Output
1. 2 DVI output
2. 2 SVHS & 1 RGB out put
3. One Composite out put
Automatic Light source
1. 220 V,300 W. Xenon Bulb(with one spare bulb)
2. Bulb Working life more than 4000 Hrs.
3. Bulb life counter on light source
4. Automatic /Manual Light Adjustment
5. Stand By Mode
6. Universal Jaw Assembly to adapt any make of fiber optic cable without adapter.
Fiber optic Cable
6.5mm x approx. 7.5 feet long Snap Fit cable
Monitor
Page 126
Dated 05.03.2009
19’’ Flat Panel Monitor Colour
Insufflator
40Liter of high flow
Microprocessor controlled unit
Soft Approach Pressure control for safe recovery of abdominal pressure
Gas heating
LCD based central display monitor with multilingual text & graphics
Audio Visual Alarms
Laparoscopes, Fully Autoclavable with working length 300mm
Wide angled distortion free view
Universal adaptor for other light sources
Yellow Glass index for optimum evenness of focus & contrast
0 degree, 10mm x 1
30 degree, 10 mm x 1
0 degree , 5mm x 1
Flexible video telescope
Instrument set:
Laparoscopic hand instruments (reusable) with 310mm working length, take apartlocking /
unlocking mechanism, rotable with interchangeable handle with monoploar diathermy attachment
( Except trocars and veress needle)
Veress needle 12 cm length
4
4
Carbon-di-oxide gas tubing
4
Trocars sleeves 11 mm
4
Reducer 11/5 mm
2
Trocars sleeves 5.5 mm
4
Trocars (pyramidal tip) 10 mm
4
4
Trocars washer 5 mm 100
100
Trocars washer mm 50
50
Laproscopic biopsy forceps 5 mm,
2
Maryland dissector 5mm with unipolar diathermy
2
Maryland dissector 5mm, high performance with bipolar
2
cutting
Atraumatic graspers, 5mm
2
Metzenbaum scissors (5cm) with unipolar diathermy
2
Metzenbaum scissors (5cm) high performance with bipolar
2
cutting
Fan retractors 5 mm
2
Laproscopic cautery lead
4
Suction irrigation device with two way valve
2
L shaped hook electrode 5mm
2
L shaped hook 5mm , high performance with bipolar cutting
Laproscopic bowel grasper 5mm, length 33-36 cm
2
Laproscopic spoon forceps 10mm length 33- 36 cm
2
Needle holder 5mm, 33 cm long
4
Laproscopic suction cannuala, 10 mm
2
Laparoscopic suction cannula 5 mm
2
Clip applicator 10 mm Large, Medium, Small Clips
109
Suction machine electric
PORTABLE ELECTRIC SUCTION MACHINE
•
•
•
•
2 Bottles, 2 Liters each
Portable with wheels
Vacuum 900m bar flow, 45L/pm noiseless
Safety devices, set of 10 filters
Page 127
Dated 05.03.2009
•
•
•
110
Anaesthesia
Workstation
Over flow protection
With tube and cannula
Power –230v, 50Hz
Technical specifications for Advanced Anesthesia Workstation
Description of function:
Anaethesia machine is used for delivering anesthesia agents to the patients during surgery and
monitors the vital signs and ventilates the patient.
Technical specifications:
Frame:
Anestesia system should be high end three gas system with three gas Oxygen, Nitrous Oxide
and Medical Air double scale flowmeter with high and low flow and minimal flow provisions.
System should be designed such that all components are integrated to minimise dead space.
Should have an independent Oxygen flow meter for Oxygen delivery and an integrated variable
flow suction unit.
Anaesthesia machine should have high grade reinforced fibre frame free from oxidation. It should
have three drawers, one retractable writing table, and rigid top tray.
System should have at least three drawers and an additional writing surface that can be easily
accessed.
Drawers shall all have the ability to lock , and shall be easily removed for the purposes of
cleaning and sterilisation.
Pipeline, cylinder and Airway pressures should all be displayed on colour coded gauges and be
visible at all times during operation.
Should have provision to attach 2 cylinders 1 each for O2 and N2O.
Should have facility of delivering basal flow of oxygen on switiching on the machine.
System shall have a second user accessible port for extraction of Anesthetic gas when using a
non- rebreathing patient circuit. System should also provide the option of returning sample gas to
the scavenging sytem with a dedicated port.
A single pneumatic/electric on/off switch should activate the gas flow and vaporization.
The unit should have a battery back up facility for the ventilator in the event of power loss and
should operate for a minimum of one hour.
In the event of complete power loss and battery failure it shall still be possible to manually
ventilate and deliver anaesthetic agent.
System ahould have easily accessible common gas outlet in the event of an emergency and for
use of alternate breathing circuits.
Should have unlockable Oxygen flush to deliver oxygen flow of approximately 40l/min.
Page 128
Dated 05.03.2009
Should have built in safety features like O2 failure alarm, N2O cutoff, Low O2 pressure etc.,
Should have motion sensitive back lighting for vaporizer dial adjustment. Should also have
mandatory illumination of the writing table.
The frame should have integrated power outlets to supply a minimum of four external devices.
Should have locking of the front castors by a single central brake mechanism.
System should be designed to mounted on pendants.
Gas Flow
The unit shall have a mechanical hypoxic guard system to control the ratio of Oxygen and
Nitrous oxide to ensure a minimum of 25% of oxygen delivery at all times to avoid delivery of
hypoxic mixture.
It shall be possible to deliver Air with only basal flow oxygen independent of the above
mentioned hypoxic control.
Gas flow shall be controlled mechanically to avoid errors during power failure and electronic
malfunction.
Visual display of the gas flow shall be by physical means independent of electrical power.
Cascade or dual flow tubes should be available for all gases to allow suitable resolution and
accurate control at low total fresh gas flows.
Flow meters should have backlight and antiglare illumination.
The unit should have an independent measurement and display of fresh gas flow offering safety
for low and minimal flow anaesthesia.
A bag arm with height and positional adjustment shall be available as an option.
Vaporizers
The unit should accommodate two vaporizers for anesthetic agent delivery to allow easy
selection of agent to be used. A third vaporiser storage area shall be available as an option.
Vaporiser should be selectatec type, tool free installation and vaporiser of our choice can be
mounted at will with interlocking facility to allow operation of only one vaporiser at one time.
Vaporizers supplied with the unit shall be routine maintenance free for the life of the product.
Should provide Isoflurane and Sevoflurane key filled vaporisers.
Breathing System
All parts of the breathing system that are in contact with patient gas should be latex free and
autoclavable. Should not require tools when dismantled for cleaning and sterilization.
Should accept large and small volume absorber canisters.
Page 129
Dated 05.03.2009
The ventilator bellows shall be clearly visible and should ascend on expiration to provide a quick
visual indicator for system leaks.
Breathing system should have the option of C02 Absorber bypass control that will allow the
absorber canisters to be removed without introducing system leaks.
Should have bag / vent selecting valve integrated onto the absorber and should automatically
turn on the ventilator when positioned to vent mode.
Ventilation
Ventilator should be pneumatically driven, electronically controlled and should be ascending
bellows type.
Ventilator should automatically change drive gas should there be a gas depletion.
Ventilator shall have a large color display with touch screen user interface.
Ventilator should have the following ventilation abilities, volume control, decelerating flow
pressure control, SIMV with pressure support and pressure support.
Ventilator should be capable of ventilating diverse range of patient groups from neonates to
patients with restictive airways with tidal volume range between 20 ml to 1500 ml with single
bellows system.
Assisted modes of breathing should be flow triggered.
Ventilator shall have an active proportional exhalation valve to prevent the potential of over
delivery during pressure modes of ventilation.
Ventilator should have a leak and compliance test that can be done independently of the full
system check.
On switching on, the ventilator system should be able to and shall give the user a choice of doing
a unit test or bypassing in the case of an emergency.
Ventilator shall compensate for fresh gas flow and compliance of the entire circuit dynamically.
Measurement at the patient end of the circuit ( sensor at the patinet end) should be provided to
compensate for small leakages and compressible volume variability that occur during ventilation.
User should also have the option of setting a pre set compliance correction where similar circuits
are used constantly.
Should provide constant fresh gas flow into the breathing circuit during the inspiratory phase as
mandatory.
Ventilator should have the ability to set and store a hospital default as well as individual user
preferences for easy selection of ventilation parameters and include screen layout, alarm
preferences and ventilation settings.
User should be able to set their own password.
Apnea alarms must be user adjustable to allow for all operating conditions and phases during
Anesthesia.
Page 130
Dated 05.03.2009
Ventilator should have the ability to display and store Patient Spirometery loops including FlowVolume and Pressure Volume curves.
Ventilator should also display waveforms for flow and airway pressure.
Ventilator shall display measured fresh gas independent of the flow meters.
Ventilator shall display a dynamic compliance measurement.
Integrated Monitoring system:
Anesthesia Monitoring system should be of modular type and capable of monitoring adult,
pediatric and neonatal patients. Should be from the same manufacturer as the anesthesia
system.
Monitor should have minimum 19” independent flat panel display with multi color touch screen
user interface to ensure all parameters are visible simultaneously.
Module rack / housing should be independent and shall be able to be placed near to the patient.
Should be capable of 8 traces display. Should have facility to monitor: ECG, NIBP, SpO2,
Respiration, Invasive pressures (3), temperatures (2), Capnography and Bispectral index. Should
have Cardiac output port enabled.
Should have automatic identification and measurement of anesthetic agents, EtCo2, O2 and
N2O and MAC value.
Should have depth of anesthesia monitoring using Bispectral index.
Cardiac output monitoring facility using thermo dilution technology with all accessories.
ECG should have capability for 3, 5 and / or 10 lead monitoring and should have built in
arrhythmia monitoring on all 12 leads
Inbuilt ST segment analysis and arrhythmia detection for all the leads should be available.
Should have haemodynamic, oxygenation and drug dose calculations.
EtCO2 should have both mainstream and side stream in one module.
Respiration should be available with Cardio Vascular Artifact filter.
OCRG should be available for monitoring neonates.
Alarm parameter should flash red in the presence of high priority alarms (e.g. ventricular
fibrillation and asystole) and flash yellow in the presence of medium or low priority alarms (e.g.
noisy signal, etc.)
24 hours trend data should be displayed.
All monitors including central station should have similar user interface for easy usage among all
clinicians. Modules should be compatible with transport monitors if required.
Monitor shall provide capability to remote view of real time waveforms via the internet. Should be
able to upgrade to softwares for electronic flow sheet and full dislcosure of all waveforms.
Page 131
Dated 05.03.2009
On-screen keyboard for entering this data is preferable. Should have USB ports to connect
mouse, key board, bar code scanner.
Alarm limit status (ON/OFF) must be indicated on-screen for each parameter and actual
parameter alarm settings must be displayed on-screen when alarms are on.
Position of the displayed waveforms and color of the waveform must be user configurable.
Monitor shall permit the optional ability to receive and display information from other patient
devices such as ventilators, infusion pumps and other standalone devices.
All modules should be compatible with all monitors quoted.
Should be supplied with necessary accessories for adult , pediatric and neonatal accessories.
Should have ISO / CE / FDA certifications.
Should be compatible with HIS and Should be HL7 compliant
Monitor should have capability to accommodate remote viewing of real time waveforms through
internet.
Accessories and spares
ECG / respiration: 5 lead ECG cable and lead wire set and 10 lead ECG cable and lead wire set
per monitor
NIBP: Adult: 2 sizes and Pediatric 2 sizes and neonatal, 1 size per monitor
SPo2 Sensor: Adult sensor with cable, pediatric sensor with cable and neonatal sensor with
cable per monitor
IBP: Include 10 nos of disposable pressure transducer with bracket and interface cable per
monitor
Temperature: Skin and nasopharyngeal probes per monitor
BIS: 25 nos of disposable sensors per monitor
Environmental factors:
Safe disposal system : AGSS – Anesthetic Gas Scavenging System, should be in place
The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient temperature of 10C to 40C and
relative humidity of 15-90%.
Shall meet IEC 60601-1-2:2001 (Or equivalent) general requirements of safety for
electromagnetic compatibility.
System ahould be imported and all components like anesthesia machine, monitor and ventilator
should be from one manufacturer.
111
Ambulatory Blood
Pressure Monitor
Ambulatory Blood Pressure Monitor
Specifications
Monitor must Be validated by BHS
ABPM must be lightweight less than 260g
Page 132
Dated 05.03.2009
Monitor must take less than 4 AA batteries
Must be able to programme at least 6 Time Intervals
Must have Windows XP compatible Software.
Monitor shall be able to measure down to 30mmhg for Diastole
ABPM must be able to interface to Computer using a Serial or USB cable
Software must be able to email report as a PDF .
Software must be able to analyze data over 48hrs
Software must allow easy selection section of data to be for analysis
Should have FDA certification
At least 5 sizes of cuff must be available for use with ABPM
Software will have inbuilt security with easily accessible Log of users.
112
Surgical diathermy
(electro cautery)
ELECTROSURGICAL UNIT
Should be suitable for all types of surgeries, General, Gyneac, Cardiac, Neuro, Urology,
etc.
Digital system with automatic monitoring.
Operating frequency: 550-350 KHz
Display: Digital
Monopolar Auto cut: 300 to 400 W
Not less than two blend modes
Provision for Spray, Dessication
Bipolar Coagulation
Facility for underwater cutting/coagulation
Vessel sealing up to 7 mm vessels
Accessories:
Double pedal foot switch
Single Pedal Foot switch
Patient plate with cable x1
Autoclavable handles: 3 sets
Electrodes: 3 sets
Bipolar forceps with cord x 1
Vessel sealing instrument for open surgery with cable
Vessel sealing instrument for laparoscopy with cutting facility.
All accessories should be from same manufacturer to ensure compatibility.
All instruments should be autoclavable or Single Use. Single Use Disposables if offered
should be sufficient for 20 surgeries.
Protection class - CF
Equipment shall be CE marked.
Complete instruction and service manual shall be supplied.
113
Fibre Optic
Laryngoscope
LARYNGOSCOPE & BLADES
•
•
•
•
•
•
114
Fibre Optic
Bronchoscope
Adult with light
Rechargeable, fiber optic laryngoscope
Wall mounting bracket for charger
Macintosh blades, size 2/3/4
Soppier blade, size 1
Two handles with each set standard and penlight
Consumable
Halogen Bulb – 3
Rechargeable cell – 2 sets
BRONCHOSCOPE
Page 133
Dated 05.03.2009
Adult with light
source
1. Digital Single Chip Endovision Camera : one ( compatible with telescopes of
Brobchoscope, Oesophagoscope , and Cystoscope)
Color system PAL / NTSC , power supply: 100 – 240 VAC , 50/60 Hz , compatible with
Pal, NTSC , automatic white balance with control ob base unit and also on camera .
Integrated zoom lens for manual and automatic control for exposure of fog. Compatible
with VHS and Comp and DVI. Minimum sensitivity 3 lux. Instrument coupling for all
rigid endoscope . Long camera cable 300 cm.Two pre set function keys on camera
for control of camera function , printer, computer , VCR and other peripherals
Consisting of:
Mains cord, with per focal zoom lens, camera head, camera control unit ( CCU) , BNC
connec ting cable , length 180 cms, 2 conn3ecting cables for connecting video printer
or recorders, DV cable, length 500 cm , 6 to 4 pin, keyboard
US English character generator.
2. Medical Color Monitor 19”(fully flat screen ) : one
Special 19 “ monitor , medical grade , Trintron colour tube, PAL , NTSC & SECAM color
system. For Bronchoscopy, Oesophagoscopy and cystoscopy
3. Telescope
A. Sraight forward telescope , 0 degree , diameter 2.9 mm , length 36 cm ,
autoclavable, fiber optic light transmission incorporated( one)
B. Straight forward telescope 0 degree , diameter 2.9 mm , length 30 cm ,
autoclavable, fiber optic light transmission incorporated ( one)
C. Straight forward telescope 0 degree , diameter 2.7mm , length 18cm autoclavable,
fiber optic light transmission incorporated ( one)
4. Bronchoscope Sheath
Should have attachment (Channels) for anaesthesia ( Ventilation) and instruments and
optical prism light.
A . Bronchoscope sheath , size 6 , outer diameter 8.2 mm ,
inner diameter 7.5 mm , length :30 cm ( one )
B Bronchoscope sheath , size 5 , outer diameter 7.8 mm ,
C. Bronchoscope sheath , size 4.5 outer diameter 7.3 mm ,
D . Bronchoscope sheath , size 4 outer diameter 6.7mm ,
inner diameter 6mm , length :30 cm ( one )
E . Bronchoscope sheath , size 3.7 outer diameter 6.4 mm ,
F. Bronchoscope sheath , size 3.5 outer diameter 6.4 mm ,
G. Bronchoscope sheath , size 4.0 outer diameter 6.7 mm ,
H. Bronchoscope sheath, size 3.7outer diameter 6.4 mm ,
I Bronchoscope sheath , size 3.5 outer diameter 5.7 mm ,
J. Bronchoscope sheath , size 3.0 outer diameter 5.0 mm ,
Page 134
Dated 05.03.2009
K Bronchoscope sheath , size 3.5 outer diameter 5.7 mm ,
inner diameter 5.0 mm , length :18.5cm( one )
L Bronchoscope sheath , size 3.0outer diameter 5.0 mm ,
inner diameter 4.3 mm , length :18.5m ( one )
M. Bronchoscope sheath , size 2.5 outer diameter 4.2 mm ,
5. Optical forceps ( compatible with above mentioned telescopes and
bronchoscope sheaths)
A. Optical alligator forceps , 2x2 teeth , with spring action handle , for controlled removal of
flat foreign bodies ( such as coins) ;(two)
B. Optical forceps, with spring action handle for controlled removal of soft foreign bodies (
such as peanuts) : ( two)
Optical alligator forceps, with forced controlled handle , for removal of hard foreign
bodies ( two)
6. Forceps( one each)
A. Forceps alligator, grasping , double action jaw , sheath diameter 1.5 mm , working
length: 35 cm
B. Forceps alligator, grasping , double action jaw , sheath diameter 1.5 mm , working
length: 35 cm , pointed serrated for coins and foreign bodies.
C. Forceps alligator , grasping double action jaw, sheath diasmeter 1.5 mm , working
length 35 cm , pointed for peanuts and soft foreign bodies.
D. Biopsy Forceps 35 Cm
7. Sponge holder:
Spring handle, working length 35 cm ( one)
8. Rigid suction tube with rubber tip( one each)
A Rigid suction tube, straight length 35 cm, diameter: 3 mm
B Rigid suction tube, straight length 25 cm. diameter: 3 mm
9. Foreign body basket with rigid handle, working length 35 cm
10. Telescope bridge for fixed position between telescope and bronchoscope.
Compatible with above mentioned telescopes and bronchoscope sheaths (Three)
11. Prosmatic light deflection with connection for fiber optic light cable, autoclave( Two)
12. Glass Window Plug ( Two)
13. Rubber Telescope Guide for use with telescopes or optical forceps (Two)
14. FLUVOG Adaptor with sliding glass window plug, sealing cap, notched lens
and keyhole opening , moveable ( two)
15. Injection canula only. Leur lock outer diameter – 3.5 mm , for use with
bronchoscope tubes ( for positive pressure assisted ventilation ( (two)
Injection canula only. Leur lock outer diameter – 2.7 mm , for use with
bronchoscope tubes ( for positive pressure assisted ventilation ( (Two)
16. Instrument guide for suction catheter (Two)
17.Adaptor from bronchoscope to any type of pediatric respiration equipment ( Two)
18. Sealing plig for venti;ation attachment of bronchoscopes( Two)
19. Adjustable magnifier, swing – away type, autoclave (One)
Page 135
Dated 05.03.2009
20. Fiber optic light cable size 3.5mm, length 180 cm (Two)
21. Cold light fountain twin bulb Halogen 150 watts Power supply 220 VAC, 50 Hz. (One)
Note:
1. Supplier company will have to give training to the doctors and the staff of operation
theatre, regarding the handling and maintenance of the instrument on site.
2. Supplier should have local service station to provide immediate repairs of any
breakdown of the instruments and to provide the spare parts and disposables articles ,
as and when required by the users of the supplied instruments.
3. All theabove instruments and equipments must be having relevant CE certification as
well as IEC certification , applicable to Medical Instruments and equipments.
4. All eligible companies should be an OEM ANS SHOULD ALSO HAVE iso 9001
certification or EN 46001 certification . Additionally instruments should have been
tested in accordance with IEC 601 -1 international. Apart from the companies having
their own service centers in India will be highly preferred.
115
Fibre Optic
Bronchoscope
Paed
PEDIATRIC BRONCHOSCOPE
1. Digital Single Chip Endovision Camera : one ( compatible with telescopes of
Brobchoscope, Oesophagoscope , and Cystoscope)
Color system PAL / NTSC , power supply: 100 – 240 VAC , 50/60 Hz , compatible with
Pal, NTSC , automatic white balance with control ob base unit and also on camera .
Integrated zoom lens for manual and automatic control for exposure of fog. Compatible
with VHS and Comp and DVI. Minimum sensitivity 3 lux. Instrument coupling for all
rigid endoscope . Long camera cable 300 cm.Two pre set function keys on camera
for control of camera function , printer, computer , VCR and other peripherals
Consisting of :
Mains cord, with per focal zoom lens, camera head, camera control unit ( CCU) , BNC
connec ting cable , length 180 cms, 2 conn3ecting cables for connecting video printer
or recorders, DV cable, length 500 cm , 6 to 4 pin, keyboard
US English character generator.
2. Medical Color Monitor 19”( fully flat screen ) : one
Special 19 “ monitor , medical grade , Trintron colour tube, PAL , NTSC & SECAM color system.
For Bronchoscopy, Oesophagoscopy and cystoscopy
3. Telescope
A Sraight forward telescope , 0 degree , diameter 2.9 mm , length 36 cm ,
autoclavable, fiber optic light transmission incorporated( one)
B Straight forward telescope 0 degree , diameter 2.9 mm , length 30 cm , autoclavable,
Page 136
Dated 05.03.2009
C. Straight forward telescope 0 degree , diameter 2.7mm , length 18cm autoclavable,
4. Bronchoscope Sheath
Should have attachment (Channels) for anaesthesia ( Ventilation) and instruments and
optical prism light.
A . Bronchoscope sheath , size 6 , outer diameter 8.2 mm,
B Bronchoscope sheath , size 5 , outer diameter 7.8 mm ,
C. Bronchoscope sheath , size 4.5 outer diameter 7.3 mm ,
D . Bronchoscope sheath , size 4 outer diameter 6.7mm ,
inner diameter 6mm , length :30 cm ( one )
E . Bronchoscope sheath , size 3.7 outer diameter 6.4 mm ,
F. Bronchoscope sheath , size 3.5 outer diameter 6.4 mm ,
G. Bronchoscope sheath , size 4.0 outer diameter 6.7 mm ,
H. Bronchoscope sheath, size 3.7outer diameter 6.4 mm ,
I Bronchoscope sheath , size 3.5 outer diameter 5.7 mm ,
J. Bronchoscope sheath , size 3.0 outer diameter 5.0 mm ,
K Bronchoscope sheath , size 3.5 outer diameter 5.7 mm ,
inner diameter 5.0 mm , length :18.5cm( one )
L Bronchoscope sheath , size 3.0outer diameter 5.0 mm ,
M. Bronchoscope sheath , size 2.5 outer diameter 4.2 mm ,
Page 137
Dated 05.03.2009
5. Optical forceps ( compatible with above mentioned telescopes and
bronchoscope sheaths)
C. Optical alligator forceps , 2x2 teeth , with spring action handle , for controlled removal of
flat foreign bodies ( such as coins) ;(two)
D. Optical forceps, with spring action handle for controlled removal of soft foreign bodies (
such as peanuts) : ( two)
E. Optical alligator forceps, with forced controlled handle , for removal of hard foreign
bodies ( two)
6. Forceps( one each)
D. Forceps alligator, grasping , double action jaw , sheath diameter 1.5 mm , working
length: 35 cm
E. Forceps alligator, grasping , double action jaw , sheath diameter 1.5 mm , working
length: 35 cm , pointed serrated for coins and foreign bodies.
F. Forceps alligator , grasping double action jaw, sheath diasmeter 1.5 mm , working
length 35 cm , pointed for peanuts and soft foreign bodies.
D. Biopsy Forceps 35 Cm
7. Sponge holder:
Spring handle, working length 35 cm ( one)
8. Rigid suction tube with rubber tip( one each)
A Rigid suction tube, straight length 35 cm, diameter: 3 mm
B Rigid suction tube, straight length 25 cm. diameter: 3 mm
9. Foreign body basket with rigid handle, working length 35 cm
10. Telescope bridge for fixed position between telescope and bronchoscope.
Compatible with above mentioned telescopes and bronchoscope sheaths ( Three)
11. Prosmatic light deflection with connection for fiber optic light cable, autoclave( Two)
12. Glass Window Plug ( Two)
13. Rubber Telescope Guide for use with telescopes or optical forceps (Two)
14. FLUVOG Adaptor with sliding glass window plug, sealing cap, notched lens
and keyhole opening , moveable ( two)
15. Injection canula only. Leur lock outer diameter – 3.5 mm , for use with
bronchoscope tubes ( for positive pressure assisted ventilation ( (two)
Injection canula only. Leur lock outer diameter – 2.7 mm , for use with bronchoscope
tubes ( for positive pressure assisted ventilation ( (Two)
16. Instrument guide for suction catheter (Two)
17.Adaptor from bronchoscope to any type of pediatric respiration equipment ( Two)
18. Sealing plig for venti;ation attachment of bronchoscopes( Two)
Page 138
Dated 05.03.2009
19. Adjustable magnifier, swing – away type, autoclave (One)
20. Fiber optic light cable size 3.5mm, length 180 cm (Two)
21. Cold light fountain twin bulb Halogen 150 watts Power supply
220 VAC, 50 Hz. ( One)
Note:
1. Supplier company will have to give training to the doctors and the staff of operation
theatre, regarding the handling and maintenance of the instrument on site.
2. Supplier should have local service station to provide immediate repairs of any
breakdown of the instruments and to provide the spare parts and disposables articles ,
as and when required by the users of the supplied instruments.
3. All theabove instruments and equipments must be having relevant CE certification as
well as IEC certification , applicable to Medical Instruments and equipments.
4. All eligible companies should be an OEM ANS SHOULD ALSO HAVE iso 9001
certification or EN 46001 certification . Additionally instruments should have been
tested in accordance with IEC 601 -1 international. Apart from the companies having
their own service centers in India will be highly preferred.
116
Infusion pump
INFUSION PUMPS
Basic Features:• Weight Equal or less than 1.4 kg,
• Size must be 249x68x152 mm or lesser
• Flow rate range 0.01 – 999.9 ml/h
• 0.01 – 99.99 ml/h in increments of 0.01 ml/h
• 100.0 – 99.99 ml/h in increments of 0.01 ml/h
• Syringe sizes :- 2/3; 5; 10; 20; 30; 50/50 ml
• Online rate modification without delivery interruption
• Accuracy of set delivery rate equal or less than +/-2% including recommended
syringe.
• Bolus application Delivery rate 1 – 1,800 ml/h; max, Bolus Volume 99.99 ml
• Bolus on demand with manual selection
• Bolus with volume/dose pre-selection
• Bolus delivery with time or-selection (1 min – 24 h)
• Should be Automated syringe change for optimal start up characteristics
• Standardized User Interface for all Syringe & volumetric infusion pumps.
• Dose calculation: Automatic calculation of the delivery rate based on dose
entries in mg, ug, IE or mmol, weight-and/or time related
• Key pad:- Clearly structured not more than 8 keys for fast and intuitive operation
• Pump must have facility for stacking upto three pumps together on single pole
clamp.
• Pole clamp must be rotated so as to connect either in IV pole or in bed handle.
• During infusion, following parameters must be displayed for better therapy
control
o Infusion Rate
o Occlusion Pressure limit setting
o Current occlusion pressure
o Battery level
o Mains mode
o Infused volume
o Infusion therapy time
Page 139
Dated 05.03.2009
o Infusion status
Safety Features:• Integrated piston brake within syringe drive to prevent free flow during syringe
change.
• Occlusion alarm pressure limits must be Adjustable in 9 steps (0.1 – 1.2 bar or
• Occlusion Pressure setting must be displayed in mmHg
• Pump must have facility to lock keypad in for any setting change
• Pump must have facility to lock keypad in for any setting change as well as
switch-off key protection
• Medication error preventions through dose limits referring to selected drug
• Computer assisted software for configuring 700 plus drugs for all safety related
parameters setting.
• International Classification according to:o IEC/EN60601-1 – type
o CE defibrillator proof protective class II
o 93/42/EWG – Class II b
o EMC EN60601-1-2
o Moisture protection IP22 (drip protected for horizontal usage)
Power Supply:o Mains adaptor with rated voltage from 100…240 V AC 50/60 Hz for stand alone
operation
Battery:o Rechargeable NIMH battery pack with operating time approx 8 h at 25 ml/h
Upgradable Features:o Connecting & Monitoring via RS232, Ethernet, wireless lan, usb,
o MRI compatible
117
Ventilator BIPAP
Ventilator Transport and BiPAP
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
118
Should have Frequency control 0 to 40-60 b/min
Tidal Volume Control 20ml-1200ml
Pressure Monitor 0 - 100cm H2O
2 Point blender 100% or 50% O2
Adjustable relief pressure with audible alarm
Add on PEEP option
Rugged structural packing
Anti shock mounting for gauge and internal pneumatics
Disconnection alarm.
Videocolposcope
COLPOSCOPE – VIDEO
•
For diagnostic examinations and post operative treatment
•
Fixable at examination chair
With the following facilities:
•
Development as stereo-microscope with excellent optical system.
•
Universal oculars, suitable for wearers of spectacles.
•
Magnification exchange adj. in 5 steps
•
Wide range of microscope focusing, tilting and swiveling
•
Observation with fixed magnification.
TECHNICAL DATA
Page 140
Dated 05.03.2009
119
Entenox delivery
unit
•
Illumination
:
Halogen lamp 6V/75W-100 W
•
Filter
:
Red-free, exchangeable
•
Magnification
:
4X, 7X, 12.5X, 22X, 40X
•
Dia. of illuminated field
:
38 mm
•
Dia. of visual field
:
18 mm
•
Ocular magnification
:
16x
•
Oblique tube 45
:
f = 160 mm
•
Focusing range
:
+/- 11 mm
•
Power supply
:
240 V, 50 Hz.
•
Quote video system as optional:
•
3 chip video camera with beam splits
•
Video signal processing system
•
Video monitor
•
DVD Recorder
•
All essential accessories.
•
Complete service manual
º
Entenox delivery unit
Specification:
Entonox is a homogenous gas mixture and is supplied to the following specification:
Mixture of 50% Nitrous Oxide EP / 50% Oxygen EP.
Mixture tolerance +/- 2% of either component on total mixture.
Physical Data:
Physical state in cylinder: Gas
Specific gravity of gas (15oC 1013mb): 1.319
Density of gas (15oC 1013mb): 1.615kg/m3
Combustion characteristics: Non flammable but strongly supports combustion .
Please quote an appropriate delivery system for Enterox.
120
Cysto-urethroresectoscope (set)
CYSTO-RESECTOSCOPE
1. Cystoscope sheath with obturator, 19 Fr, with oblique beak, with continuous irrigation
X1
2. Cystoscope sheath with obturator, 21/22 fr, with oblique beak, with continuous
irrigation X1
3. Bridge, two channels,
4. Telescope 0º, High Magnification, sapphire cover glass for scratch resistance, X 1;
5. Telescope 30º, High Magnification, sapphire cover glass for scratch resistance, X 1;
6. Fiberoptic light cable 1; 5 mm 230 cm long or more
7. Light source, Xenon 1; 300 watt
8. Biopsy forceps X 3;
9. Resectoscope sheath with obturator, 26 Fr, inner tube for continuous irrigation, with
ceramic insulator. Snap on fixing of sheaths to avoid accidental detachment, X 1
Page 141
Dated 05.03.2009
10. Visual obturator fitting into 26/27 Fr sheath X 1
11. Resectoscope (working element) for loops, finger action type, with a slot for high
frequency cord, single stem type X 1
12. Urethrotme sheath with obturator, guide tube, 21 Fr X 1
13. Cold knife, straight 1
14. Coagulating electrode, ball end, 6
15. Ellick evacuator 2
121
CYSTOSCOPE
CYSTOSCOPE
1. Cystoscope sheath with obturator, 17 fr, with oblique beak, with continuous irrigation 1
2. Cystoscope sheath with obturator, 20 fr, with oblique beak, with continuous irrigation 1
3. Bridge, two channels,
4. Telescope 0º, High Magnification, sapphire cover glass for scratch resistance, - 1
5. Telescope 30º, High Magnification, sapphire cover glass for scratch resistance, - 1
6. Fiberoptic light cable -1
7. Light source, Xenon- 1. 300 W
8. Biopsy forceps -1
122
Electrical
stimulator
(interferential
Theraphy)
ELECTRICAL STIMULATOR
For physiotherapy treatment with different current types including Galvanic, faradic, tens,
dia-dynamic, interferential therapy, mono-phase, Interferencial,
TENS, and diphase current, continuous adjustable current intensity.
Wave forms:
• Galvanic (G), Faradic surge, rectangular pulsed with 2-5 currency, triangular pulsed, monophase fixe (MF), Diphase fixe (DF), Longnes period(LP), Courtes periods (CP), CP isodynamic (CPid).
• Pulse duration: 0.01-1000 ms, cont. adjust
• Pulse interval: 1-5000 ms, cont. adjust
•
Including accessories:
• 1 pcs electrode cable, with connector
• 2 pcs rubber electrodes, 60x80mm
• 1 pcs point electrode, dia 5 mm and complete set of accessories.
• Unit should be with capability of memories and recorders and connected with ultrasound
therapy apparatus.
• Mains supply-240v+10%50Hz
• With full accessories
123
124
Shortwave
diathermy unit 250 W Therapy
SHORT WAVE DIATHERMY
Microwave therapy
unit
CONTINUOUS & PULSED MICROWAVE THERAPY UNIT
Continuous and pulsed short wave diathermy specification:
•
Mains supply : 240V±10% 50Hz
•
Max.continuous H.F output power 250 w
•
Max.pulsed H.F output power 1000w
•
Max variation of output power during 4 hours continuous operation less than 15%
•
General frequency 27, 12 MHz±0.6%
•
Timer 0-30 minutes with acoustic signal and automatic switch off
•
Full set of electrode elements excess including inductive electrodes-flexiplode.
•
Circoplode with fixed adapter.
Generator:
•
Frequency
•
Pulsed output
: At least 2400 MHz
: At least 1500 w
Page 142
Dated 05.03.2009
Cont. output
Time
•
•
: max 250w continuously adjustable.
: At least 0-25
Accessories:
•
Self retaining radiator arm
•
HF cable
The vendor should include any other accessories that are required.
125
EtO Steriliser
ETO Sterilizer.
1.1 "Ethylene oxide sterilizer" is defined as equipment which uses ethylene oxide as a biocide
to destroy bacteria, viruses, fungus and other unwanted organisms. Ethylene oxide is used in
sterilization of items that are heat and moisture sensitive
2.1
The ETO gas sterilizer should be fully automatic type for sterilization of heat sensitive
goods such as anesthetic tubing and other plastic disposable materials etc.
3
3.1
The sterilization chamber should be double walled, corrosion and gas resistant of
suitable alloy. The inner surface should be smoothly finished to minimize gas deposits.
The chamber shall be insulated against heat emission and the jacket shall be
connected to the warm water circulation arrangement.
3.2
The sterilizer door shall have a quick release locking arrangement with door opening.
Suitable safety interlocking arrangement shall be provided for the door so that the
sterilization process does not start unless the door is properly locked in position and
during the program run it should not open.
3.3
The sterilizer shall be provided with a suitable vacuum pump and gas trap to separate
and evacuate the gas.
3.4
The sterilizer shall be provided with an automatic programmable panel with memory for
preset operating sequence of all programs of operation. Monitoring instruments should
be provided with the ETO for proper operation and monitoring of sterilizing process
such as pressure manometer, thermometer, limit selector for temperature and pressure
etc.
3.5
The ETO sterilizer should be able to operate for the minimum essential following cycles
programmes:
a. Sterilization cycle for heat sensitive objects that ensure temperature from 40-75 oC
with subsequent aeration for protection of the operating personnel.
b. Aeration cycle/program to extract residual gas out of the sterilized objects after
each sterilization cycle.
c. Automatic chamber evacuation cycle with subsequent venting before releasing the
door lock for opening, thereby prohibiting exposure of the operating personnel by
Page 143
Dated 05.03.2009
gas dissolving from the chamber walls during shutdown period.
d. Gas disposal arrangement / catalytic converter.
3.6
Capacity: 3-5 cubic feet/per cycle with capacity to process 8-12 cubic feet/24 hr. Firm
should clearlystate cycle time (Time from start to finish including aeration time) so that
capacity to process total load in 24 hr can be calculated.
Bench top/ floor model
3.7
TECHNICAL DATA:
a. Sterilization gas: Ethylene oxide.
b. Sterilization method: Cold sterilization of heat sensitive materials.
c. Operating temp. Range: 40 to 75 oC
d. No. of doors: One.
e. dearerator
4
System Configuration Accessories, spares and consumables
4.1
System as specified-
4.2
Sterilization basket of suitable size 1 No.
4.3
ETO gas cartridges 25 Nos.
4.4
deaerator, air compressor if needed.
4.5
Packing Material with Chemical Indicator of all sizes one roll each
4.6
Sealing Machine Heavy Duty - 1 No.
5
Environmental factors
5.1
The entire unit & Gas cartridges should be EPA (Environmental Protection Agency or
certified for Government authority in India. Statutory concerned with Environment
protection & occupational safety regulations applicable)
5.2
Shall meet IEC-60601-1-2:2001(Or Equivalent BIS) General Requirements of Safety for
Electromagnetic Compatibility. Or should comply with 89/366/EEC; EMC directive.
5.3
The unit shall be capable of being stored continuously in ambient temperature of 0 - 50
deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
5.4
The unit shall be capable of operating continuously in ambient temperature of 10 40deg C and relative humidity of 15-90%
6
Power Supply
6.1
Power input to be 180-270VAC, 50Hz
6.2
On line UPS of suitable rating with voltage regulation and spike protection for 60
minutes back up.
7
Standards, Safety and Training
7.1
Shall meet International Organization for Standardization. Biological evaluation of
medical devices. Part 7: ethylene oxide sterilization residuals [standard]. 1st ed. ISO
10993-7. 1995 (reaffirmed 2001). OR Any international/ National standard for ETO
Page 144
Dated 05.03.2009
Safety.
7.2
Local Pollution Control Board clearance is mandatory.
7.3
Deleted
7.4
Manufacturer/Supplier should have ISO certification for quality standards.
7.5
Electrical safety conforms to standards for electrical safety IEC-60601-1 General
Requirements
8
Documentation
8.1
User/Technical/Maintenance manuals to be supplied in English.
8.2
Certificate of calibration and inspection.
8.3
List of Equipments available for providing calibration and routine maintenance support
8.4
List of important spare parts and accessories with their part number and costing.
8.5 Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly maintenance
Log book with instructions for daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly maintenance
126
Transport
incubator
TRANSPORT INCUBATOR
•
Built-in membrane pump & receiver bottle complete within the incubator chassis, with ECG,
SPO2, NIBP monitor.
Oxygen flow meter & 1 lit O2 cylinder with clear front panel display of pressure completely
integrated within the incubator.
Manual temp. setting with over temp (40º C) audible & visual alarm.
•
Internal lighting
•
Removable infant tray.
•
Special straps to fix the transport incubator securely to all stretchers in both ambulance &
helicopters.
Harness to secure the infant on the tray.
•
•
•
•
Power supply: Main supply and dry battery (12V) or mains power supply of
ambulance/automobile/helicopter.
Should have a 25x10 mm rail at the back of transport incubator.
•
Relative humidity up to 60% C distilled water.
•
Weight with 1 lit O2 tank not to exceed 25 kgs.
•
Neonatal ventilator, built-in compressor with time pressure cycle.
•
Unit should be completely detachable from trolley for putting in plane.
•
Unit should be complete with all accessories and startup kit, extra dry battery for 12 hours
work, probes electrodes etc.
•
127
WATER
TREATMENT
SYSTEM FOR
WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM FOR PRODUCING DISINFECTANT SOLUTION
Page 145
Dated 05.03.2009
SYSTEM FOR
PRODUCING
DISINFECTANT
SOLUTION
The system should be automatically operated. Solenoid valves for hydraulic open/ close of
valve. Level switches to start/ stop the unit automatically
Cold sterilization of medical instruments
Surface cleaning
Production of sterile water
Disinfecting linen using it as a chemical addition in washing machines
Air disinfecting and clean rooms
System should have production capacity of Nuetral Electrolyzed Water 25-50 litres per hour and
Alkaline Water ( Catholyte) 0- 25 Ltrs per Hour.
Parameters for biocidal liquids
Nuetral Electrolyzed Water -: pH: 6.8 – 8.5; ORP: > 800mV; Free Chlorine: 50 -500 ppm
Alkaline Water -: pH: 11-13; ORP: <-900mV
Main Water:
Volume: 50 ltrs per hour
Supply pressure: 1,5-2 bar
Water Hardness: < 17ppm CaCo3
Power supply 240 Vac
Weight : not more than 30 Kg
128
Infant Ventillator
INFANT/NEONATAL VENTILATOR
Microprocessor controlled
Modes: Assit/control – SIMV /CPAP
Pressure support-active in volume – SIMV /CPAP and pressure control
•
•
•
Tidal volume 2 to 350 ml at least
Inspiratory time 0.10 to 3.00 sec
Breath rate – 0 to 150 LPM
Flow to suit infant requirement
Time cycled
Volume cycled
High pressure limit:
Time cycled:
3 to 8 cm H2O
Volume cycled:
3 to 120 cm H2O
• PEEP/CPAP: 0 to 24 cm H2O …off
• Assist sensitivity
• Flow trigged :
0.2 to 5.0 LPM, off
• Pressure triggered
1 to 50 cm H2O, off
• Termination sensitivity time cycled, flow synchronized 5% to 25% of peak, flow off
• Manual breath x 1
• Oxygen percent 2.1% to 100 %
• Over pressure relief 0 to 130 10cm H2O)
Monitors & indicators:
• Breath rate power, inspiratory time, external D.C I/E ratio, patient effort peak inspiratory
•
•
•
Page 146
Dated 05.03.2009
pressure, demand. Mean airways pressure, proximal pressure manometer
Alarms:
•
High pressure limit, 3 to 120 cm H2O
•
Low peak pressure, 3 to 120 cm H2O
• Low PEEP/CPAP pressure, 9 to +24 cm H2O
High/prolonged pressure
•
Time cycled high pressure limit + 10 cm H2O
•
Volume cycled 3 to 120 cm H2O
•
All modes PEEP/CPAP +6 cm H2O
•
Apnea interval 20, 40 and 60 sec
• Low inlet gas pressure system pressure <2.5 OD 27.5> PSIG red light indicator lamp.
• Circuit fault red light indicator lamp
Pre set values
•
Minimum expiratory time, all modes 250 msec.
•
Minimum expiratory time, time cycled 100 msec., volume cycled 150 msec.
•
Demand flow: Sensitivity 1cm H2O below. Baseline pressure.
Flow range 120 LPM max Requirement
129
Operating Laparoscope:
Laparoscopy System
with instruments for
Gyneac Surgery
(A) LAPAROSCOPY TROLLEY
•
Mobile unit tower with 4 adjustable unit shelves, 1 drawer, 1 Compartment for unit
connection cable, 1 cable channel, 1 winding bracket, 8 power sockets, 1 isolating
transformer and power cable, 240V, 50Hz.
Camera head holder.
•
Extension arm for second monitor.
•
Device connecting cable, 150 cm long
•
Device connecting cable, 250 cm long
•
Universal CO2 bottle holder.
•
Operating Laparoscopy System:
Specifications for High Definition Laparoscopy System
High Definition Three Chip Camera System
4. Specialty settings not less than 6
6. Signal to Noise ratio-70 db (approx)
Page 147
Dated 05.03.2009
Video Output
1. 2 DVI output
2. 2 SVHS & 1 RGB out put
3. One Composite out put
Automatic Light source
1. 220 V, 300 W. Xenon Bulb(with one spare bulb)
2. Bulb Working life more than 4000 hrs
3. Bulb life counter on light source
4. Automatic /Manual Light Adjustment
5. Stand By Mode
6. Universal Jaw Assembly to adapt any make of fiber optic cable without adapter.
Fiber optic Cable
6.5mm x approx. 7.5 feet long Snap Fit cable
Monitor
19’’ Flat Panel Monitor Colour
Insufflator
40Liter of high flow
Microprocessor controlled unit
Soft Approach Pressure control for safe recovery of abdominal pressure
Gas heating
LCD based central display monitor with multilingual text & graphics
Audio visual Alarm
Laparoscopes, Fully Autoclavable with working length 300mm
Wide angled distortion free view
Universal adaptor for other light sources
Yellow Glass index for optimum evenness of focus & contrast
0 degree, 10mm x 1
30 degree, 10 mm x 1
0 degree, 5mm x 1
Flexible video telescope
Instrument Set:
Laparoscopic hand instruments (reusable) with 310mm working length, take apartlocking /
unlocking mechanism, rotable with interchangeable handle with monoploar diathermy
attachment ( Except trocars and veress needle)
4
4
Carbon-di-oxide gas tubing
4
Trocars sleeves 11 mm
4
Reducer 11/5 mm
2
Trocars sleeves 5.5 mm
4
4
4
Trocars washer 5 mm 100
100
Trocars washer mm 50
50
Laproscopic biopsy forceps 5 mm,
2
Maryland dissector 5mm with unipolar diathermy
2
Maryland dissector 5mm, high performance with bipolar
2
cutting
Atraumatic graspers, 5mm
2
Metzenbaum scissors (5cm) with unipolar diathermy
2
Metzenbaum scissors (5cm) high performance with bipolar
2
cutting
Fan retractors 5 mm
2
Laproscopic cautery lead
4
Page 148
Dated 05.03.2009
Suction irrigation device with two way valve
L shaped hook electrode 5mm
L shaped hook 5mm , high performance with bipolar cutting
Laproscopic bowel grasper 5mm, length 33-36 cm
Laproscopic spoon forceps 10mm length 33- 36 cm
Needle holder 5mm, 33 cm long
Laproscopic suction cannuala, 10 mm
Laparoscopic suction cannula 5 mm
Clip applicator 10 mm Large, Medium, Small Clips
2
2
2
2
4
2
2
Instruments for Gynae surgery: 1. Myoma Screw 10mm x 2
2. Myoma Screw 5mm x 2
3. Bipolar Forceps 5mm Cilpenger type x 2
4. Bipolar Foceps 5mm Paddle type x 2
5. Bipolar cable x 2
6. Kelly Dissecting Forceps Long Jaws 5mm x 2
7. Fenestrated Long Jaw Forceps 5mm x 2
8. Dissecting & Grasping Forceps for ovaries 5mm x 2
9. PCOD Dissecting Needle 5mm x 2
130
Hysteroscopy
System
A) HYSTEROSCOPY SET & HYSTEROMAT
1. Hysteroscopy set – telescope 30 deg.
Diameter 4mm length 30 cm, Autoclavable
x 1 No.
2. Examination sheath Diameter approx 5.4 mm
x 1 No.
3. Continuous flow operating sheath approx 6mm
x 1 No.
4. Operating sheath approx 5.4 mm
x 1 No.
5. Continuous flow operating sheath approx 6mm
x 1 No.
6. Biopsy forceps, trough cutting single action
jaws, approx 5FR
x 2 No.
7. Scissor, signal action jaws, approx 5FR
x 2 No.
8. Biopsy and grasping forceps approx 5FR
x 2 No.
9. Hysteroscope pump for Diagnostic & operative
Hysteroscopy, Roller Pump working 220 – 240
VAC, pressure pre – Selection : -up to 200mm
Hg, Flow regulation: 0 – 500ml/mm. Equipments
should be supplied along with set for at least 300
procedures.
x 1 No.
10. Essential accessories
i.
One pedal foot switch one stage
ii.
Suction bottle 51
x 1 No.
iii.
Bottle cap
x 1 No.
iv.
Bottle stand
x 1 No.
v.
Bottle stand holder
x 1 No.
x 1 No.
B) RESECTOSCOPE
Page 149
Dated 05.03.2009
To be compatible with Hysteroscope mentioned above.
1. Working element set consisting of
x 1 set
i. One working element set.
ii. Two cutting loops.
iii. Two coagulating electrode.
iv. Two high frequency cord.
v. One protection tube.
2. Resectoscope sheath including connecting tubes
for in and out flow, approx 26 FR oblique beak,
inner tube with ceramic insulation, rotatable
x 1 No.
3. Standard obturator for use with approx 26FR sheath x 1 No.
C) Instruments for Tubectomy:
Single Puncher
Ring Applicator
Hi-quality Silicon Rings – 1000 Nos.
131
Steriliser Dental Cassette
Autoclave
DENTAL AUTOCLAVE TABLE TOP
•
High speed autoclave table top model with built-in steam generator, with vacuum
pump/ejected for drying.
Automatic monitoring and adjusting inside the chamber and automatic programs
•
St.st rectangular chamber for accommodating at least 6 dental trays (not less than 15 litre).
•
Sliding hinged door with locking system.Temperature range 100 to 135 deg
132
•
Timer range 0 to 99 min, pressure up to 3 bar.
•
Temperature range 100 to 134 deg
•
Total cycle time for 1 Kg. of unwrapped instrument within 3.5 min. at 134 deg.
Sterilizer Dental Electric
Dental sterilizer
1.
Mains voltage shall be 220V - 50hz 1,300 watt.
The power cord shall have a minimum length of
1,2 meters. The steriliser shall not require an electrical
current higher than 13 amps.
2.
The water reservoir shall have a capacity of 4 litres
that is sufficient for approximately 30 cycles.
The reservoir shall have a float that reads the
level of the water that indicates on the display
when the reservoir needs to be refilled
The water reservoir shall have a conductivity probe to
ensure that the quality of the water used is acceptable
Page 150
Dated 05.03.2009
3.
The sterilisation chamber shall have a capacity of at least
5 litres and be a removable cassette, constructed of stainless steel.
The cassettes internal dimensions shall be 38 cm x 18 cm x 8 cm.
The cassette shall act as the sterilisation chamber and have
a stainless steel grid
4.
The sterilizer shall function with a micro - processor
which controls a defined volume of distilled water , that
is pumped into a boiler, converted into steam, and then
injected into the sterilising chamber which will actively force
99% of the air from the chamber.
The micro processor shall accurately control and monitor
the sterilising temperature and pressure
5.
The distilled water shall not be recycle but used only once
every cycle and automatically ejected through a cooling coil
into a waste bottle.
6.
The cassette shall be thermally insulated to prevent heat loss for
fast heating and cooling to minimise the overall processing time.
7.
The steriliser shall have a keypad, which controls the
pre-set programs and the start control with a single touch
7:1
7:2
Unwrapped Cycle.
To sterilise unwrapped instruments the sterilising cycle
shall be constant at 136 degrees C for 3.5 minutes.
The total cycle time including warm up, pressurisation
and de-pressurisation shall not be more than be 11 minutes.
The temperature shall never exceed 137 degrees.
Wrapped Cycle.
To sterilise wrapped instruments the sterilising cycle
shall be constant at 136 degrees C for 6 minutes.
The total cycle time including warm up, pressurisation
and de-pressurisation shall not be more than 15 minutes.
7:3
Cycle for delicate items.
To sterilise certain rubber, plastic and delicate items the
sterilising cycle shall be constant at 121 degrees C
for 15 minutes.
The total cycle time including warm up pressurisation
and de-pressurisation shall not be more than 24 minutes.
8. L. C. Display for monitoring the systems throughout the
processing cycle including the temperature, pressure and
time elapsed.
9.
The unit shall also have a 60 minute air drying program that
switches on automatically after the completion of any cycle.
Page 151
Dated 05.03.2009
There shall be a manual keypad override abort control, that
allows safe interruption of any sterilising cycle, at any stage
of the cycle, that can be operated by a single touch.
10. The unit shall have the facility for a internal printer, external printer
or data logger that captures the date, time, temperature and cycle number
13. The unit shall have a level indicator to ensure the correct
levelling of the unit.
14. The microprocessor shall regulate functions to eliminate
over heating and temperature spikes to ensure optimal
sterilising conditions and ensure the correct operating sequence.
15. The steriliser shall be validated with both a biological monitor
and the Bowie Dick test
16. The steriliser shall have a .042 micron
biological filter, for filtering the air entering the chamber
during the drying cycle
17. The external dimensions of the unit shall not exceed
55 cm x 41.5 cm x 19 cm and shall have an external design
which will accommodate easy handling and transportation.
18. The weight of the unit shall not exceed 33 kg
19. Original Operators Manuals shall be supplied and not copies.
20. If the user has not seen the equipment, state whether it will
be possible to evaluate the tendered equipment.
133
Plaster saw with
suction machine
PLASTER CUTTER WITH ALL ACCESSORIES
1.The plaster cutter hand piece should be light weight and ergonomic design.
2. The cutter should have two speed control and with less noise
3.The cutter should have impact resistant housing and it should be versatile i.e
Can be used with vacuum or directly plugged into the wall/point.
4.The vacuum should have mobile on 5 castors for stability and easy transportation.
5.The vacuum should have easy facility to connect the hose with the cast cutter.
6.Locking mechanism should be there in the system to lock the hose with the cutter.
7.The length of the hose should be 8 feet.
8.One complete system should be supplied with following items/accessoriesi)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
134
PERSONAL
PROTECTION
Cast Cutter Hand piece-1 No.
Cast Cutter blades-20 Nos(different sizes)
Cast Vacuum with hose and Mobile stand-1 No.
Blade mounting Toll-2 Nos
Small Cast Spreader-1 No
Large Cast Spreader-1 No.
PERSONAL PROTECTION SYSTEM For Orthopaedic surgeon
Page 152
Dated 05.03.2009
SYSTEM
Protection system for infection control for Operation Theatre.
The helmet protection system should have fan cooling facility. The transparent hood in the
helmet system should not have fish eye effect.
The system should be light weight
Noiseless cooling facility in the helmets
Battery provided with system should be light weight
Battery charger should be 8 station
The system should be comfortable to wear.
One complete system should be supplied with following accessories1.Helmet -6 nos
2.Battery Charger 8 station-1 No
3.Battery packs-12 Nos
4.Hood-500 Nos
5.Wall Rack-2 Nos
135
Patient trolley for
EMERGENCY & RECOVERY TROLLEY FOR GENERAL PROCEDURE
General Procedure
& emergency and Stretcher size : 1830mm Lx 555W. Trolley should be fitted of X-Ray permeable removable two
recovery trolley
section stretcher, backrest raised on ratchet. Trolley should have gas spring assisted
trendelenburg / reverse trendelenburg positions. Trolley should have height adjustment facility
by foot operated imported hydraulic pump with a height adjustment from 660mm x 910mm.
Trolley should be fitted on four 125mm dia imported swivel castors , two with brake. Trolley
should be fitted with corner buffers, sliding x-ray cassette, accessories tray, oxygen cylider
holder, stainless steel telescopic saline rod and with swing away stainless steel side rails. All
mild steel components should be thoroughly pre-treated chemically to remove rust and foreign
matter like Grease, Oil etc. by dip tank process pre-treatment system. The treated Metal Surface
should have coating of Epoxy Polyester Powder and oven baked at 180 degree to 200 degree
Centigrade to avoid contamination of the clean metal surface from dust particles and along with
mattress
136
Medicine trolley/
crash cart
MEDICINE TROLLEY/ CRASH CART
Size 960mm L x 500mm W x 1545mm H . Frame work made of Stainless Steel tube of minimum
25mm dia. Two light weight polystyrene boxes each with three drawers, upper drawer with
medicine container of different sizes. Provision to hold Oxygen cylinder and cardiac Massage
Board. Six numbers coloured hand out bins to keep important supplies at eye level. Two nos.
Stainless Steel shelves to carry monitors, ECG Machine, suction apparatus etc. Provided with
corner buffers & Rails. All stainless steel components should be of 304 quality.
137
Dressing trolley
DRESSING TROLLEY
Size: 760mm L x 510mm W x 900mm H. Shelf size – 750mm L x 500mm W . Argon
welded tubular construction of stainless steel tube. Two stainless steel shelves should
be made from stainless steel sheet cut to size notched at corner and press bent.
These shelves should be provided with protective side railing of stainless steel on all
four sides. In order to avoid sharp edge the bent edge should be headed. Provision
should be given to receive bowl and bucket holder on one side. Bucket cavity should
be made from one-piece sheet embossed and hooks receivers should be also made
Page 153
Dated 05.03.2009
from one piece and embossed to give better strength. Dressing trolley should be
mounted on minimum 200mm dia. swiveling castor wheels. All stainless steel parts
should be lightly polished in dull buff finish. All stainless steel used should be of 304
grade quality. Should be supplied with SS Bowl & SS bucket.
138
Monitor trolley
MONITOR TROLLEY
Trolley should be supplied with five mild steel shelves and a mild steel drawer at bottom. Size:
680mm L x 700mm D X 1570mm H. Top Shelf size: 640mm L x 450mmD. Four other shelves &
Drawer size: 510mm L x 450mm D Trolley should have two handles. Trolley should be fitted on
125mm swivel non-rusting castors, two with brakes. Trolley should have socket to receive 5/15
Amp; 230V A/C three pin plug. Two input sockets. One of the input socket exclusively for one
output connection and another input socket gives 6 output connections. Each output should
have ON/OFF switch. Trolley should be supplied with S.S. I.V. Rod and gas cylinder cage. All
Centigrade to avoid contamination of the clean metal surface from dust particles.
139
TROLLEY FOR TRANSPORT OF BASKETS
Transport trolley
S.Steel 45x45 Cm
• Trolleys for 5 full size sterile goods baskets with cover to be used for transport between
x 80 Cm H one
CSSD and storage area in operation theatre. Construction of stainless steel tube and guides,
shelf, open, SS top
solid stainless steel bottom with four castors, two with brakes, washable. Unit should be with
100 disposable covers each.
140
Wheel chair
WHEEL CHAIR
Overall size : 670mm W x 1120mm D x 920mm H. Welded frame construction of round tubes.
Two solid rubber tyred bicycle wheels with brakes & self propelling stainless steel hoops. Two
swivel castors, approx. 200mm dia infront. Minimum Frame size of round steel 22.2 x 18 G
tubes and 19.05 x 18 G tubes. Mild steel tubular construction fitted with cushion seat and back.
Wheel chair is fitted with 26” dia rim of bicycle wheel fitted on specially developed and heat
treated axle with solid tyre in the rear. In the front 200mm dia castor wheels are fitted. In front
of castor wheels, aluminium foot paddles are provided on adjustable brackets. Two handles are
provided with the hand grips. Brakes are provided on rear wheel to hold the chair to stop in 5
degree ramp. All mild steel components should be thoroughly pre-treated chemically to remove
rust and foreign matter like Grease, Oil etc. by dip tank process pre-treatment system. The
treated Metal Surface should have coating of Epoxy Polyester Powder and oven baked at 180
degree to 200 degree Centigrade to avoid contamination of the clean metal surface from dust
particles.
141
Mayo table
MAYO TABLE
Adjustable height of Stainless Steel tray from 760mm to 1270mm . Tray size 560mmL x
400mmW. Stainless Steel tubular frame mounted on four swivel, twin wheel non rusting castors,
50mm dia. All stainless steel components should be of 304 quality.
142
Double Step Foot
stool - OPD
DOUBLE STEP FOOT STOOL
Height : 230/450mm. Step size 510mmL x 300mmW. Mild Steel tubular frame fitted with
aluminium tread flats. Legs fitted with rubber feet. All mild steel components should be
thoroughly pre-treated chemically to remove rust and foreign matter like Grease, Oil etc. by dip
tank process pre-treatment system. The treated Metal Surface should have coating of Epoxy
Polyester Powder and oven baked at 180 degree to 200 degree Centigrade to avoid
Page 154
Dated 05.03.2009
contamination of the clean metal surface from dust particles.
143
Dangerous drug
cabinet
DANGEROUS DRUGS CABINET
•
•
•
144
IV stand/ Saline
Stand
Wall mounted or fixed
Heavy steel sheet with lock in accordance with misuse of drugs regulation built-in audible
alarm with battery back-up adjustable shelf
Dimension (WxDxH): 800 x 400 x 1000 mm (approx)
IV stand / Saline Stand
Saline stand should have strong MS tubular construction mounted on five pronged base fitted
with swivel castors of 50mm dia. Stainless steel saline rod should have double hooks.
Stainless steel I.V. rod should be height adjustable from 1620mm to 2340mm. All mild steel
components should be thoroughly pre-treated chemically to remove rust and foreign matter like
Grease, Oil etc. by dip tank process pre-treatment system. The treated Metal Surface should be
coated with Epoxy Polyester Powder and oven baked at 180 degree to 200 degree Centigrade to
avoid contamination of the clean metal surface from dust particles.
145
Change Locker 6unit
146
Patient Bed Fowler PATIENT BED – FOWLER POSITION BED
position bed
Bed Frame size 1980mm L x 910mmW. Height 600mm. Four section perforated top. Two
separate screws for backrest and knee-rest adjustments. Stainless Steel tubular head and foot
bows with laminated panels. Provision for I.V. Rod at four locations. All mild steel components
should be thoroughly pre-treated chemically to remove rust and foreign matter like Grease, Oil
etc. by dip tank process pre-treatment system. The treated Metal Surface should have coating of
Epoxy Polyester Powder and oven baked at 180 degree to 200 degree Centigrade to avoid
contamination of the clean metal surface from dust particles. Bed should be supplied with
sectional Mattress.
147
Bedside Locker
CHANGING CABINET
All parts are welded and screwed structure and sole are of cold milled steel. The swing doors
shall be complete double faced such as to make them rigid and non-deformable and cupboard
shall be fitted with protection foot capping in nylon or the like. The cabinet shall be constructed of
6 Nos. cabinets and adjustable shelf for each cabinet with attachments for combination lock.
Size – 100 × 35 × 180 cm.
Bed Side Locker
Bedside Locker (S.S. Top) with pre-treated and powder coated M.S. body frame. Approx. size
405mm square. Height 820mm. Box made from Machine pressed 1mm CRCA steel sheet
locker box with door. approx 25.4 mm dia. x 18G MS tubular legs fitted with PVC shoe with
nylon reinforcement.
Overall approx Size: 40.5 cms x 40.5 cms x 82 cms H. Locker box should be made of C.R.C.A.
M.S. sheet of 20G of size 31 cms L x 33.5 cms H x 38.5 cms D approx. The door should be
made of 20G M.S. CRCA sheet and should have 3 louvers. It should be pivoted at the top and
the bottom to the main box. It should be closed by a chrome plated knob. The top should be
made of 18G M.S. CRCA sheet double press bent and should be welded at corners and
mounted on the four legs of 25mm dia x 18G M.S. ERW tubes. It should be superimposed with a
304 grade 24G stainless steel top with raised edges on three sides, fitted with self – tapping
screws. The legs should be provided with PVC & Synthetic material shoes with Nylon
reinforcement.
148
Adjustable Over
bed Table
ADJUSTABLE OVER BED TABLE
Size : Top 810mm L x 352mm W . Top should be laminated in two sections. Laminated top
Page 155
Dated 05.03.2009
section should be fitted on mild steel square tubular telescopic stem with geared S.S. handle for
height adjustment from approx. 760mm to 1050mm. Base frame should be of mild steel
rectangular tubular base frame mounted on four castors of 50mm dia. All mild steel components
should be thoroughly pre-treated chemically to remove rust and foreign matter like Grease, Oil
etc. by dip tank process pre-treatment system. The treated Metal Surface should have coating of
Epoxy Polyester Powder and oven baked at 180 degree to 200 degree Centigrade to avoid
contamination of the clean metal surface from dust particles.
149
150
Fracture Table
(Procedure Table)
with all traction
accessories &
ortho sets.
Traction unit
Electronic multisystem, angulated, with table multi joint and with different patient belts for
traction, constant or intermittent traction. Force 90 Kg at least, treatment tile 0-60 minutes,
holding and rest time:0-60 sec. safety device for traction power over 20kg with audio visual
alarm, patient breaker. Unit should be complete with all accessories as different patient belts for
traction (neck, chest and lumbar) and staps, in sizes for adults and children.
Operating tableElectrohydraulic
Operation table with complete accessories universal operating tables
•
Mobile electro hydraulic operating table with universal top
(at least 5 sections top
•
Easily movable with high quality corrosion resistant castors having brakes and stops.
•
All exposed metal sections made of corrosion resistant Ni-Cr steel.
•
With battery powered controls and built in battery charger fully radiolucent top allowing
radiography with clear access for II X-ray tube C-arm unit.
•
With electro hydraulic adjustment for height- up/down movements, leg plate movements
and tredelenburg movements & additional manual movements.
•
With side rails and accessories with guide rails for X-ray cassettes.
Table should be equipped with normal and reverse orientation with a press of single
switch.
T-Shaped base with electro-hydraulic locking mechanism control from hand controls
Override control on the column for all functions.
•
With sockets for padded sections.
•
Padded plates to be covered with conductive, flame retardant washable, seamless, water
and chemical resistant cover padded head plate removable.
•
Maximum access of 80% from top to bottom for spinal surgery.
•
Standard accessory set:
Arm positioning devices, universal lateral support, buttock and back support, washable
wristbands, body straps, anaesthetic screen with clamps, infusion stand, head-rest, geopel
knee crutches (2) with setting clamps etc, neuro surgery adapter
•
Special accessories & attachment:
OB/GyN Accessories
Page 156
1 set
Dated 05.03.2009
General surgery accessories
Orthopaedic surgery accessories
151
Patient Couch for
ultrasound
examination and
patient
examination rooms
152 Patient bed Four Section Bed
for ICU/ Recovery
Room
153
Baby crib
1 set
1 set
•
All accessories offered should be perfectly adaptable to the table quoted
•
Quote accessories price as optional.
EXAMINATION COUCH
Size 1890mm L x 560mm W x 840mm H. Couch should have gas spring assisted adjustable
backrest with upholstered top. Upper section of the box with three drawers. Lower section has
cabinet with three separate doors, B.P. holder tray near headrest. Body of the couch should be
made of CRCA sheets. All mild steel components should be thoroughly pre-treated chemically to
remove rust and foreign matter like Grease, Oil etc. by dip tank process pre-treatment system.
The treated Metal Surface should have coating of Epoxy Polyester Powder and oven baked at
180 degree to 200 degree Centigrade to avoid contamination of the clean metal surface from
dust particles.
PATIENT BED – FOUR SECTION BED FOR ICU/ RECOVERY ROOM
Bed Frame Size 2050mm L x 910mmW. Height minimum 490mm and maximum 710mm.
Trendelenburg / Reverse Trendelenburg facility. Bed should consist of four section top of
minimum thickness of 18G CRCA mild steel sheet of which backrest and kneerest should be
pivoted on the main frame and should be adjustable with the help of screw mechanism. Second
section should be fixed. Leg section should be interconnected to knee section and it should be
adjusted in relation to the knee section with the help of ratchet mechanism. All four sections
should be fabricated with round tube and flat sections suitably reinforced. Top section should
have uniformly perforated holes for effective ventilation. Main frame of the bed should be of
rectangular tubular welded construction, fitted with aluminium brackets at each corner. Bows
should consist of outer tube in one piece double bend to achieve bow shape (inverted U-shape)
and should be fitted with laminated panels with the help of Stainless Steel (304 quality) brackets.
Chariot base frame of the bed should have rectangular tube construction. Separate screw
mechanisms should be used to achieve knee-rest adjustment and trendelenberg and reverse
trendelenberg positions. The bed should be fitted with 125mm dia non rusting swivel castors. All
Centigrade to avoid contamination of the clean metal surface from dust particles. Bed should be
supplied with following accessories.
Railing : Detachable and collapsible full length railings made of minimum 19mm dia x 18 G S.S.
tubes telescoping in 25.4mm dia x 18G S.S tubes housed in MS square tube frame work of
25.4mm x 18G tube. These shall remain in raised position with trigger type spring lock fixed on
an upper tube.
Telescopic I.V. Rod : S.S. saline rod with 12mm dia S.S. rod shall telescope in SS socket tube
15.8 mm dia x 18G welded on angular base bracket of 14G SS sheet. Nylon bracket provided to
prevent colour damage
A mattress suitable for the bed made of 25mm thick soft density top layer and 75mm thick high
density bottom layer for the patient comfort and better pressure care. The upper part of cover of
the mattress is made of waterproof, breathable fabric separated by zip on three sides with lower
cover part made of rexine
BABY CRIB With Attachment :
Overall Approximate Dimensions 760mm (L) x 375mm (W) x 300mm (H). Crib made from
15.8mm dia x 18G M.S. tube and 6mm dia round M.S. bars 34 numbers on all four side & 10
numbers on base. Crib swings on 2 hooks made from 9.5mm dia MS rounds, welded to vertical
upright of 24.5mm dia x 18G M.S. tubular 3/8"dia rods fixed to leg-end bow.
Page 157
Dated 05.03.2009
154
Labour cum
birthing bed
LABOUR CUM BIRTHING BED (ELECTRIC)
Dimensions : 2050mm Length X 975mm Width X 605mm-875mm Height without mattress.
It should 3 section top made of high pressure laminates.
User friendly electrical adjustments for Backrest, Trendelenberg and Height.Battery back-up with
built in charger.
Leg section can be telescoped under backrest for lithotomy position.
Easily removable polymer moulded head and foot boards.
Removable S.S side rails.
S.S bearing down supports with hand grip.
Foot supports for high/low chair position.
Middle & leg section tops removable for cleaning.
Pair of upholstered aluminium lithotomy crutches mounted on S S rods.
S .S telescopic I V rod -1 No
S S tray -1 No
Three section mattress.
125 mm dia castor wheels with high grade synthetic body, two with brakes and two without
brakes.
All MS parts are pre-treated and epoxy polyester powder coated finish.
155
Closed SS Trolley
(to transport sterile
items to OT)
EXTERNAL LOADING/UNLOADING TROLLEY FOR STEAM STERILIZER
•
Trolley loading, unloading autoclave consisting of two parts: Trolley and feeter. For item
No.536-9.7.011
Trolley:
• For shelf rack or feeder
•
Loading height: To fit autoclave adjustable +/-20cm, approximately 810mm.
•
Made of stainless steel with frame of 30x30 mm profile
•
•
4 pivoting polyurethane wheels with a dia. 125mm, 2 with brakes.
Looking of load under transport.
Feeder:
• The feeder to be used together with the loading trolley for transport and loading/unloading of
sterilizing baskets in the autoclaves. To prevent staff from burning hot material.
•
156
157
Closed SS Trolley
(to transport
unsterile items
from OT to CSSD)
SS Food Trolley
The feeder should designed as a devided roller conveyor with frame of 40x40mm stainless
steel profile.
TROLLEYS GENERAL PURPOSE - CSSD
•
Stainless steel flat top and tubular legs.
•
Mounted on ball bearing anti-static castors at least 6” diameter.
•
Dimensions:
1. Length
:
600 mm approx.
2. Height
:
900 mm approx.
3. Width
:
400 mm ap
Food Trolley:1032mmLx 510mmWx910mm H. Food trolley fully S.S.Trolley frame made from 25.4mm dia
Page 158
Dated 05.03.2009
18G, and support tubes of 19 mm dia 18G. Trolley provided with 3 trays made from 18G
stainless steel sheet of approx size 858 mm x 450 mm resting on 90mm x 2mm SS. Strip tig
welded on all four corners. Each tray has 2 handles of 10mm dia. S.S. rod. Trolley shall be fitted
with S.S. pushing handle and 125mm dia non-rusting castor wheels. All SS. should be used of
304 Quality.
158
All purpose steel
stool
ALL PURPOSE STEEL STOOL
Approx size: 300mm square 18G double bent top of MS, Height 510mm. Framework of MS
press bent 25mmx25mmx14G angles and ‘C’ channels riveted to angels made from 14 G. MS.
CRCA. Sheet. Superimposed press bent, argon arc welded top made from 0.6mm thick 304grade SS Sheet, riveted with MS. Drive rivets on MS. Top. Legs fitted with PVC angle shoes.
159
Pediatric ICU Bed
Pediatric two section ICU bed with Two way longitudinal tilt & drop side rails
Pediatric ICU bed with two way longitudinal tilt: Overall Approx size 1935 mm L x 965 mm W x
600 mm H, The main frame size 1830 mm L x 838 mm W should be made from 6cms x 3cms x
16G ERW rectangular tubes. Two sections top shall be made from 18 G C.R.C. sheets uniformly
perforated and should be suitably fitted to the main frame.
Detachable Head and Leg Bows: Shall be made from polymer moulded bows of height
approx 440 mm which shall be provided tube insert of 31.7mm x 18 G SS tubes at both the end
of each bows for inserting into welded tube socket on four corners of bed frame.
Wheels: The base frame shall be fitted with non rusting swivel castor wheels 125mm dia, 2
with brake, 2 without brakes.
Crank Screw System: The backrest & trendelenburg, reverse trendelenburg should be
manoeuvred by the screw mechanism, welded with 31.7 mm dia. X 16 G ERW M. S. Tube for
linear movement in 38 mm dia. X 16 G ERW M. S. cover tube which can be smoothly operated
on thrust bearings. One detachable handle shall be provided.
Four I.V. Rod Locations.
Telescopic I.V. Rod : S.S. saline rod with 12mm dia S.S. rod shall telescope in SS socket tube
15.8 mm dia x 18 G welded on angular base bracket of 14G SS sheet. Nylon bracket provided to
prevent colour damage
A mattress suitable for the bed made of 25mm thick soft density top layer and 75mm thick highdensity bottom layer for the patient comfort and better pressure care. The upper part of cover of
the mattress is made of waterproof, breathable fabric separated by zip on three sides with lower
cover part made of rexine.
160
Patient Transfer
Chair
PATIENT TRANSFER CHAIR
200kg Patient weight capacity (tested at a static weight of 600kg)
Length: 111 cm
Width:
60 cm
Seat height:
58 cm
Electrogalvanised steel frame with light grey epoxy finish
Epoxy finished push bar
Backrest and seat in class M1 flame retardant seamless covering
Patient file holder
Clothes basket
Adjustable armrests with stopper
Page 159
Dated 05.03.2009
Retractable footrest with bilateral control
Front shock absorbers
Rear castors Ø 300 mm with centralized brakes
Front castors Ø 100 mm - ball bearing
58 cm seat height
Accessories available:
Headrest
Oxygen bottle holder
Urine bag holder
Rotating IV pole
Safety belt
Removable legrest that can be fixed on either side
CE mark
Page 160
Dated 05.03.2009
GEERAL TECHICAL SPECIFICATIOS
GEERAL POITS:
1. Warranty:
a) Comprehensive Warranty for the period as mentioned in ‘List of requirement’ (Section – VI)
as per Conditions of Contract of the TE document for complete equipment (including X ray
tubes, HT Cable, Helium for MRI, Probes, Electrodes, Detectors, Batteries for UPS, other
vacuumatic parts wherever applicable) and Turnkey Work from the date of satisfactory
installation, commissioning, trial run & handing over of equipment to Hospital/ Dispensaries/
Institute/ Medical College.
b) 98% up time Warranty of complete equipment with extension of Warranty period by double
the downtime period on 24 (hrs) X 7 (days) X 365 (days) basis.
c) All software updates should be provided free of cost during Warranty period.
2. After Sales Service:
After sales service centre should be available at the city of Hospital/Institution/Medical College
on 24 (hrs) X 7 (days) X 365 (days) basis. Complaints should be attended properly, maximum
within 8 hrs. The service should be provided directly by Tenderer/Indian Agent. Undertaking by
the Principals that the spares for the equipment shall be available for at least 10 years from the
date of supply.
3. Training:
On Site training to Doctors/ Technicians/ staff is to be provided by Principal/ Indian Agents (if
they have the requisite know-how) for operation and maintenance of the equipment to the
satisfaction of the consignee.
4. Annual Maintenance Contract (AMC) of subject equipment with Turnkey:
a) The cost of Annual Maintenance Contract (AMC) which includes preventive maintenance
including testing & calibration as per technical/ service /operational manual of the
manufacturer and labour, after satisfactory completion of Warranty period may be quoted for
the period as mentioned in ‘List of requirement’ (Section – VI) on yearly basis for complete
equipment (including X ray tubes, HT Cable, Helium for MRI, Probes, Electrodes, Detectors,
Batteries for UPS, other vacuumatic parts wherever applicable) and Turnkey (if any). The
supplier shall visit each consignee site as recommended in the manufacturer’s technical/
service /operational manual, but at least once in six months during the AMC period
b) The cost of AMC may be quoted along with taxes applicable on the date of Tender Opening.
The taxes to be paid extra, to be specifically stated. In the absence of any such stipulation the
price will be taken inclusive of such taxes and no claim for the same will be entertained later.
c) Cost of AMC will be added for Ranking/Evaluation purpose.
d) The payment of AMC will be made on six monthly basis after satisfactory completion of said
period, duly certified by end user on receipt of bank guarantee for 2.5 % of the cost of the
equipment as per Section XV valid till 2 months after expiry of entire AMC period.
e) There will be 98% uptime warranty during AMC period on 24 (hrs) X 7 (days) X 365 (days)
basis, with penalty, to extend AMC period by double the downtime period.
f) During AMC period, the supplier is required to visit at each consignee’s site at least once in 6
months commencing from the date of the successful completion of warranty period for
preventive maintenance of the goods.
g) All software updates should be provided free of cost during AMC.
h) Failure of the above [4. e) to 4. g)] by the supplier, may lead to the forfeiture of the Bank
Guarantee for Annual AMC.
Page 161
Dated 05.03.2009
i) The payment of AMC will be made as stipulated in GCC Clause 21.
Turnkey:
Turnkey is indicated in the technical specification of the respective items, wherever required.
The Tenderer shall examine the existing site where the equipment is to be installed, in
consultation with HOD of Hospital/Institution/Medical College concerned. Turnkey details of
each Hospital/Institution/Medical College are given at the end of Technical Specification. The
Tenderers to quote prices indicating break-up of prices of the Machine and Turnkey Job of each
Hospital/Institution/Medical College. The Turnkey costs may be quoted in Indian Rupee will be
added for Ranking Purpose.
The taxes to be paid extra, to be specifically stated. In the absence of any such stipulation the
price will be taken inclusive of such duties and taxes and no claim for the same will be
entertained later.
The Turnkey Work should completely comply with AERB requirement, if any.
Page 162
Dated 05.03.2009
Section – VIII
Quality Control Requirements
(Proforma for equipment and quality control employed by the manufacturer(s)
Tender Reference No.
Date of opening
Time
Name and address of the Tenderer:
Note: All the following details shall relate to the manufacturer(s) for the goods quoted for.
01 Name of the manufacturer
a. full postal address
b. full address of the premises
c. Email ID
d. telephone number
e. fax number
02 Plant and machinery details
03 Manufacturing process details
04 Monthly (single shift) production capacity of goods quoted for
a. normal
b. maximum
05 Total annual turn-over (value in Rupees)
06 Quality control arrangement details
a. for incoming materials and bought-out components
b. for process control
c. for final product evaluation
07 Test certificate held
a. type test
b. BIS/ISO certification
c. any other
08 Details of staff
a. technical
b. skilled
c. unskilled
Signature and seal of the Tenderer
Page 163
Dated 05.03.2009
Section – IX
01. The Tenderer must be a Manufacturer or its authorized Agent.
02. (a) The Manufacturer should have supplied and installed in last Five years from the date of
Tender Opening, atleast 100% of the quoted quantity of the similar equipment meeting major
specification parameters which is functoning satisfactorily. The foreign Manufacturer
satisfying the above criteria should also have supplied and installed in last Five years from
the date of Tender Opening, at least 50% (or one No. where the schedule of requirement is
one no.) of quoted quantity of similar model which is functoning satisfactorily any where
outside the country of manufacture.
02. (b) The Tenderers quoting as authorized representative of the manufacturer meeting the above
criteria 02 (a) should have supplied and installed in last Five years from the date of Tender
Opening, atleast 50% (or one No. where the schedule of requirement is one no. ) of the
quoted quantity of similar equipment which is functoning satisfactorily, any where in India
of the same manufacturer.
ote:
1.
In support of 2 (a) & 2 (b), the Tenderer shall furnish Performance statement in the enclosed
Proforma ‘A’.
The manufacturer as well as the Tenderer/ Indian Agent shall furnish Satisfactory Performance
Certificate in respect of above, duly translated in English and duly notarized in the country of
origin, alongwith the tender. The performance certificate should be in accordance with the
requirement of clause 2 (a) / 2 (b) as stated above.
2.
The Tenderer shall furnish a brief write-up, packed with adequate data explaining and establishing
his available capacity/capability (both technical and financial) to perform the Contract (if
awarded) within the stipulated time period, after meeting all its current/present commitments. The
Tenderer shall also furnish details of Equipment and Quality Control in the enclosed Section VIII.
3.
Notwithstanding anything stated above, the Purchaser reserves the right to assess the Tenderer’s
capability and capacity to perform the contract satisfactorily before deciding on award of
Contract, should circumstances warrant such an assessment in the overall interest of the
Purchaser.
4.
The Purchaser reserves the right to ask for a free demonstration of the quoted equipment at a pre
determined place acceptable to the purchaser for technical acceptability as per the tender
specifications, before the opening of the Price Tender.
Page No.164
Dated 05.03.2009
PROFORMA ‘A’
PROFORMA FOR PERFORMACE STATEMET
(For the period of last five years)
Time
: _________________________________
Name and address of the Tenderer
: _________________________________
Name and address of the manufacturer
: _________________________________
1
4
5
6
Actual
3
Date of
completion of
Contract
As per
contract
2
Quantity of
ordered goods
and services
Value of order
(Rs.)
: _________________________________
Description of
ordered goods
and services
Date of opening
Order number
and date
: _________________________________
Order placed by
(full address of
Purchaser/Consig
nee)
Tender Reference No.
7
Remarks
indicating
reasons for
delay if
any
8
Have the
goods been
functioning
Satisfactorily
(attach
documentary
proof)**
9
Signature and seal of the Tenderer
** The documentary proof will be a certificate from the consignee/end user with crossreference of order no. and date in the certificate duly notarised certification authenticating
the correctness of the information furnished. If at any time, information furnished is proved
to be false or incorrect, the earnest money and or performance security furnished will be
forfeited. Such certificates from a third party or middleman other than actual end user will
not be accepted. The satisfactory performance implies working satisfactorily without any
complaint since the date of installation, commissioning & handing over to the end user as
per the standard format enclosed.
Page No.165
Dated 05.03.2009
Section – X
TEDER FORM
Date__________
To,
Head (P & CD)
B-12, Sector -59, oida -201301, Uttar Pradesh
Ref. Your TE document No. _________dated ___________
We, the undersigned have examined the above mentioned TE document, including
amendment/corrigendum No. __________, dated ________ (if any), the receipt of which is hereby
confirmed. We now offer to supply and deliver___________ (Description of goods and services) in
conformity with your above referred document for the sum of _____________ (total tender amount in
figures and words), as shown in the price schedule(s), attached herewith and made part of this tender.
If our tender is accepted, we undertake to supply the goods and perform the services as mentioned
above, in accordance with the delivery schedule specified in the List of Requirements.
We further confirm that, if our tender is accepted, we shall provide you with a performance security of
required amount in an acceptable form in terms of GCC clause 5, read with modification, if any, in
Section - V – “Special Conditions of Contract”, for due performance of the contract.
We agree to keep our tender valid for acceptance as required in the GIT clause 20, read with
modification, if any in Section - III – “Special Instructions to Tenderers” or for subsequently extended
period, if any, agreed to by us. We also accordingly confirm to abide by this tender up to the aforesaid
period and this tender may be accepted any time before the expiry of the aforesaid period. We further
confirm that, until a formal contract is executed, this tender read with your written acceptance thereof
within the aforesaid period shall constitute a binding contract between us.
We further understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest or any tender you may receive
against your above-referred tender enquiry.
We confirm that we do not stand deregistered/banned/blacklisted by any Govt. Authorities.
We confirm that we fully agree to the terms and conditions specified in above mentioned TE
document, including amendment/ corrigendum if any
(Signature with date)
(ame and designation) Duly authorised to sign tender for and on behalf of
Page No.166
Dated 05.03.2009
A)
1
Schedule
No.
SECTIO – XI PRICE SCHEDULE
PRICE SCHEDULE FOR DOMESTIC GOODS OR GOODS OF FOREIG ORIGI LOCATED WITHI IDIA
2
3
4
Excise Duty
Ex-factory/
(if any)
Ex-warehouse/
[%age &
Ex-showroom/
Brief
Country
Quantity Off-the-shelf
value]
Description of
of
(Nos.)
Goods
Origin
(b)
(a)
5
Price per unit (Rs.)
Sales Tax/
VAT (if any)
[%age &
value]
Packing and
Forwarding
charges
(c)
(d)
6
Incidental Services
(including Installation
& Commissioning,
Supervision,
Demonstration and
Training) at the
Consignee’s site
(e)
Unit Price
(at Consignee Site)
basis (Rs.)
Total Price
(at Consignee Site)
basis (Rs.)
(g) =a+b+c+d+e
4 x 5(g)
Total Tender price in Rupees: _________________
In words: _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
ote: 1. If there is a discrepancy between the unit price and total price THE UNIT PRICE shall prevail.
2. The charges for Annual AMC after warranty shall be quoted separately as per Section – XI – Price Schedule C
Name________________________
Business Address________________________
Place: _________________________
Signature of Tenderer________________________
Date: _________________________
Seal of the Tenderer________________________
Page No.
167
Dated 05.03.2009
B) PRICE SCHEDULE FOR GOODS TO BE IMPORTED FROM ABROAD
1
2
3
4
5
Price per unit (Currency)
FOB price
Brief
Country
at port/
Schedule
Quantity
Description of
airport
No.
(Nos.)
of Goods Origin
of Lading
(a)
Custom Duty
CIP Port of
amount with
Insurance destination
CDEC & NMIC
& Freight by Air/sea
as applicable (to
be reimbursed by
the purchaser)
(b)
(c) = (a +b)
** (d)
Custom
Clearence
&
Handling
Charges
** (e)
Loading/
unloading/ inland
transportation
/insurance &
incidental cost till
consignee’s site
** (f)
6
Incidental
Services
(Installation,
commissioning,
supervision,
Demonstration
& training) at
the consignee’s
site ** (g)
Unit price on
DDP at at
consignee’s
site
Total price
on DDP at
consignee’s
site
(h) =
(c+d+e+f+g)
4 x 5 (e)
** To be paid in Indian Currency (Rs.)_____________________
Total Tender price in foreign currency: _____________________
In words: _________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
ote: 1. If there is a discrepancy between the unit price and total price THE UNIT PRICE shall prevail.
2. The charges for Annual AMC after warranty shall be quoted separately as per Section-XI – Price Schedule C
3. The Tenderer will be fully responsible for the safe arrival of the goods at the consignee site in good condition as per terms of DDP at consignee site as per INCOTERMS.
4. The bidders break up of prices under various columns are for comparison of prices till delivery of goods at consignee’s site for tender evaluation and will be allowed on actual basis subject
to bidders quoted prices as ceiling under various heads which will be adjusted later against balance payment.
5. The quoted price should be bidders best lowest rate supported with original proforma invoice from the foreign manufacturers
6. All the components of the DDP price will be paid by the tenderer, purchaser will make the payment of DDPprice after receipt of goods at consignee’s site in good condition as per payment
terms in the contract.
Indian Agent ame: _____________________
Indian agent commission -------% of FOB.
Custom Duty with CDEC & NMIC as applicable --------% of CIP Value {Column 5(c)}
Signature of Tenderer_______________________
Place: ____________________________________
Signature of Tenderer_______________________
Date: ____________________________________
ame________________________
Business Address__________________________
__________________________
Page No.
168
Dated 05.03.2009
1
Schedule
o.
C) PRICE SCHEDULE FOR AUAL MAITEACE COTRACT AFTER WARRATY PERIOD
2
3
4
5
Annual Maintenance Contract
Total Annual Maintenance Contract
Cost for Each Unit year wise*.
Brief Description of the
Quantity
Cost for 5 (or as specified) Years
Goods
(os.)
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
[3 x (4a+4b+4c+4d+4e)]
a
b
c
d
e
* After completion of Warranty period
OTE:1. In case of discrepancy between unit price and total prices, THE UNIT PRICE shall prevail.
2. The cost of Annual Maintenance Contract (AMC) which includes preventive maintenance including testing & calibration as per technical/
service /operational manual and labour, after satisfactory completion of Warranty period may be quoted for next 5 (or as specified) years on
yearly basis for complete equipment and Turnkey (if any).
3. The cost of AMC may be quoted along with taxes applicable on the date of Tender Opening. The taxes to be paid extra, to be specifically stated.
In the absence of any such stipulation the price will be taken inclusive of such taxes and no claim for the same will be entertained later.
4. Cost of AMC will be added for Ranking/Evaluation purpose.
5. The payment of AMC will be made as per clause GCC clause 21.1 (D).
6. The uptime warranty will be 98 % on 24 (hrs) x 7 (days) x 365 (days) basis or as stated in Technical Specification of the TE document.
7. All software updates should be provided free of cost during AMC period.
8. The stipulations in Technical Specification will supersede above provisions
9. The supplier shall keep sufficient stock of spares required during Annual Maintenance Contract period. In case the spares are required to be
imported, it would be the responsibility of the supplier to import and get them custom cleared and pay all necessary duties.
Name________________________
Place: ___________________________
Date: _________________________
Page No.
169
Dated 05.03.2009
D) PRICE SCHEDULE FOR TURKEY
Schedule
o.
BRIEF TURKEY
DESCRIPTIO OF GOODS
COSIGEE
CODE
Turnkey price
ote: 1. The cost of Turnkey as per Technical Specification (Section VII) may be quoted on lump sum along with taxes applicable on the date of Tender
Opening. The taxes to be paid extra, to be specifically stated. In the absence of any such stipulation the price will be taken inclusive of such taxes and no
claim for the same will be entertained later.
2. Cost of Turnkey will be added for Ranking/Evaluation purpose.
3. The payment of Turnkey will be made as per clause GCC clause 21.1 (c).
4. The stipulations in Technical Specification will supersede above provisions
Name________________________
Place: ___________________________
Date: _________________________
Page No.
170
Dated 05.03.2009
SECTIO – XII
QUESTIOAIRE
Fill up the Section XX – Check List for Tenderers and enclose with the Tender
1. The tenderer should furnish specific answers to all the questions/issues mentioned in the
Checklist. In case a question/issue does not apply to a tenderer, the same should be answered
with the remark “not applicable”
2. Wherever necessary and applicable, the tenderer shall enclose certified copy as documentary
proof/ evidence to substantiate the corresponding statement.
3. In case a tenderer furnishes a wrong or evasive answer against any of the question/issues
mentioned in the Checklist, its tender will be liable to be ignored.
Page No.171
Dated 05.03.2009
HLL Lifecare Ltd.
SECTIO – XIII
BAK GUARATEE FORM FOR EMD
Whereas ______________________________ (hereinafter called the “Tenderer”) has submitted its
quotation dated ___________________ for the supply of _____________________________
(hereinafter called the “tender”) against the purchaser’s tender enquiry No.
__________________________________ Know all persons by these presents that we
______________________________ of _______________________________ (Hereinafter called
the “Bank”) having our registered office at ________________________________ are bound unto
____________________________ (hereinafter called the “Purchaser) in the sum of
_________________________ for which payment will and truly to be made to the said Purchaser, the
Bank binds itself, its successors and assigns by these presents. Sealed with the Common Seal of the
said Bank this _____________________ day of _______ 20____. The conditions of this obligation
are:
(1) If the Tenderer withdraws or amends, impairs or derogates from the tender in any respect
within the period of validity of this tender.
(2) If the Tenderer having been notified of the acceptance of his tender by the Purchaser
during the period of its validity: a) fails or refuses to furnish the performance security for the due performance of the
contract.
or
b) fails or refuses to accept/execute the contract.
or
c) if it comes to notice that the information/documents furnished in its tender is
incorrect, false, misleading or forged
We undertake to pay the Purchaser up to the above amount upon receipt of its first written demand,
without the Purchaser having to substantiate its demand, provided that in its demand the Purchaser
will note that the amount claimed by it is due to it owing to the occurrence of one or both the two
conditions, specifying the occurred condition(s).
This guarantee will remain in force for a period of forty-five days after the period of tender validity
and any demand in respect thereof should reach the Bank not later than the above date.
(Signature of the authorised officer of the Bank)
Name and designation of the officer
Seal, name & address of the Bank and address of the Branch
Page No.172
Dated 05.03.2009
HLL Lifecare Ltd.
SECTIO – XIV
MAUFACTURER’S AUTHORISATIO FORM
To,
Head (P & CD)
B-12, Sector -59, oida -201301, Uttar Pradesh
Dear Sir,
Ref. Your TE document No ____________, dated _____________
We, ___________________________________ who are proven and reputable manufacturers
of___________________________(name and description of the goods offered in the tender) having
factories
at_______________________________,
hereby
authorise
Messrs______________________________(name and address of the agent) to submit a tender,
process the same further and enter into a contract with you against your requirement as contained in the
above referred TE documents for the above goods manufactured by us.
We further confirm that no supplier or firm or individual other than Messrs.
__________________________ (name and address of the above agent) is authorised to submit a
tender, process the same further and enter into a contract with you against your requirement as
contained in the above referred TE documents for the above goods manufactured by us.
We also hereby extend our full warranty, AMC as applicable as per clause 15 of the General
Conditions of Contract, read with modification, if any, in the Special Conditions of Contract for the
goods and services offered for supply by the above firm against this TE document.
Yours faithfully,
[Signature with date, name and designation]
for and on behalf of Messrs___________________________
[!ame & address of the manufacturers]
!ote: 1. This letter of authorisation should be on the letterhead of the manufacturing firm and should
be signed by a person competent and having the power of attorney to legally bind the
manufacturer.
2. Original letter may be sent.
Page No.173
Dated 05.03.2009
HLL Lifecare Ltd.
SECTIO – XV
BAK GUARATEE FORM FOR PERFORMACE SECURITY/ AMC
SECURITY
To
Head of Hospital/Institute/Medical College
WHEREAS _____________________________ (Name and address of the supplier) (Hereinafter
called “the supplier”) has undertaken, in pursuance of contract no________________________ dated
_____________ to supply (description of goods and services) (herein after called “the contract”).
AND WHEREAS it has been stipulated by you in the said contract that the supplier shall furnish you
with a bank guarantee by a scheduled commercial bank recognised by you for the sum specified
therein as security for compliance with its obligations in accordance with the contract;
AND WHEREAS we have agreed to give the supplier such a bank guarantee;
NOW THEREFORE we hereby affirm that we are guarantors and responsible to you, on behalf of the
supplier, up to a total of. ________________________ (Amount of the guarantee in words and
figures), and we undertake to pay you, upon your first written demand declaring the supplier to be in
default under the contract and without cavil or argument, any sum or sums within the limits of
(amount of guarantee) as aforesaid, without your needing to prove or to show grounds or reasons for
your demand or the sum specified therein.
We hereby waive the necessity of your demanding the said debt from the supplier before presenting
us with the demand.
We further agree that no change or addition to or other modification of the terms of the contract to be
performed there under or of any of the contract documents which may be made between you and the
supplier shall in any way release us from any liability under this guarantee and we hereby waive
notice of any such change, addition or modification.
This guarantee shall be valid up to 30 (thirty) months from the date of Notification of Award i.e up to
----------- (indicate date)
…………………………….
(Signature with date of the authorised officer of the Bank)
………………………………………………………….
Name and designation of the officer
………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………….
Seal, name & address of the Bank and address of the Branch
Page No.174
Dated 05.03.2009
HLL Lifecare Ltd.
SECTIO – XVI
COTRACT FORM - A
COTRACT FORM FOR SUPPLY, ISTALLATIO, COMMISSIOIG, HADIG
OVER, TRIAL RU, TRAIIG OF OPERATORS & WARRATY OF GOODS
(Address of the Purchaser’s/Consignee’s
office issuing the contract)
Contract No___________ dated______________
This is in continuation to this office’s otification of Award o_______ dated ______
1. Name & address of the Supplier: ______________________________
2. Purchaser’s TE document No________ dated____________ and subsequent Amendment
No____________, dated_________ (if any), issued by the purchaser
3. Supplier’s Tender No_________ dated__________ and subsequent communication(s)
No____________ dated _________ (if any), exchanged between the supplier and the purchaser in
connection with this tender.
4. In addition to this Contract Form, the following documents etc, which are included in the documents
mentioned under paragraphs 2 and 3 above, shall also be deemed to form and be read and construed
as integral part of this contract:
(i) General Conditions of Contract;
(ii) Special Conditions of Contract;
(iii) List of Requirements;
(iv) Technical Specifications;
(v) Quality Control Requirements;
(vi) Tender Form furnished by the supplier;
(vii) Price Schedule(s) furnished by the supplier in its tender;
(viii) Manufacturers’ Authorisation Form (if applicable for this tender);
(ix) Purchaser’s Notification of Award
Note : The words and expressions used in this contract shall have the same meanings as are
respectively assigned to them in the conditions of contract referred to above. Further, the definitions
and abbreviations incorporated under clause 1 of Section II – ‘General Instructions to Tenderers’ of
the Purchaser’s TE document shall also apply to this contract.
5. Some terms, conditions, stipulations etc. out of the above-referred documents are reproduced below
for ready reference:
(i) Brief particulars of the goods and services which shall be supplied/ provided by the supplier
are as under:
Schedule
o.
Brief description of
goods/services
Accounting
unit
Quantity to
be supplied
Unit
Price
Total
price
Terms of
delivery
Any other additional services (if applicable) and cost thereof: _____________________
Page No.175
Dated 05.03.2009
HLL Lifecare Ltd.
Total value (in figure) ____________ (In words) ___________________________
(ii) Delivery schedule
(iii) Details of Performance Security
(iv) Quality Control
(a) Mode(s), stage(s) and place(s) of conducting inspections and tests.
(b) Designation and address of purchaser’s inspecting officer
(v) Destination and despatch instructions
(vi) Consignee, including port consignee, if any
(vii) Warranty clause
(viii) Payment terms
(ix) Paying authority
____________________________
(Signature, name and address
of the Purchaser’s/Consignee’s authorised official)
For and on behalf of__________________
Received and accepted this contract
(Signature, name and address of the supplier’s executive
duly authorised to sign on behalf of the supplier)
For and on behalf of _________________________
(Name and address of the supplier)
(Seal of the supplier)
Date: _________________________
Place: _________________________
Page No.176
Dated 05.03.2009
HLL Lifecare Ltd.
SECTIO – XVI
COTRACT FORM – B
COTRACT FORM FOR AUAL MAITEACE COTRACT
Annual Maintenance Contract o._______________________
Between
dated_________________
(Address of Head of Hospital/Institute/Medical College)
And
(Name & Address of the Supplier)
Ref: Contract o___________ dated______________ (Contract o. & date of Contract for
supply, installation, commissioning, handing over, Trial run, Training of operators &
warranty of goods)
In continuation to the above referred contract
a) The Contract of Annual Maintenance is hereby concluded as under: 1
Schedule
o.
2
BRIEF
DESCRIPTIO
OF GOODS
3
Quantity
(os.)
4
5
Annual Maintenance
Contract Cost for Each
Unit year wise*.
Total Annual
Maintenance Contract
Cost for 5 (or as
specified) Years
[3 x (4a+4b+4c+4d+4e)]
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
a
b
c
d
e
Total value (in figure) ____________ (In words) ___________________________
b) The AMC commence from the date of expiry of all obligations under Warranty i.e.
from______________ (date of expiry of Warranty) and will expire on ______________ (date
of expiry of AMC)
c) The cost of Annual Maintenance Contract (AMC) which includes preventive maintenance and
labour, after satisfactory completion of Warranty period may be quoted for next 5 (or as
specified) years as contained in the above referred contract on yearly basis for complete
equipment (including X ray tubes, Helium for MRI, Batteries for UPS, other vacummatic parts,
_____ & _____) and Turnkey (if any).
d) There will be 98% uptime warranty during AMC period on 24 (hrs) X 7 (days) X 365 (days)
basis, with penalty, to extend AMC period by double the downtime period.
e) During AMC period, the supplier shall visit at each consignee’s site for preventive maintenance
including testing and calibration as per the manufacturer’s service/ technical/ operational
manual. The supplier shall visit each consignee site as recommended in the manufacturer’s
manual, but at least once in 6 months commencing from the date of the successful completion
of warranty period for preventive maintenance of the goods.
f) All software updates should be provided free of cost during AMC.
g) The bank guarantee valid till ______________ [(fill the date) 2 months after expiry of entire
AMC period] for an amount of Rs. _______________ [(fill amount) equivalent to 2.5 % of the
cost of the equipment as per contract] shall be furnished in the prescribed format given in
Section XV of the TE document, along with the signed copy of AMC within a period of 21
Page No.177
Dated 05.03.2009
HLL Lifecare Ltd.
(twenty one) days of issue of AMC failing which the proceeds of Performance Security shall be
payable to the Purchaser/Consignee.
h) If there is any lapse in the performance of the AMC as per contract, the proceeds AMC
bank guarantee for an amount of Rs. __________ (equivalent to 2.5 % of the cost of the
equipment as per contract) shall be payable to the Consignee.
i) Payment terms: The payment of AMC will be made against the bills raised to the
consignee by the supplier on six monthly basis after satisfactory completion of said period,
duly certified by the HOD concerned. The payment will be made in Indian Rupees.
j) Paying authority: ______________________ (name of the consignee i.e. Hospital/
Institute /Medical College’s authorised
official)
____________________________
(Signature, name and address
of Hospital/Institute/Medical College’s authorised official)
For and on behalf of__________________
Received and accepted this contract
(Signature, name and address of the supplier’s executive
duly authorised to sign on behalf of the supplier)
For and on behalf of _________________________
(Name and address of the supplier)
(Seal of the supplier)
Date: _________________________
Place: _________________________
Page No.178
Dated 05.03.2009
HLL Lifecare Ltd.
SECTIO – XVII
COSIGEE RECEIPT CERTIFICATE
(To be given by consignee’s authorized representative)
The following store (s) has/have been received in good condition:
1)
Contract No. & date
:______________________________
2)
Supplier’s Name
:______________________________
3)
Consignee’s Name & Address with
telephone No. & Fax No.
: ______________________________
4)
Name of the item supplied
:______________________________
5)
Quantity Supplied
:______________________________
6)
Date of Receipt by the Consignee
:______________________________
7)
Name and designation of Authorized
Representative of Consignee
:______________________________
8)
Signature of Authorized
Representative of Consignee with
date
:______________________________
Seal of the Consignee
:______________________________
9)
Page No.179
Dated 05.03.2009
HLL Lifecare Ltd.
SECTIO – XVIII
Proforma of Final Acceptance Certificate by the Consignee
No _______________
Date_______________
To
M/s____________________
_______________________
_______________________
Subject:
Certificate of commissioning of equipment/plant.
This is to certify that the equipment(s)/plant(s) as detailed below has/have been received in
good conditions along with all the standard and special accessories and a set of spares
(subject to remarks in Para no.02) in accordance with the contract/technical specifications.
The same has been installed and commissioned.
(a) Contract No______________________________________ dated__________________
(b) Description of the equipment(s)/plants: _______________________________________
(c) Equipment(s)/ plant(s) nos.: ________________________________________________
(d) Quantity:_______________________________________________________________
(e) Bill of Loading/Air Way Bill/Railway
Receipt/ Goods Consignment Note no___________________ dated _________________
(f) ame of the vessel/ Transporter: ___________________________________________
(g) ame of the Consignee: ___________________________________________________
(h) Date of commissioning and proving test: _____________________________________
Details of accessories/spares not yet supplied and recoveries to be made on that account.
Sl.
o.
Description of Item
Quantity
Amount to be recovered
The proving test has been done to our entire satisfaction and operators have been trained to operate
the equipment(s)/plant(s).
The supplier has fulfilled its contractual obligations satisfactorily ## or
The supplier has failed to fulfil its contractual obligations with regard to the following:
He has not adhered to the time schedule specified in the contract in dispatching the
documents/drawings pursuant to ‘Technical Specifications’.
He has not supervised the commissioning of the equipment(s)/plant(s)in time, i.e. within the period
specified in the contract from date of intimation by the Purchaser/Consignee in respect of the
installation of the equipment(s)/plant(s).
The supplier as specified in the contract has not done training of personnel.
The extent of delay for each of the activities to be performed by the supplier in terms of the contract
Page No.180
Dated 05.03.2009
HLL Lifecare Ltd.
is______________________________________________________________________________.
The amount of recovery on account of non-supply of accessories and spares is given under Para
no.02.
The amount of recovery on account of failure of the supplier to meet his contractual obligations
is__________________ (here indicate the amount).
Signature
Name:
Designation with stamp
## Explanatory notes for filling up the certificate:
o He has adhered to the time schedule specified in the contract in dispatching the
documents/drawings pursuant to ‘Technical Specification’.
o He has supervised the commissioning of the equipment(s)/plant(s) in time, i.e. within the
time specified in the contract from date of intimation by the Purchaser/Consignee in respect
of the installation of the equipment(s)/plant(s).
o Training of personnel has been done by the supplier as specified in the contract
o In the event of documents/drawings having not been supplied or installation and
commissioning of the equipment(s)/plant(s) having been delayed on account of the supplier,
the extent of delay should always be mentioned in clear terms.
Page No.181
Dated 05.03.2009
HLL Lifecare Ltd.
SECTIO – XIX
DETAILS OF SHIPPIG ARRAGEMET FOR LIER CARGOES I RESPECT OF
C&F/CIF/TURKEY/F.O.R COTRACTS FOR IMPORTS
1. SHIPMENT FROM PORTS OF U.K INCLUDING NORTHERN IRELAND (ALSO EIRE), FROM
THE NORTH CONTINENT OF EUROPE (GERMANY, HOLLAND, BELGIUM, FRANCE,
NORWAY, SWEDEN, DENMARK, FINLAND AND PORTS ON THE CONTINENTAL SEABOARD
OF MEDITERRANIAN (I.E. FRENCH WESTERN ITALIAN PORTS), TO PORTS IN INDIA.
The Seller should arrange shipment of the goods by vessels belonging to the member lines of the IndiaPakistan-Bangladesh Conference. If the Seller finds that the space on the ‘Conference Lines’ vessels is
not available for any specific shipment, he should take up with India-Pakistan-Bangladesh Conference.
Conferity House, East Grinstead, Sussex (UK), for providing shipping space and also inform the Shipping
Co-ordination Officer, Ministry of Surface Transport, New Delhi, (Cable: TRANSCHART, NEW
DELHI, Telex: VAHAN IN – 031 – 61157, 61158, 61159)
The Seller should arrange shipment through the Government of India’s Forwarding Agents, M/s Schenker
& Co., 2000-Hamburg (Cable: SCHENKER CO., HAMBURG) OR obtain a certificate from them to the
effect that shipment has been arranged in accordance with instructions of the Ministry of Surface
Transport, (TRANSCHART), New Delhi.
2.
SHIPMENT FORM PORTS OF U.K. INCLUDING NORTHERN
Goods under this contract would be shipped by the national shipping companies of the Contracting Parties
operating bilateral shipping service and vessels under the flag of third countries in accordance with the
Agreement between the Government of German Democratic Republic and the Government of the
Republic of India in the Field of Merchant Shipping signed on 9.1.1979, as amended up-to-date.
3.
ISHIPMENT FROM ADRIATIC PORTS OF EASTERN ITALY AND YUGOSLAVIA
The seller should arrange shipment of the goods by vessels belonging to the following Indian member
lines;
1. The Shipping Purchaser of India Ltd.
2. The Scindia Steam Navigation Co., Ltd
3. India Steamship Co., Ltd
For the purpose of ascertaining the availability of suitable Indian vessels and granting dispensation in the
event of their non-availability, the Seller should give adequate notice about the readiness of each
consignment from time to time at least six weeks in advance of the required position to M/s Schenker &
Co. 2000 HAMBURG (Cable: SCHENKER CO., HAMBURG) and also endorse a copy thereof to the
Shipping Co-ordination Officer, Ministry of Surface Transport, New Delhi, (Cable: TRANSCHART,
NEW DELHI, Telex: VAHAN IN – 031 – 61157, 61158, 61159)
The seller should arrange shipment through the Government of India’s Forwarding Agents M/s Schenker
& Co. 2000 HAMBURG (Cable: SCHENKER CO., HAMBURG) or obtain certificate from them to the
effect that shipment has been arranged in accordance with the instructions of the Ministry of Surface
Transport, (TRANSCHART), New Delhi.
4.
SHIPMENT FROM POLAND & CZECHOSLOVAKIA
(i) IMPORTS FROM POLAND
Page No.182
Dated 05.03.2009
HLL Lifecare Ltd.
Shipment under this contract would be made by the National flag lines of the two parties and vessels of
the third flag conference lines, in accordance with the agreement between the Govt. of the Republic of
India and the Govt. of the Polish People’s Republic regarding Shipping Co-operation dated 27.6.1960 as
amended up-to-date.
(ii) IMPORTS FROM CZECHOSLOVAKIA
Goods under this contract would be signed by the National flag lines of the two parties and vessels of the
third flag conference lines, in accordance with the Agreement Co-operation in shipping between India and
Czechoslovakia signed on 3.11.1978 and ratified on 19.12.1979, as amended up-to-date.
Shipping arrangement should be made by the Sellers in consultation with Resident Representative of the
Indian Shipping Lines in Gdynia, Co., Morska Agencja W. Gdyniul, Pulaskiego 8, P.O. Box 246, Gdynia
(Poland) – Telex : MG PL. 054301, Tel.: 207621, to whom details regarding contract number, nature of
cargo , quantity, port of lading, discharging, name of Government consignee, expected date of readiness
of each consignment etc. should be furnish at least six weeks in advance of the required position, with a
copy thereof endorsed to the Shipping Co-ordination Officer, Ministry of Surface Transport, (Chartering
Wing), New Delhi, (Cable: TRANSCHART, NEW DELHI, Telex: VAHAN IN – 031 – 61157, 61158,
61159)
5. SHIPMENT FROM U.S.S.R
Shipment under this contract should be made in accordance with the agreement between the Government
of the Republic of India and the Government of U.S.S.R on Merchant Shipping 1976, as amended up-todate, by vessels of Indo-Soviet shipping Service.
6. SHIPMENT FROM JAPAN
The shipment of goods should be made of India vessels to the maximum extent possible subject to the
minimum of 50%.
The Seller should arrange shipment of the goods in consultation with the Embassy of India in Japan,
Tokyo to whom details regarding contract number, nature of cargo, quantity, port of loading/discharge,
name of Govt. consignee, expected date of readiness of each consignment etc. should be furnished at least
six weeks in advance of the required position.
ote: The copies of such contracts are to be endorsed both to the Attached (commercial) embassy of
India in Japan, Tokyo, and the shipping Co-ordination Officer, Ministry of Surface Transport, New Delhi.
7. SHIPMENT FROM AUSTRALIA, ALGERIA, BULGARIA, ROMANIA, EGYPY
The Seller shall arrange shipment of the goods by Indian flag vessels to the maximum extent possible
subject to a minimum of 50 %. For the purpose of ascertaining the availability of suitable Indian vessels,
the seller shall give adequate notice of not less than six weeks about the readiness of each consignment to
the Shipping Purchaser of India Ltd., SHIPPING HOUSE, 245, Madame Cama Road, Bombay – 400 021
(CABLE: SHIPINDIA BOMBAY) and also endorse a copy thereof to the Shipping Co-ordination
Officer, Ministry of Surface Transport, New Delhi, (Cable: TRANSCHART, NEW DELHI, Telex:
VAHAN IN – 031 – 61157, 61158, 61159)
8. SHIPMENT FROM PAKISTAN
Page No.183
Dated 05.03.2009
HLL Lifecare Ltd.
The shipment of cargoes should be made by Indian vessels to the maximum extent possible subject to a
minimum of 50 %.
Shipment arrangement should be made by the sellers in consultation with M/s Mogul Line Ltd., 16-Bank
Street, Fort, Bombay – 400023 (Cable: MOGUL BOMBAY: Telex: 011 – 4049 MOGUL), to whom,
details regarding contract number, nature of cargo, quantity, port of lading discharging, name of
government consignee, expected date of readiness of each consignment etc. should be furnish at least six
weeks in advance of the required position, with a copy thereof endorsed to the Shipping Co-ordination
Officer, Ministry of Surface Transport, New Delhi, (Cable: TRANSCHART, NEW DELHI, Telex:
VAHAN IN – 031 – 61157, 61158, 61159)
9. SHIPMENT FROM U.S ATLANTIC & GULF PORTS
The Seller should arrange shipment of the goods by vessels belonging to the member lines of the India –
Pakistan – Bangladesh – Ceylon and Burma Outward Freight Conference. If the Seller finds that the space
of the ‘Conference Lines’ vessels is not available for any specific shipment he should take up with India –
Pakistan- Bangladesh – Ceylon and Burma Outward Freight Conference, 19, Rector Street, New York,
N.Y. 10006 USA, for providing shipping space and also inform the Shipping Co-ordination Officer,
Ministry of Surface Transport, New Delhi, (Cable: TRANSCHART, NEW DELHI, Telex: VAHAN IN –
031 – 61157, 61158, 61159)
10. SHIPMENT FROM ST. LAWRENCE AN EASTERN CANADIAN PORTS
The Seller should arrange shipment of the goods by vessels belonging to the following shipping lines;
1. The shipping Purchaser of India Ltd.
2. The Scindia Steam Navigation Co., Ltd
If the Seller finds that the space in the vessels of these Lines is not available for any particular
consignments, he should inform the Shipping Co-ordination Officer, Ministry of Surface Transport, New
Delhi, (Cable: TRANSCHART, NEW DELHI, Telex: VAHAN IN – 031 – 61157, 61158, 61159)
immediately so that dispensation from the shipping lines concerned to use alternative lifting may be
sought.
11.
SHIPMENT FROM WEST COAST PORTS OF U.S.S CANADA AND OTHER AREAS NOT
SPECIFICALLY MENTIONED ABOVE
The Seller should arrange shipment of the goods by Indian vessels to the maximum extent possible
subject to a minimum of 50 %. For the purpose of ascertaining the availability of suitable Indian vessels
and granting dispensation in the event of their non-availability, the Seller should furnish the details
regarding contract number, nature of cargo, quantity, port of lading, discharging, name of government
consignee, expected date of readiness of each consignment etc. to the Shipping Co-ordination Officer,
Ministry of Surface Transport, New Delhi, (Cable: TRANSCHART, NEW DELHI, Telex: VAHAN IN –
031 – 61157, 61158, 61159) at least six weeks in advance of the required position.
B)
BILLS OF LADIG:
(i)
C.I.F./C&F/TURNKEY SHIPMENTS
The Bills of lading should be drawn to indicate Shipper and ‘Consignee’ as under:
SHIPPER: The C.I.F (C&F)/TURNKEY SUPPLIERS concerned.
Page No.184
Dated 05.03.2009
HLL Lifecare Ltd.
COSIGEE: As per consignee’s particulars in the contract (The name an address of the
‘Port Consignee’ and ‘Ultimate’ both should be indicated).
(ii)
F.O.R SHIPMENTS
The Bills of lading should be drawn indicating shipper Consignee as under:
SHIPPER:
The F.O.R suppliers Concerned
COSIGEE: Supplier’s Indian Agent on order
ote:
1. Moreover the name of the ‘Purchaser’ and ‘Ultimate’ Consignee should appear in the body of
the Bills of Lading as the ‘Notify’ or as a remark.
2. Two non-negotiable copies of the Bills of Lading indicating the freight amount and discount, if
any allowed, should be forwarded to The Shipping Co-ordination Officer, Ministry of surface
Transport (Chartering Wing), New Delhi after the shipment of each consignment is effected.
3. The seller should avoid the use of over-aged vessels for the shipment of the goods under the
contract and if so used the cost of additional. Insurance, if any, shall be borne by the seller.
Page No.185
Dated 05.03.2009
HLL Lifecare Ltd.
SECTIO – XX
CHECKLIST
ame of Tenderer:
ame of Manufacturer:
Sl.
o.
Page o. in
Yes/
the Tender
o/ A
document
Activity
Remarks
1. a. Have you enclosed EMD of required amount
for the quoted schedules?
b. In case EMD is furnished in the form of Bank
Guarantee, has it been furnished as per
Section XIII?
c. In case Bank Guarantee is furnished, have
you kept its validity of 165 days from Techno
Commercial Tender Opening date as per
clause 19 of GIT?
2. a. Have you enclosed duly filled Tender Form as
per format in Section X?
b. Have you enclosed Power of Attorney/
Authorisation in favour of the signatory?
3.
Are you a SSI unit, if yes have you enclosed
certificate of registration issued by
Directorate of Industries/NSIC
4. a. Have you enclosed clause-by-clause technical
compliance statement for the quoted goods
vis-à-vis the Technical specifications?
b. In case of Technical deviations in the
compliance statement, have you identified
and marked the deviations?
5. a. Have you submitted satisfactory performance
certificate as per the Proforma for
performance statement in Sec. IX of TE
document in respect of all orders?
Page No.186
Dated 05.03.2009
HLL Lifecare Ltd.
Sl.
o.
Page o. in
Yes/
the Tender
o/ A
document
Activity
Remarks
b. Have you submitted copy of the order(s) and
end user certificate?
6.
Have you submitted manufacturer’s
authorization as per Section XIV?
7.
Have you submitted prices of goods, turnkey
(if any), AMC etc. in the Price Schedule as
per Section XI?
8.
Have you kept validity of 120 days from the
Techno Commercial Tender Opening date as
per the TE document?
9. a. In case of Indian Tenderer, have you
furnished Income Tax Account No. as allotted
by the Income Tax Department of
Government of India?
b. In case of Foreign Tenderer, have you
furnished Income Tax Account No. of your
Indian Agent as allotted by the Income Tax
Department of Government of India?
10.
Have you intimated the name and full address
of your Banker (s) along with your Account
Number
11.
Have you fully accepted payment terms as per
TE document?
12.
Have you fully accepted delivery period as
per TE document?
13.
Have you submitted the certificate of
incorporation?
14.
Have you accepted the warranty as per TE
document?
15.
Have you accepted terms and conditions of
TE document?
Page No.187
Dated 05.03.2009
HLL Lifecare Ltd.
Sl.
o.
16.
Page o. in
Yes/
the Tender
o/ A
document
Activity
Remarks
Have you furnished documents establishing
your eligibility & qualification criteria as per
TE documents?
17
Have you furnished Annual Report (Balance
Sheet and Profit & Loss Account) for last
three years prior to the date of Tender
opening?
N.B.
1. All pages of the Tender should be page numbered and indexed.
2. The Tenderer may go through the checklist and ensure that all the
documents/confirmations listed above are enclosed in the tender and no column is left
blank. If any column is not applicable, it may be filled up as A.
3. It is the responsibility of tendered to go through the TE document to ensure furnishing
all required documents in addition to above, if any.
(Signature with date)
(Full name, designation & address of the person duly authorised sign on behalf of the
Tenderer)
For and on behalf of
(Name, address and stamp of the tendering firm)
Page No.188
Dated 05.03.2009
HLL Lifecare Ltd.
Section – XXI
Consignee Code
Gurgaon
MGM
Consignee Address
Medical Superintendent
ESI Model Hospital
Sector - 9A
Gurgaon (Haryana)
Medical Officer Incharge,
ESI Dispensary,
M.G.M Hospital,
PAREL, MUMBAI- 12
Telephone No.
--
022-24132575
B: The consignee will ensure timely issue of CDEC, Octroi Exemption
Certificates, Road Permits & Entry Tax Exemption Certificates,
wherever applicable, to the suppliers.
Page No.189
Dated 05.03.2009

Tender No. HLL/PCD/ESIC-03/08-09 dt. 05.03.09 for

Transcription

Similar documents

R.O. Writer

Undergraduate Business School, Gurgaon

The Chest Training Session for Suppliers 17th October 2010

SYARIKAT PRASARANA NEGARA BERHAD

PDF Lot View

Pedagogical Curriculum in HLL

iennanu ag co.

Public Tender - Highway Rest Area HRA Project in Ghantoot

Supplier`s Checklist - The Wine Management System